Sopm E170

ERJ-170
STANDARD
OPERATING
PROCEDURES
MANUAL
OPS-07A
REVISION 02 15FEB2007
MANUAL NUMBER
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
OPS-07A STANDARD OPERATING

PROCEDURES MANUAL
PAGE HGH-1
HGH.1 HIGHLIGHTS
Bulletins 06-01 through 06-07 have been incorporated in revision 3.
Chapter 1
New
Change
First
Note
Changed manual status from accepted to approved.
1.1.C
Added statement authorizing the SOP, QRH and APM to

substitute for the AFM.
1.1.D
Relocated. No text change.
Chapter 2
New
Change
2.2.4.1
Updated Graphic Correct Cabin Layout
2.2.4.2
Changed paragraph title. Reworded to clarify meaning.
Chapter 3
OPS-07A
New
Change
3.1.1 A
Relocated paragraph.
3.1.1 B
Relocated paragraph.
3.1.1 C
New paragraph. Combined old 3.1.1A and 3.1.1 B to form

one new paragraph.
3.1.2
Changed Status to Basis. Grammatical correction.
3.1.3
Reworded to better match the AFM guidance.
3.2.4
Updated with ERJ-175 information.
3.2.6
Relocated CG envelope to the Loading Section.
3.2.7
New CG Envelope for ERJ-175
3.3.3
Renumbered
3.4
Entire section rewritten to more closely match AFM speed

limits.
3.5.3.1
Added text concerning delayed use of anti-ice.
3.6.1
Changed ERJ-170 LR to ERJ-170.

Changed fuel quantities to match the AFM numbers.
3.7.2
Removed (R) from this. Actual AFM limit.
3.10.1 D
Relocated to match AFM and clarify meaning.
Revision 02 15FEB2007

PROCEDURES MANUAL
PAGE HGH-2
3.10.4
Deleted.
3.12.4 C
Removed item C. [DELETED] and renumbered.
3.13.3
Changed items to bold.
3.10.6
Relocated and renumbered
3.15
Added Noise Limits Section from CF34-8E5 AFM Supplement.
Chapter 4
New
Change
4.3.2.1
Changed holding speed from 210 KIAS to speeds in holding table in the ERJ-170 Aircraft Performance Manual.
Chapter 5
New
Change
5.2
Updated FOM reference.
Changed Parking Brake response from Set to ON
Chapter 6
New
Change
6.1.1
Removed APG reference
6.2.2.1
Removed reference to the Embraer Airplane Flight Manual.
6.2.2.1
Removed reference to the Runway Analysis Manual.
6.2.2.1
Changed normal checklists on board to 1.
6.2.2.1
Removed CG calculator reference.
6.2.2.2
PBE- Added blue dot check from Release Notes.
6.2.2.6
Added comment requiring headset to be installed if

jumpseat is to be occupied. Otherwise its not required.
6.3.3
Renumbered
6.3.3
Minimum battery voltage. Revised guidance in accordance

with the ERJ-170 Factory AOM Section 3-09, page 1.
6.4.2
Removed paragraph D and Note Box.
6.4.4
Changed APU Start to remove FADEC wakeup step (ON,

OFF, ON, START to ON, START)
6.4.6B
Reworded paragraph
OPS-07A

PROCEDURES MANUAL
PAGE HGH-3
6.4.6D
New paragraph to reflect countdown timer incorporated

with Load 17.5.
6.4.6E
Reworded.
6.4.6E
Removed.
6.4.6.1B
Removed A22 CB reference.
6.4.6.1C
Changed Flight Control to FLT CTRL.
6.4.6.1F
Added Electrical PBIT procedure table.
6.4.6.2D
Relocated PBIT procedures from 6.4.6 to here.
6.5.1.5
Removed IAW to per to eliminate confusion.
6.8.1.2
Revised the WHEN conditions.
6.8.4
Added requirement to exercise trim as required by the

ERJ AOM.
6.8.2.1
Renumbered and shortened title of section: no content

change.
6.8.2.2

change.
6.8.3

change.
6.8.3.1

change.
6.8.3.2

change.
Chapter 7
OPS-07A
New
Change
7.1.2
Changed FO duties from entering fuel to resetting fuel

used.
7.1.3
Removed reference to checking ACARs time. This is now

automatically done.
7.1.16
Removed reference to station agent verifying fuel load.

This is not done nor are they trained to do this.
7.5.3
Removed (D) from Parking Brake
7.6
Removed (D) from Parking Brake
7.9
Removed delayed engine start procedure table and

inserted textual guidance on when and when not to perform a delayed engine start.
7.12.7
Added Emphasis Box concerning moving the rudders

while checking other controls.
7.12.8
Changed arrow flow to match expanded flow


PROCEDURES MANUAL
PAGE HGH-4
Chapter 8
New
Change
8.5.1
8.5.4
Chapter 10
New
Change
10.4.2
Adjusted captains flow arrow to include the IESS.
10.4.2.1
Added IESS to the flow description.
10.4.2.2
Added IESS to the flow description.
10.4.3.2
Added IESS to cross check.
10.6.6
Added procedures for the approach briefing.
10.7.7
VREF Speed table updated to reflect use of ICE data card
10.7.7
VAPP Speed table- updated maximum wind adjustment

per the ESOPM.
10.7.8
Removed the guidance on how the 10 knot ICE additive

worked as we now use the ICE card for the baseline.
Chapter 11
New
Change
11.1.1
Relocated. Added guidance on straight in approaches.

Separated text into two paragraphs.
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
Relocated. Expanded text to include Flap FULL guidance.
11.1.5
11.1.5.1
Renamed. Corrected text to match profile.
11.1.5.2
Renamed. Corrected text to match profile.
11.1.5.3
Renamed. Removed Flaps FULL since flaps were selected

in previous paragraph.
11.1.5.4
Renamed. No text change.
11.1.6
New Profile graphic.
11.1.7
Expanded table to include the information that is in the

other table for instrument approaches. Now it interfaces.
OPS-07A

PROCEDURES MANUAL
OPS-07A
PAGE HGH-5
11.2.1.1
Removed Establish and communicate a plan. This verbiage is used in the QRH for non-normal conditions and
does not belong here.
11.2.1.2
Grammar correction.
11.3.1
Added text to this paragraph.
11.3.3
Changed reference point from FAF to landing runway.
11.3.4
Added TOGA, Flaps 2 or 4 callout to the missed

approach callout table to match current procedures
11.4.1
Removed automation policy to the automation section.

Added Ops Spec reference.
11.4.2
Expanded on the automation section. Placed guidance

removed from general section here and added
11.4.2 D
Corrected grammar by adding the word mode after autopilot.

Warning box, corrected terminology referencing ILS and
APP modes to LOC and NAV modes.
11.4.3
New paragraph. Added VOR guidance particular to VOR

approaches. Formerly a footnote in a table.
11.4.4
Revised table to clarify guidance. Added reference to

pink and green needles.
11.4.5
Renumbered. No text change.
11.4.6
11.4.6.1
11.4.6.2
11.4.6.3
11.4.7
11.5.1
Added Op Spec reference.
11.6
New Section. Added guidance on conducting circling

approaches.
11.7
11.8
Section renumbered. No text change.
11.9
11.10
11.11
11.11.6
Revised flow order.
11.11.7
Revised flow order.

PROCEDURES MANUAL
PAGE HGH-6
Chapter 12
New
Change
12.1.3
Text and note box added.
12.2.3
Revised text to indicate the PF will call for CON thrust

and the PM willl then activate CON thrust.
Chapter 13
New
Change
13.1.7.2
Added example of callout.
Chapter 14
New
Change
All sections after 14.1 renumbered due to format error.
14.3.5
Deleted renumbered, subsequent paragraphs. ACARS

automatically sends F/O does not intervene.
14.3.6
Same as above.
14.3.7
Same as above.
The Remainder Of This Page Intentionally Left Blank
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPERATING PROCEDURES
PAGE ROR-1
ROR.1 RECORD OF REVISIONS

Insert and remove pages as indicated on the revision cover letter.
Follow the guidance in Chapter 1 for the insertion and recording of
manual and bulletin revisions.
For missing pages, contact the Manager of Technical Publications.

Rev. No.
Effective
Date
Initials
Rev. No.
01
6FEB2006
CM
26
02
15FEB2007
KC/LS
27
03
28
04
29
05
30
06
31
07
32
08
33
09
34
10
35
11
36
12
37
13
38
14
39
15
40
16
41
17
42
18
43
19
44
20
45
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
OPS-07A
Effective
Date
Initials
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE ROR-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE CMT-1
CMT.1 COMMENT
Please complete this form to transmit your comments, questions, or suggestions concerning all Republic Airlines, vendors or manufacturers manuals or documentation. Attach any reference pages, marking area where
changes or questions apply. Send to the Manager of Technical Publications for distribution to the appropriate
responsible Director.
Name
Base
Emp ID #
Box #
Email address
Material Unclear:
Position
Department
Chapter
Page
Chapter
Page
Chapter
Page
Date submitted
Suggestions for improvement
Material Incorrect
Correction:
Suggestions for Additional Material:

Subject
Additional comments (attach additional sheets or resources as necessary)
Director Use Only

___ Approved for consideration via RAF-102 Technical Publication Change Request Form.
___ No action warranted. Proposal is rejected.
Director name
Date
Director signature
Director Employee ID#
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE CMT-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Technical Publications
Republic Airlines
8909 Purdue Road, Suite 300
Indianapolis, IN 46268
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE BUL-1
BUL.1 RECORD OF BULLETINS

Insert Bulletins in chronological order
Follow the guidance in Chapter 1 for the insertion and deletion of
bulletin.
For missing Bulletins contact the Manager of Technical Publication

Subject
(Remarks)
Date
Removed
Bulletin
Number
Effective
Date
Initials
07-01
05/12/07
AB
EPIC Load 19
07-02
07/30/07
AB
Altitude as indicated on two PFDs
07-03
08/11/07
KL
Emergency Equipment Location
07-04
08/11/07
CC
Interior Cabin Inspection
07-05
12/15/07
AB
Increased Maximum Zero Fuel Weight
05/09/08
08-01
02/15/08
AB
Introduce the use of D-ATIS
08-02
05/09/08
DM
Revised Taxi Checklist
08-03
06/01/08
SR
Flight Director requirements for ILS

approaches at less than 4000 RVR
08-04
07/09/08
BAC
OPS-07A
07/09/08
AeroData ACARS
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE BUL-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE LEP-1
LEP.1 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

HGH-1 .....................Revision 02 15FEB2007
HGH-2 .....................Revision 02 15FEB2007
HGH-3 .....................Revision 02 15FEB2007
HGH-4 .....................Revision 02 15FEB2007
HGH-5 .....................Revision 02 15FEB2007
HGH-6 .....................Revision 02 15FEB2007
ROR-1 .......................... Original 29AUG2005
ROR-2 .......................... Original 29AUG2005
CMT-1 ......................... Original 29AUG2005
CMT-2 .....................Revision 02 15FEB2007
BUL-1 .......................... Original 29AUG2005
BUL-2 .......................... Original 29AUG2005
LEP-1 .......................Revision 02 15FEB2007
LEP-2 .......................Revision 02 15FEB2007
LEP-3 .......................Revision 02 15FEB2007
LEP-4 .......................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC-1 .......................... Original 29AUG2005
TOC-2 .......................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-1 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-2 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-3 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-4 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-5 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-6 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-7 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-8 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-9 ........................... Original 29AUG2005
INX-10 ......................... Original 29AUG2005
TOC 1-1 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 1-2 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 1 ...... Manual Administration

1-1 ..............................Revision 2 15FEB2007
1-2 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
1-3 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
1-4 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
1-5 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
1-6 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
1-7 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
1-8 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
1-9 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
1-10 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
1-11 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
1-12 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
TOC 2-1 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 2-2 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 2 ......................... Emergency

2-1 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
2-2 ................................ Original 29AUG2005

2-3 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
2-4 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
2-5 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
2-6 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
2-7 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
2-8 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
2-9 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
2-10 ........................... Revision 2 15FEB2007
2-11 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-12 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-13 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-14 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-15 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-16 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
2-17 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-18 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-19 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-20 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-21 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-22 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-23 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-24 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-25 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
2-26 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
TOC 3-1 .................. Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 3-2 .................. Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 3 ......................... Limitations

3-1 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-2 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-3 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
3-4 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-5 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
3-6 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
3-7 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-8 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-9 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-10 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-11 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-12 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-13 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
3-14 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-15 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-16 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-17 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-18 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
3-19 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
3-20 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE LEP-2
FAA Approved IND FSDO Date____________POI____________

3-21 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
3-22 .........................Revision 02 15 FEB2007
TOC 4-1 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 4-2 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 4..Standard Operating Procedures, Maneuvers & Policies

4-1 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
4-2 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
4-3 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
4-4 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
4-5 ...........................Revision 02 15 FEB2007
4-6 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
4-7 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
4-8 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
4-9 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
4-10 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-11 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-12 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-13 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-14 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-15 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-16 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-17 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-18 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-19 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-20 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-21 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-22 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-23 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
4-24 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
TOC 5-1 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 5-2 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 5Normal Procedures Checklist

5-1 ............................Revision 02 15FEB2007
5-2 ............................Revision 02 15FEB2007
5-3 ............................Revision 02 15FEB2007
5-4 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
5-5 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
5-6 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
TOC 6-1 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 6-2 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 6.............................. Preflight

6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
...........................Revision 02
...........................Revision 02
...........................Revision 02
...........................Revision 02
...........................Revision 02
...........................Revision 02
...........................Revision 02
15 FEB2007
15 FEB2007
15 FEB2007
15 FEB2007
15 FEB2007
15 FEB2007
15 FEB2007
6-8 .......................... Revision 02 15 FEB2007

6-9 ................................Original 29AUG2005
6-10 ........................ Revision 02 15 FEB2007
6-11 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-12 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
6-13 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
6-14 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
6-15 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-16 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-17 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-18 ........................ Revision 02 15 FEB2007
6-19 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-20 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-21 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-22 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-23 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-24 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-25 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-26 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-27 ........................ Revision 02 15 FEB2007
6-28 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-29 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
6-30 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
TOC 7-1 .................. Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 7-2 .................. Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 7.....................................Start
7-1 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-2 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-3 ................................Original 29AUG2005
7-4 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-5 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-6 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-7 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-8 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-9 ........................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-10 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
7-11 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-12 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-13 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-14 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
7-15 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-16 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
7-17 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-18 .......................................BUL-SOP-06-01
7-19 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-20 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-21 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
7-22 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
TOC 8-1 .................. Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 8-2 .................. Revision 02 15FEB2007
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE LEP-3

Chapter 8 ................... Before Takeoff
8-1 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
8-2 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
8-3 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
8-4 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
8-5 ............................Revision 02 15FEB2007
8-6 ............................Revision 02 15FEB2007
8-7 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
8-8 ............................Revision 02 15FEB2007
8-9 ............................Revision 02 15FEB2007
8-10 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 9-1 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 9-2 ...................Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 9 ............................... Takeoff

9-1 ............................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-2 ............................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-3 ............................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-4 ............................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-5 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
9-6 ............................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-7 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
9-8 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
9-9 ................................ Original 29AUG2005
9-10 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
9-11 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
9-12 ..........................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-13 ..........................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-14 ..........................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-15 ..........................Revision 01 06FEB2006
9-16 ..........................Revision 01 06FEB2006
TOC 10-1 .................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 10-2 .................Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 10 . Climb, Cruise & Descent

10-1 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
10-2 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-3 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-4 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-5 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-6 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-7 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-8 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
10-9 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
10-10 ........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-11 ........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-12 ........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-13 ........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-14 ........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-15 ........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
10-16 ........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
OPS-07A
10-17 ....................... Revision 02

10-18 ....................... Revision 02
TOC 11-1 ................ Revision 02
TOC 11-2 ................ Revision 02
15FEB2007
15FEB2007
15FEB2007
15FEB2007
Chapter 11 ..........................Approach
11-1 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-2 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-3 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-4 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-5 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
11-6 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-7 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-8 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-9 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-10 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-11 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-12 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-13 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-14 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-15 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-16 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-17 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-18 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-19 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-20 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-21 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-22 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-23 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
11-24 ....................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 12-1 ................ Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 12-2 ................ Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 12 ...Go Around, Missed Approach & Landing

12-1 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
12-2 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
12-3 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
12-4 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
12-5 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
12-6 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
12-7 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
12-8 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
12-9 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
12-10 ............................ Original 29AUG2005
TOC 13-1 ................ Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 13-2 ................ Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 13 ............................ Landing

13-1 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
13-2 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
13-3 ......................... Revision 02 15FEB2007
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE LEP-4

13-4 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
13-5 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
13-6 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
13-7 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
13-8 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
TOC 14-1 .................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 14-2 .................Revision 02 15FEB2007
Chapter 14....... Parking & Post Flight

14-1 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
14-2 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
14-3 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
14-4 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
14-5 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
14-6 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
14-7 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
14-8 ..........................Revision 02 15FEB2007
TOC 15-1 ..................... Original 29AUG2005
TOC 15-2 ..................... Original 29AUG2005
Chapter 15............................ ACARS

15-1 .............................. Original
15-2 .............................. Original
15-3 .............................. Original
15-4 .............................. Original
15-5 .............................. Original
15-6 .............................. Original
15-7 .............................. Original
15-8 .............................. Original
TOC 16-1 ..................... Original
TOC 16-2 ..................... Original
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
29AUG2005
Chapter 16Flight Management System

16-1 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
16-2 .............................. Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC-1
TOC.1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Highlights ...................................................................................................HGH-1
Record of Revisions ................................................................................... ROR-1
Comment ...................................................................................................CMT-1
Record of Bulletins ..................................................................................... BUL-1
List of Effective Pages ................................................................................ LEP-1
Table of Contents ....................................................................................... TOC-1
Index ............................................................................................................ INX-1
Chapter 1...................................................... Manual Administration

Chapter 2......................................................................... Emergency
Chapter 3......................................................................... Limitations
Chapter 4.... Standard Operating Procedures, Maneuvers & Policies
Chapter 5............................................ Normal Procedures Checklist
Chapter 6..............................................................................Preflight
Chapter 7.................................................................................... Start
Chapter 8................................................................... Before Takeoff
Chapter 9............................................................................... Takeoff
Chapter 10................................................. Climb, Cruise & Descent
Chapter 11..........................................................................Approach
Chapter 12.......................Go Around, Missed Approach & Landing
Chapter 13............................................................................ Landing
Chapter 14.......................................................Parking & Post Flight
Chapter 15........................................................................... ACARS
Chapter 16............................................. Flight Management System
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE TOC-2
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
INX.1
INX-1
INDEX
Actions & Callouts

go around
engine out ..........................12-6
normal ................................12-3
ILS
A
category I .........................11-10
Abbreviated Flow
ILS/PRM ....................................12-8
After Landing Checklist
landing .......................................13-5
captain ............................... 14-2
loss of thrust at or above V1 ......9-15
first officer .......................... 14-3
nonprecision approaches .........11-16
Abbreviated Flows
normal takeoff ..............................9-5
After Start Checklist
nose high recovery ....................4-18
captain ............................... 7-19
nose low recovery ......................4-19
first officer .......................... 7-20
rejected takeoff ............................9-7
After Takeoff Checklist
stall recovery ..............................4-17
PF ...................................... 10-2
wake turbulence .........................4-20
PM ..................................... 10-3
windshear recovery maneuver ...4-10
Before Start Checklist (Below the Line)
captain ............................... 7-11
see Checklists
first officer .......................... 7-12
After Landing
Before Start Checklist (To the Line)
Air Conditioning
captain ................................. 7-4
establishing ..................................6-7
first officer ............................ 7-7
Limitations ..................................3-12
Before Takeoff Checklist (Below the Line)
Aircraft
captain ................................. 8-8
approach category .....................11-6
first officer ............................ 8-9
report to .......................................6-1
Before Takeoff Checklist (To the Line)
Alerts
captain ................................. 8-5
EGPWS .....................................4-13
first officer ............................ 8-6
Altimeter
Climbing Through Transition Altitude
tolerances ....................................7-8
PF ...................................... 10-6
Altitude
PM ..................................... 10-7
changing ....................................10-8
Descending Through 10,000 Feet MSL
decision ......................................12-9
PF .................................... 10-17
setting intial altitude into PFDs ....7-1
PM ................................... 10-18
Announcements
Landing Checklist
rejected takeoff ............................9-7
PF .................................... 11-23
welcome aboard ..........................7-2
PM ................................... 11-23
Anti-Skid Inoperative ..........................13-4
Originating/Receiving Checklist
Approach
first officer .......................... 6-28
aircraft category .........................11-6
Parking & Securing
contact .......................................11-7
captain ............................... 14-5
engine out ................................11-19
Passing 10,000 Feet MSL
ILS PRM ..................................11-11
PF ...................................... 10-4
instrument
PM ..................................... 10-4
general ...............................11-6
Preliminary Landing Checklist
planning .............................11-6
PF .................................... 10-11
LDA ............................................11-8
PM ................................... 10-12
nonprecision
ACARS .............................................. 15-1
actions & callouts .............11-16
fuel on board ............................... 7-1
Symbols
............................................................ 3-2
controls by management ................... 1-2
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
INX-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Expanded Flows
see Checklists
Flow Patterns
see Checklists
Category
approach ....................................11-6
I ILS
see ILS
Certificated Weight Limits ....................3-2
Changes
altitude .......................................10-8
APU
routing ........................................10-8
Limitations ..................................3-19 Check
used in inspections ....................6-10
shutdown during Securing Checklist 148
Checklists
starter duty cycle ........................3-19
After Landing
captain
Starting ......................................3-19
abbreviated flow ........14-2
ATC Clearance
obtaining ......................................7-1
expanded flow ...........14-2
authority to authorize revisions ..........1-10
flow pattern ................14-2
Automation
first officer
use during
ILS approach .....................11-8
flow pattern ................14-3
flow ....................................14-1
B
general ...............................14-2
Brakes
After Start
anti-skid inoperative ...................13-4
captain
cooling .......................................13-4
during landing ............................13-4
Limitations ..................................3-12
flow pattern ................7-19
use during taxi .............................8-2
first officer
Breakouts
ILS/PRM ....................................12-8
actions & callouts ...............12-8
flow
pattern ................7-20
Briefings
general ...............................7-18
departure review ..........................7-8
After Takeoff
jumpseat ......................................7-2
general ...............................10-2
takeoff ..........................................8-7
PF
C
Cabin Inspection
flow pattern ................10-2
seeInterior
PM
cabin inspection
Cabin Ready Notification .....................7-3
Callouts
flow pattern ................10-2
during landing ............................13-3
Before Start (Below the Line)
engine failure .............................9-11
captain
Captain
Abbreviated Flows
see Checklists
flow pattern ................7-11
Checklists
first officer
see Checklists
general .............................11-13
RNAV .......................................11-18
landing callout ..................11-22
VDP .........................................11-14
visual
energy management ..........11-1
engine out ..........................11-5
landing callout ..................11-22
procedures .........................11-1
profile .......................11-3, 11-6
windshear ....................................4-8
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
expanded flow ........... 7-12
flow pattern ................ 7-12
Before Start (To the Line)
captain
abbreviated flow .......... 7-4
expanded flow ............. 7-5
flow pattern .................. 7-4
first officer
expanded flow ............. 7-7
flow pattern .................. 7-7
general ................................ 7-4
Before Takeoff (Below the Line)
captain
expanded flow ............. 8-9
flow pattern .................. 8-8
first officer
flow pattern .................. 8-9
Before Takeoff (To the Line)
captain
expanded flow ............. 8-5
flow pattern .................. 8-5
first officer
expanded flow ............. 8-6
flow pattern .................. 8-6
general ................................ 8-5
general .............................. 10-6
PF
abbreviated flow ........ 10-6
flow pattern ................ 10-6
PM
abbreviated flow ........ 10-7
flow pattern ................ 10-7
general ............................ 10-17
PF
abbreviated flow ...... 10-17
expanded flow ......... 10-17
flow pattern .............. 10-17
PM
abbreviated flow ...... 10-18
expanded flow ......... 10-18
flow pattern .............. 10-17
example ....................................... 4-2
Landing
OPS-07A
INX-3
general .............................11-23
PF
abbreviated flow ......11-23
expanded flow .........11-23
flow pattern ..............11-23
PM
flow pattern ..............11-23
Normal Procedures ......................5-1
Originating/Receiving
captain
flow pattern ................6-19
first officer
flow pattern ................6-28
general ...............................6-19
Parking & Securing
captain
flow pattern ................14-5
general ...............................14-5
general ...............................10-4
PF
flow pattern ................10-4
PM
flow pattern ................10-4
Preliminary Landing
expanded .........................10-16
PF
flow pattern ..............10-11
PM
flow pattern ..............10-12
preliminary landing
general .............................10-11
read & do .....................................4-3
Safety & Power On
flow patterns ........................6-4
general .................................6-4
read & do .............................4-2
Securing
general ...............................14-8
Original 29AUG2005
INX-4
ERJ-170 STANDARD
read & do .............................4-2

engine ..........................................9-9
Clearance
Daylight
pushback .....................................7-3
illumination
external lights .........10-5, 10-18
start ..............................................7-3
Climb
Decision Altitude ................................12-9
clean-up and acceleration ............9-3 Delayed Engine Start ...........................8-4
initial .............................................9-3 Departure Review ................................7-8
loss of thrust at or above V1
Descent
configuration ..............................10-9
directional control ...............9-11
factors ........................................10-9
directional control after liftoff 9-12
fuel conservation ........................10-9
loss of thrust at or above V1
planning .....................................10-9
general .................................9-8
point ...........................................10-8
initial climb .........................9-12
rate .............................................10-9
max continuous thrust 9-13, 12-5
ratio ............................................10-9
profile .................................9-14
schedule ....................................10-9
rotation ...............................9-11 Directional Control
loss of thrust at or aboveV1 .......9-11
thrust requirements ............9-11
maximum angle .........................10-1 Duty Cycle
Starter Limitations ......................3-18
slat/flap retraction ........................9-3
speed
determination .....................10-1 E
schedule ............................10-1 EGPWS
thrust ..........................................10-1
alerts ..........................................4-13
Communication
escape maneuver ......................4-12
after rejected takeoff ....................9-7
recovery .....................................4-12
COM 3
EICAS
changing from DATA to VOICE 15Engine Limit Display Markings ...3-18
8
Electrical
frequencies
establishing power .......................6-7
setting during preflight .........7-2
Emergency
Compressor/Engine
descent ......................................4-22
stall
equipment
considerations ....................9-10
escape lines .........................2-2
multiple with pilot action .....9-10
escape ropes .......................2-2
non-recoverable .................9-10
Energy Management ..........................11-1
single/multiple with self recovery 9Engine
10
compressor stall
types ....................................9-9
considerations ....................9-10
Configuration
alternate ILS ..............................11-9
non-recoverable .................9-10
descent ......................................10-9
single/multiple with self recovery 9go around ...................................12-1
10
Contact Approach ..............................11-7
types ....................................9-9
Crossbleed Start ................................7-16
crossbleed start .........................7-16
Crosswind
external air start .........................7-16
takeoff ..........................................9-2
failure .................................9-8, 13-8
Cruise
callout ................................9-11
monitoring ..................................10-8
ground track considerations 9-12
on final approach ...............11-7
D
failure recognition ......................9-11
fire ................................................9-9
Damage
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
INX-5
Limts .......................................... 3-18

severe damage ............................ 9-9
PF ....................................10-11
stable indications ....................... 7-15
PM ...................................10-13
start ........................................... 7-14
Exterior
inspection
Engine Out
flow pattern ........................6-12
approach ................................. 11-19
go around .................................. 12-5
general ...............................6-10
actions & callouts .............. 12-6
External
air start .......................................7-16
landing
reverse thrust .................... 13-3
lights
daylight illumination 10-5, 10-18
visual approach ......................... 11-5
Escape Lines/Rope ............................. 2-2
night illumination 8-9, 10-5, 10-18
Exanded Flow
F
captain ............................... 14-2
Failure
Expanded Flow
engine ..........................................9-8
on final approach .....11-7, 13-8
first officer .......................... 14-3
engine recognition .....................9-11
Expanded Flows
Fire
engine ..........................................9-9
captain ............................... 7-19
First Officer
first officer .......................... 7-21
Abbreviated Flows
see Checklists
PF ...................................... 10-2
Checklists
PM ..................................... 10-3
see Checklists
Before Start (Below the Line) Checklist
Expanded Flows
captain ............................... 7-11
see Checklists
first officer .......................... 7-12
Flow Items
see Checklists
captain ................................. 7-5
takeoff ..........................................8-8
first officer ............................ 7-7
Flaps
Before Takeoff Checklist (Below the Line)
effect in stalls .............................4-15
captain ................................. 8-9
Flare
first officer .......................... 8-10
landing .......................................13-1
de-crab ..............................13-6
captain ................................. 8-5
Flight Deck
first officer ............................ 8-6
interior inspection .........................6-2
Flight Director
PF ...................................... 10-6
takeoff ..........................................9-3
PM ..................................... 10-7
Flight Monitoring
progress .....................................10-8
PF .................................... 10-17
Flight Release
PM ................................... 10-18
preflight paperwork ......................6-1
Landing Checklist
Flight Spoilers
PF .................................... 11-23
effect in stalls .............................4-15
PM ................................... 11-24
thrust usage .................................4-5
Flow Patterns
first officer .......................... 6-29
Parking & Securing
captain ...............................14-2
captain ............................... 14-6
first officer ..........................14-3
PF ...................................... 10-4
captain ...............................7-19
PM ..................................... 10-5
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
INX-6
first officer ..........................7-20

Imbalance ..................................3-11
After Takeoff
minimum for takeoff ...................8-10
PM .....................................10-2
monitoring during flight ..............10-8
Temperature ..............................3-11
PF ......................................10-2
Before Start (Below the Line) Checklist G
captain ...............................7-11 Gate
first officer ..........................7-12
departure .....................................7-2
early departure .............................7-2
captain .................................7-4 Go Around
first officer ............................7-7
actions & callouts .......................12-3
Before Takeoff Checklist (Below the
engine out ..........................12-6
Line)
configuration ..............................12-1
captain .................................8-8
engine out ..................................12-5
first officer ............................8-9
executing ...................................12-2
ILS/PRM
captain .................................8-5
breakouts ...........................12-8
first officer ............................8-6
maneuver ...................................12-2
manual vs automatic ..................12-1
PF ......................................10-6
preparation .................................12-1
PM .....................................10-7
thrust ..........................................12-1
TOGA switch .............................12-1
PF ....................................10-17 Ground
PM ...................................10-17
track
exterior inspection ......................6-12
engine failure .....................9-12
interior cabin inspection .............6-17
interior flight deck inspection .......6-2
H
Landing Checklist
PF ....................................11-23 Holding .................................................4-5
Entries ..........................................4-5
PM ...................................11-23
Speed ..........................................4-5
captain ...............................6-19
first officer ..........................6-28
Parking & Securing
captain ...............................14-5
PF ......................................10-4
PM .....................................10-4
PF ....................................10-11
PM ...................................10-12
Safety & Power On ......................6-4
SOPs ...........................................4-2
Flows
After Landing Checklist ..............14-1
FMC
routing ..........................................7-1
Fuel
Approved ...................................3-11
checking fuel slip .........................7-1
conservation
descent ..............................10-9
entering into ACARS ....................7-1
Original 29AUG2005
I
Icing Conditions
Definition ....................................3-10
ILS
category I
actions & callouts .............11-10
alternate configuration .......11-9
automation .........................11-8
landing callout ..................11-22
missed approach point .......12-9
PRM approach .........................11-11
ILS/PRM
breakouts ...................................12-8
Imbalance
Fuel ............................................3-11
Indications
stable engine .............................7-15
Initial
climb ............................................9-3
Inspections
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
INX-7
exterior ............................ 6-10, 6-12

interior cabin .............................. 6-17
interior flight deck ........................ 6-2
Instrument
approach
general .............................. 11-6
planning ............................. 11-6
Interior
cabin inspection
flow pattern ........................ 6-17
general .............................. 6-17
flight deck inspection
flow pattern .......................... 6-2
general ................................ 6-2
Air Conditioning .........................3-12

APU ...........................................3-19
Starting ..............................3-19
Brakes ........................................3-12
Fuel
Approved ...........................3-11
Imbalance ..........................3-11
Temperature ......................3-11
Manufacturer ................................3-1
Minimum Operating Speed ..........3-8
Operations ...................................3-5
pressurization ............................3-12
Speeds ........................................3-6
Flaps ....................................3-7
Starter
Duty Cycle .........................3-18
Thrust Reversers .......................3-13
Types of Operations ....................3-1
Weight
Certificated ..........................3-2
Landing ................................3-2
Takeoff .................................3-2
J
Jumpseat
briefing ......................................... 7-2
L
Landing
actions & callouts ...................... 13-5
braking ....................................... 13-4
callouts .......................... 11-22, 13-3
after ................................. 11-23
prior to ............................. 11-22
crab & sideslip combined .......... 13-6
decrab during flare .................... 13-6
flare ........................................... 13-1
limitation
thrust reverser ................... 3-13
minimums
setting MDAs ................... 11-14
side-step ............................ 11-7
rejected landing ......................... 13-8
reverse thrust ............................ 13-3
setting data .............................. 10-13
sideslip ...................................... 13-5
thrust ......................................... 13-1
touchdown ................................. 13-2
touchdown in crab ..................... 13-6
use of speed brakes .................. 13-2
vertical guidance ....................... 13-1
Weight Limitation ......................... 3-2
LDA Approach ................................... 11-8
Liftoff
loss at or above at or above V1
directional control .............. 9-12
Lights
daylight illumination ....... 10-5, 10-18
night illumination .... 8-9, 10-5, 10-18
Limitations
OPS-07A
M
Maneuver
side-step ....................................11-7
MAP
see Missed Approach
point
Maximum
angle climb .................................10-1
performance takeoff .....................9-2
MDA
setting ......................................11-14
Mechanical Discrepancies In-Flight
in-range report .........................10-10
Minimums
fuel
takeoff ................................8-10
landing
side-step ............................11-7
setting MDAs ...........................11-14
Missed Approach
from DH .....................................12-9
point ...........................................12-9
ILS CAT I ...........................12-9
Mode Control Panel
setting during preflight .................7-2
Monitoring
during cruise ..............................10-8
flight progress ............................10-8
fuel .............................................10-8
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
INX-8
N
Navigation
courses
frequencies
New or updated standards, ..................1-2
Night
illumiation
external lights .8-9, 10-5, 10-18
Nonprecision Approach
see Approach
nonprecision
Normal
procedures checklist ....................5-1
supplemental procedures ..........7-15
takeoff
actions & callouts .................9-5
Nose
high attitude
high atttitude ..............................4-18
low attitude .................................4-19
Nosewheel/Rudder Pedal Steering
during taxi ....................................8-2
Notification
cabin ready ..................................7-3
O
o indicate review and insertion .............1-5
Operational Limits ..............................3-19
Operations
Limitations ....................................3-5
Minimum Operating Limit Speed ..3-8
Speed Limits ................................3-6
Flaps ....................................3-7
Types of .......................................3-1
P
PA
announcement
rejected takeoff ....................9-7
Performance
takeoff ..........................................9-2
PFDs
see Primary Flight Displays
policy or a procedure step ....................1-9
Position Reports .................................10-8
Power Plant
crossbleed start .........................7-16
external air start .........................7-16
Original 29AUG2005
Powerback
procedures .................................7-14
Preflight
entering ACARS data ..................7-1
FMC
routing ..................................7-1
obtaining ATC clearance .............7-1
paperwork
flight release ........................6-1
TPS ......................................6-1
weather package .................6-1
paperwork review ........................7-2
setting
assigned transponder code .7-1
communication frequencies .7-2
initial altitude ........................7-1
mode control panel ..............7-2
navigation frequencies & courses
..............................7-2
weight and balance
calculations ..........................7-2
Pressurization
limitations ...................................3-12
Primary Flight Displays
initial altitude ................................7-1
printed on any page ...........................1-10
Procedures
delayed engine start ..................7-15
engine start ................................7-14
Profiles
loss of thrust at or above V1 ......9-14
visual approach ...............11-3, 11-6
Pushback
clearance .....................................7-3
procedures .................................7-14
R
Rate of Descent .................................10-9
Read & Do Checklists
Safety & Power On .............. 4-2, 6-4
Securing ......................................4-2
Recoveries
EGPWS .....................................4-12
from multiple with pilot action ....9-10
from single/multiple with self recovery
9-10
from stalls ..................................4-16
nose high ...................................4-18
nose low ....................................4-19
stalls ..........................................4-17
wake turbulence ........................4-20
windshear ..................................4-10
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Rejected
takeoff
actions & callouts ................ 9-7
communications .................. 9-7
PA announcement ............... 9-7
procedures after .................. 9-7
Rejected Landing .............................. 13-8
Report
in-range ................................... 10-10
mechanical discrepancies ....... 10-10
to aircraft ..................................... 6-1
Resolution Advisory (RA) .................. 4-14
Reverse Thrust
engine out
landing ............................... 13-3
landing ....................................... 13-3
RNAV Approach .............................. 11-18
Rolling Takeoff .................................... 9-2
Rotation
loss at or above at or above V1 . 9-11
takeoff .......................................... 9-3
Routing
changing .................................... 10-8
S
Safety & Power On Checklist
see Checklists
Safety & Power On
Safety Wands
daylight operations .................... 7-14
Seat Belt Sign .................................... 10-5
Securing Checklist
see Checklists
Securing
Setting
landing data ............................. 10-13
MDAs ....................................... 11-14
Shoulder Harness
landing ..................................... 10-16
Shutdown
APU during Securing Checklist . 14-8
Sideslip Landing ................................ 13-5
Side-Step Maneuver .......................... 11-7
Signs
seat belt ..................................... 10-5
Slat/Flap
retraction ..................................... 9-3
SOPs
see Standard Operating Procedures
Speed
brakes
use during landing ............. 13-2
OPS-07A
INX-9
climb
determination .....................10-1
schedule ............................10-1
descent ......................................10-9
Limits ...........................................3-6
Maximum Flap Operating Speeds 3-7
Minimum Operating .....................3-8
sustaining taxi speed ...................8-1
taxi ...............................................8-1
Spoilers
effect in stalls .............................4-15
thrust usage .................................4-5
Stall Recovery
Stalls
engine compressor
considerations ...................9-10
non-recoverable .................9-10
single/multiple with self recovery 910
types ....................................9-9
recovery .....................................4-16
Standard Operating Procedures
adherence ....................................4-1
flow patterns ................................4-2
Start
clearance .....................................7-3
delayed engine ............................8-4
engines ......................................7-14
crossbleed start .................7-16
external air .........................7-16
Starter
APU ...........................................3-19
Starting
APU ...........................................3-19
Steep Turns .......................................4-21
Steering
taxi ...............................................8-2
Supplemental Normal Procedures
definition ....................................7-15
Switchlight ............................................4-3
T
Takeoff
briefing .........................................8-7
crosswind .....................................9-2
first officer ....................................8-8
flight director use .........................9-3
initial climb ...................................9-3
Limitation
Thrust Reverser .................3-13
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
INX-10
maximum performance ................9-2
min fuel quantity .........................8-10
performance system
preflight paperwork ..............6-1
rejected
actions & callouts .................9-7
communications ...................9-7
PA announcements .............9-7
procedures after ...................9-7
rolling ...........................................9-2
rotation and liftoff .........................9-3
Weight Limitation .........................3-2
Taxi
in crab landing ...........................13-6

TPS
see Takeoff Performance System
Traffic Advisory (TA) ..........................4-14
Transponder
assigned code ..............................7-1
Turns
radius during taxi .........................8-2
steep ..........................................4-21
U
Unusual Attitudes
nose high ...................................4-18
nose low .....................................4-19
nose-high recovery A&C ............4-18
brakes ..........................................8-2
initial aircraft movement ...............8-1
nosewheel/rudder pedal steering .8-2
speed ...........................................8-1
sustaining speed ..........................8-1 V
thrust management ......................8-1 V1
loss of thrust
turning radius ...............................8-2
at or above ...........................9-8
Temperature
at or above initial climb ......9-12
Fuel ............................................3-11
at or above max continuous thrust
Text that gives guidance regarding of goals or
9-13, ..................12-5
standards .............................................1-7
at or above thrust requirements 9Text that provides a listing of the possible con11
siderations ............................................1-7
Text that provides a specific order of accom- VDP ..................................................11-14
plishment ..............................................1-8 Visual Approach
landing callouts ........................11-22
Text that provides pertinent background 1-7
the Internal Evaluation Program ........1-11
Thrust
climb ..........................................10-1
go around ...................................12-1
landing .......................................13-1
loss at or above at or above V1
general .................................9-8
max continuous ........9-13, 12-5
profile .................................9-14
requirements ......................9-11
usage during taxi .........................8-1
use with flight spoilers ..................4-5
Thrust Reverser
Limitation
Takeoff ...............................3-13
limitation
landing ...............................3-13
Thrust Reversers
Limitations ..................................3-13
TOGA Switch .....................................12-1
Tolerances
altimeter .......................................7-8
Touchdown
during landing ............................13-2
Original 29AUG2005
W
W&B
see Weight and Balance
Wake Turbulence
Weather Package
preflight paperwork ......................6-1
Weight
see also Limitations
Weight & Balance
preflight ........................................7-2
Welcome Aboard Announcement ........7-2
Windshear
approach ......................................4-8
detection ......................................4-7
escape guidance mode ................4-7
recognition techniques .................4-8
recovery
general .................................4-6
techniques .........................4-10
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 1-1
Chapter 1: Manual Administration

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Flight Crewmember User Manual ............................................................. 1-1

Management Controls ............................................................................... 1-1
Availability of this Manual ....................................................................... 1-2
Compliance with this Manual ................................................................... 1-2
Maintenance and ownership of Manual .................................................... 1-2
Posting Revisions to this Manual .............................................................. 1-3
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
Insertion of Revisions ............................................................................. 1-3

Insertion of List of Effective Pages [LEP] .............................................. 1-3
Identifying Revisions .............................................................................. 1-3
1.6.3.1
1.6.3.2
1.6.3.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
Summary Page .............................................................................................. 1-3

Change Bars................................................................................................... 1-4
[Reserved] ...................................................................................................... 1-4
Recording Revision Insertion ................................................................. 1-4

Disposal of Pages .................................................................................... 1-4
Proposing Revisions ............................................................................... 1-4
1.7 Posting of Bulletins to this Manual ........................................................... 1-5

1.8 Rules of Construction ................................................................................ 1-6
1.9 Positioning of Manual Content ................................................................. 1-7
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
1.9.4
Policy ...................................................................................................... 1-7

Information ............................................................................................. 1-7
Instructions .............................................................................................. 1-7
Procedures .............................................................................................. 1-8
1.10 Use of Notes, Cautions and Warnings .................................................... 1-8

1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
Notes ....................................................................................................... 1-8

Imperative Emphasis Note ...................................................................... 1-8
Cautions .................................................................................................. 1-9
Warnings ................................................................................................. 1-9
If-Then Boxes ......................................................................................... 1-9

Intentionally Blank ................................................................................ 1-10
Content and Philosophy of this Manual ................................................ 1-10
Overall Quality and Content of Manual ................................................ 1-10
1.14.1
1.14.2
1.14.3
1.14.4
OPS-07A
Responsibility ....................................................................................... 1-10

Delegated Authority .............................................................................. 1-10
Interfaces for Manual Consistency ....................................................... 1-11
Process Measurement ........................................................................... 1-11
PAGE TOC 1-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 1-1
Chapter 1
Manual Administration
Availability of this manual.

Compliance with this
manual.
Revision of this manual.
Understanding of the
manual formatting.
Application of standard
symbols or methods.
A.
121.137(a)(2)
1.2
The ERJ-170 Standard

Operating Procedures
Manual is a user manual for
flight crewmembers.
A user manual is supplementary

to a primary user manual.
It is defined as a manual that
contains policies, procedures,
information and instructions for
specialized functions or series of
tasks in the conduct of that
persons assigned duties.
B.
This manual contains the

standard operating
procedures that are to be
used for the operation of
Republic Airlines ERJ-170/175 aircraft. All references to the ERJ170 apply to the ERJ-175 unless identified as 170 or 175 specific.
C.
The ERJ-170 SOP, Quick Reference Handbook and Aircraft

Performance Manual contains all of the required material to replace
the ERJ-170 Airplane Flight Manual in accordance with FAR
121.141(b).
D.
This manual is distributed and assigned to all flight crewmembers.
MANAGEMENT CONTROLS
A.
OPS-07A
The ERJ-170 Standard Operating

Procedures Manual is approved by
the FAA.
The checklists and operating
limitations contained in this manual
are approved by the FAA.
Where a FAR is referenced in this
manual, compliance with the
written procedures will be in
compliance with the FAR.
FLIGHT CREWMEMBER USER MANUAL
NOTE
1.1
NOTE
The purpose of this Chapter is

to provide guidance for the
A management control is defined as a task or procedural step

specifically identified by management as requiring a special action
on the part of the employee to ensure that the work product meets
the required/identified standards of completion.
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 1-2
B.
The points within the policies and procedures designated as

controls by management are identified by the symbol . All
employees (whether directly employed by Republic or by contract)
are expected to exercise special care to ensure that the work
product meets Republic Airlines standards.
C.
1.3
1.4
To further emphasize the need for the employee to exercise special

care, the words confirm or verify will be used in conjunction with
this symbol.
AVAILABILITY OF THIS MANUAL

A.
This manual must be available and immediately accessible to the

flight crewmembers when performing their assigned duties for
Republic Airlines aircraft.
B.
To comply with this policy, each flight crewmember must carry this
manual with them in their flight kit.
121.137(b)
COMPLIANCE WITH THIS MANUAL

Each assigned user will
Following the policies and procecomply with the policies and
dures of this manual will ensure
procedures provided in this
compliance with the Federal Aviation Regulations.
manual. New or updated
standards, policies and
procedures will be communicated by published bulletins. These
changes should be adhered to until permanently placed in the
manual by revision.
NOTE
A.
Should the user

Follow the procedures outlined in
the Chapter 3 (System Safety) to
identify any policy or
report policy or procedures that
procedure that might not be
have the potential to cause
consistent with the FARs,
unsafe consequences.
that information should be
communicated to their
supervisor and the Manager of Technical Publications.
NOTE
B.
1.5
MAINTENANCE AND OWNERSHIP OF MANUAL
A.
This manual must be

maintained in a current
status by the assigned user
in accordance with the
policies and procedures
specified in this Chapter.
Original 29AUG2005
NOTE
Reference: Reference: FAR 135.137

Persons performing company
duties without this manual in current status will be subject to company disciplinary and/or FAA
enforcement action.
OPS-07A
121.137(b)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
1.6
B.
This manual is considered the property of the company and must be

relinquished to Republic Airlines in the event of the users
retirement, termination, transfer or contract termination.
C.
The content of this manual, as in every Republic Airlines manual, is

managed and updated by the Manager of Technical Publications
and is the express property of Republic Airlines, Inc.
POSTING REVISIONS TO THIS MANUAL
1.6.1
INSERTION OF REVISIONS
A.
The most current revision of the ERJ-170 Standard Operating

Procedures Manual is posted at www.flyrw.com.
B.
Revisions will be forwarded to all persons and organizations on the

Technical Publications distribution list for this manual.
C.
Regardless of personal
A revision may be inserted and
schedules, the user of this
recorded as soon as it is received
manual is required to
even if it is issued more than two
weeks prior to the effective date.
confirm to Technical
Publications his receipt of
manual updating materials and his review and insertion of those
materials in his manual on or before the revisions effective date.
NOTE
2.1.1[1-5]
PAGE 1-3
D.
1.6.2
INSERTION OF LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES [LEP]

A.
An LEP (beginning at page 0.3) will be issued for the original and all
revisions to this manual.
B.
The LEP is required by the Federal Aviation Administration as a

controlling reference for the page currency of the manual.
C.
Use the LEP to verify that all pages of the manual are current.
D.
Only the most current LEP should be retained in the manual.
1.6.3
IDENTIFYING REVISIONS
1.6.3.1
OPS-07A
Users must insert all revisions prior to starting their first duty period
and prior to attending any associated briefings.
Summary Page
A.
Each revision contains a summary page that reflects important

information concerning the revision.
B.
An action page number and summary column contain pertinent

information to follow when inserting revision pages.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 1-4
1.6.3.2
Change Bars
A.
Black vertical change bars in the outside margin are used to

highlight the location of revised or deleted information on a newly
published page.
B.
Change bars will not be used

1) Opposite the new date on a revised page.
2) To indicate format and page number changes.
3) On index pages, or other pages normally generated
automatically by FrameMaker.
4) On contents pages.
C.
1.6.3.3
With the next revision of a page, previous change bars are deleted.
[Reserved]
1.6.4
RECORDING REVISION INSERTION

To indicate review and insertion of a revision, the user must record the
revisions effective date and their initials after the appropriate revision
number on the Record of Revisions page located in the front of the
manual.
1.6.5
DISPOSAL OF PAGES
A.
Verify that all out-ofThe manual holder must not disdate pages are irretrievably
card pages in hotel, airport or
destroyed by shredding,
other public area trash receptacles.
cutting, tearing or some
other form of destruction,
such that the information cannot be successfully pieced together.
NOTE
B.
The manual holder must destroy and discard out-of-date pages and
the new revision summary pages/revisions checklist.
1.6.6
PROPOSING REVISIONS
A.
The success of the Republic Airlines manual system depends on its

employees and contractors bringing professional insights to bear on
its procedures and policies. Republic Airlines welcomes and
encourages such communication to ensure that the company
operates at peak performance.
B.
An employee or contractor may propose changes and/or corrections

to Republic Airlines manuals by using the Comment Report in the
front of this manual in accordance with the following procedures:
1) Employee or contractor fills out the Comment Report.
2) Employee or contractor submits the Comment Report to the
Manager of Technical Publications by fax at 317-484-4553, by
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 1-5
email at rwpubs@flyrw.com, or through the company intranet at

www.flyrw.com.
3) The Manager of Technical Publications forwards the Comment
Report to the appropriate Director.
4) If the Director determines that a proposed modification is
warranted, he
5) Checks the option, Approved for consideration via RAF-102
Technical Publications Change Request Form; in the Directors
use only section at the bottom of the Report.
(a) Fills out RAF-102 Technical Publications Change Request
Form;
(b) Sends both the RAF-102 and the Comment Report to the
Manager of Technical Publications. This action triggers the
manual revision process explained in Chapter 7, Section 10,
Republic Airlines Manual Revision Procedures of the
Corporate Organizational Manual (COM-01); and
(c) Notifies the Comment Reports author of the companys
ultimate action regarding the proposed changes.
6) If the Director determines that no modification is warranted, he
(a) Checks the option no action warranted in the Director Use
Only section at the bottom of the Report;
(b) Remits the Report back to the Manager of Technical
Publications; and
(c) Notifies the Comment Report author regarding the
companys rejection of his proposal.
1.7
C.
The Manager of Technical Publications retains the authority to make

typographical and/or formatting changes without permission by the
Director, provided such changes do not alter a policy or procedure in
the manual.
D.
Further questions about the management of the Republic Airlines

manual system should be directed to the Manager of Technical
Publications by telephone at 317-270-1127, by email at
rwpubs@flyrw.com, or via the Republic Airlines intranet at
www.flyrw.com.
POSTING OF BULLETINS TO THIS MANUAL

A.
OPS-07A
Should circumstances require that a special revision be

accomplished on a time-critical basis, a bulletin may be issued to
this manual. To indicate review and insertion of such a bulletin, the
assigned user must record the bulletin effective date and their
initials after the appropriate bulletin number on the Record of
Bulletins page.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 1-6
Bulletins will be printed on yellow paper and will include detailed

instructions for insertion at the appropriate place in the manual.
1.8
When the information

The disposal procedures specified
contained in a bulletin is
for the manual revisions also
apply to outdated bulletins.
incorporated into the normal
text of the manual, the
assigned users are
instructed on a revision summary to remove the bulletin pages.
NOTE
B.
C.
To indicate removal, users must record the date the bulletin is

removed on the Record of Bulletins page.
D.
Users must insert all bulletins prior to starting their first duty period
and prior to attending any associated briefings.
RULES OF CONSTRUCTION
The following apply to the use of certain specific terminology within the
text of this manual
1) Gender - In this manual, the male or female gender may be used
in a generic sense to designate both sexes.
2) Will, Shall and Must - The words will, shall, and must are
used in an imperative sense to state the requirement to
accomplish the act prescribed. Compliance is mandatory.
3) May - The word may is used in a permissive sense to state
authority or permission to do an act. Compliance is not
mandatory.
4) Includes - The word includes means includes, but is not
limited to...
5) Refer to - Where further discussion or reference is suggested,
the notation Refer to.... directs the reader to material located in
another paragraph, chapter or manual. In these cases, the
referenced location should be specific as to manual, chapter and
paragraph.
6) FAR or FARs - Where used in this manual, this acronym will be
an abbreviation for Federal Aviation Regulation(s) which are
included in Title 14 CFR (Code of United States Federal
Regulations.
7) Republic - Where used in this manual, this single word will
denote the company, Republic Airlines, Incorporated.
8) Internet or Intranet -
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
1.9
NOTE
Where used in this

manual, Internet refers to
a network of web pages
that offers content without
prior authorization.
An example of an intranet website

is www.flyrw.com in which only
employees and designated contractors have access authorization.
NOTE
Where used in this manual,

Intranet refers to the
network of web pages that
offers content only to
authorized users.
PAGE 1-7
An example of an internet website

is www.republicairlines.com, in
which anybody with a connection
to the internet can access the
sites information.
POSITIONING OF
MANUAL CONTENT
This manual contains text that is used for four different purposes
1) Policy;
Due to the use of embedded FAR requirements, the

user must comply with the
requirements listed in all
forms of manual content.
2) Information;
3) Instructions; and
4) Procedures.
1.9.1
POLICY
A.
Text that gives guidance regarding of goals or standards of the

organization is considered policy.
B.
Policy may be inserted anywhere in the text - even within a

procedural step. Examples of policy within the procedural step
would be to establish a control (or standard) for the acceptable
completion of that step.
C.
Throughout this manual, references to Federal Aviation Regulations

have been expressed as, or embedded in, company policy.
1.9.2
INFORMATION
A.
Text that provides pertinent background or further clarifies the policy

or a specific procedural step is considered information.
B.
Throughout this manual, information is provided that contains

embedded discussion taken from FAA and other government
advisory documents.
INSTRUCTIONS
A.
OPS-07A
Text that provides a listing of

the possible considerations
when accomplishing a task
is defined as instructions.
NOTE
1.9.3
An example of instructions would

be an explanation of how to complete a form.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 1-8
B.
Instructions differ from procedures in that the successful

accomplishment of the tasks is not predicated on their
accomplishment in a specific order.
C.
Throughout this manual, there are instructions that were taken, in

part or as a group, from the FARs and FAA advisory documents.
1.9.4
1.10
PROCEDURES
A.
Text that provides a specific order of accomplishment of series of

tasks is considered a procedure.
B.
The procedure should have 2 or more detailed steps. The reader

should be able to ascertain who, what, when, where, how and why
from the procedure and its associated policy.
C.
Throughout this manual, there are procedures that lead to a

completed result necessary to meet FAR requirements.
D.
Procedures in this manual are usually - but not in all cases enclosed in a numeric procedural table, depending on the
complexity.
USE OF NOTES, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS

These additions to the text are used to highlight or emphasize important
points when necessary. They call attention of the user about safety and
precautionary or additional information to make the job safe, easier and
efficient.
NOTES
A.
Notes provide amplified

information, instruction, or
emphasis (see example).
NOTE
1.10.1
A NOTE is identified and displayed in this type of box.
B.
Notes call attention to

methods that enable a user
to perform a job easier or wiser.
C.
If a Note applies to consecutive procedural steps, it is placed under

the topic heading for those steps.
1.10.2
IMPERATIVE EMPHASIS NOTE

A.
B.
Imperative Emphasis
Notes are used to
emphasize the necessity
to comply with the text
provided (see example).
An IMPERATIVE NOTE is
identified and displayed in
this type of box.
This display is used when the text is important, but does not meet
the criteria for a caution or warning.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
1.10.3
CAUTIONS
A.
1.10.4
PAGE 1-9
Cautions are instructions

about hazards that, if
ignored, could result in
damage to an aircraft
component or system
(see example).
A CAUTION is identified and

displayed in this type of box.
B.
Cautions specify methods and procedures that must be followed to

avoid damage to equipment.
C.
If the caution applies to consecutive subtasks/steps, it is placed

before the first subtask/step.
D.
If the caution applies to several, non-consecutive subtasks/steps, it

is placed before the applicable subtask/step.
WARNINGS
Warnings are instructions about hazards that, if ignored, could result in
injury, loss of aircraft control or loss of life (see example).
A WARNING is identified and displayed in this type of
box.
IF-THEN BOXES
A.
B.
Where policy or a
procedure step discusses
more than one possible
action based on different
lead-in scenarios.,
OPS-07A
The If-Then Box format will not be

used for aircraft operational checklists.
This will be formatted in the form of an If-Then Box to call attention

to the decision-making authorized.
If....
C.
NOTE
1.11
Then....
The door is blue...
Open the door.
The door is yellow...
Knock for permission to enter.
This box is used to provide direction to the employee as to the

appropriate action authorized by management.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 1-10
D.
1.12
1.13
In situations where the employee is only authorized to make one

decision, there will be no If-Then box. The employee must contact
management if a different scenario arises.
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
A.
This page intentionally left blank will be printed on any page that
contains no text or graphics. This will usually be the even page at
the end of a Chapter.
B.
The remainder of the page intentionally left blank will be printed on

any page that has more than ten lines of blank space at the bottom
of the page.
C.
The only exception to paragraph B is when End of Chapter or End

of Section is printed immediately following the text.
CONTENT AND PHILOSOPHY OF THIS MANUAL

[RESERVED]
1.14
OVERALL QUALITY AND CONTENT OF MANUAL
1.14.1
RESPONSIBILITY
The Director of Operations (DO) is responsible and answerable for the
content and quality of the ERJ-170 Standard Operating Procedures
Manual.
1.14.2
DELEGATED AUTHORITY
A.
The Director of Operations has delegated to the Chief Pilot the

authority to authorize revisions to this manual provided that these
revisions are acceptable to the FAA Principal Operations Inspector
prior to use for Republic operations.
B.
The Chief Pilot has delegated to the ERJ-170 Program Manager the
authority to propose, in draft, revisions to the policies and
procedures of this manual. Such proposals must have been
coordinated with the Manager of Technical Publications and
Manager of Training prior to the final draft of that proposal.
C.
The Director of Operations has delegated to the Chief Pilot the

authority to implement, train and audit the procedures in this
program.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
1.14.3
PAGE 1-11
INTERFACES FOR MANUAL CONSISTENCY

A.
The Chief Pilot is responsible for ensuring that this manual has been
interfaced properly with policy and procedures for parallel tasks that
are performed by other specialities and included in other manuals.
B.
The appropriate manual and/or document reference for use by the

identified technical persons involved in processes that interface with
this manual are listed below
Flight Crewmembers
1.14.4
ERJ-170 Standard Operating Procedures, OPS-07A
Ground Instructors
Flight Instructors
EERJ-170 Standard Operating Procedures, OPS07A
Check Airmen
Operations Training
Flight Ops Training Manual, OPS-06A

Flight Crew Training Manual, OPS-06B
Director of Safety
Internal Evaluation Program, APM-08
PROCESS MEASUREMENT
The following overall process measurement actions will be taken with
respect to the ERJ-170 Standard Operating Procedures Manual policies
and procedures.
A.
Republic Airlines has established the Internal Evaluation Program

(IEP) to monitor and analyze the performance and effectiveness of
its Flight Operations programs.
1) The Director of Safety will ensure that Republic Airlines and the
companies that it contracts with to conduct IEP audits will
conduct their evaluations in accordance with the IEP Manual on
a regularly scheduled basis.
2) IEP audits will evaluate the performance and effectiveness of
Flight Operations programs in producing the desired results,
including those functions performed by other contracted
companies.
3) The Internal Evaluation Program does not relieve each
department of its own responsibility to conduct ongoing
evaluations of their own procedures to ensure compliance with
Republic Airlines Policy, the Code of Federal Regulations and
other external requirements.
B.
The Flight Operations IEP Audit focuses on process measurements

in the following categories
Director of Operations
Chief Pilot
Passenger Handling
Flight Attendant Duties/Cabin Procedures
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 1-12
Airman Duties/Flight Deck Procedures

Operational Control
Carry-On Baggage
Carriage of Cargo
Deicing
Aircraft Performance Operating Limitations
Lower Landing Minimums
Computer Based Record Keeping System
Hazardous Materials/Dangerous Goods Program
Other Personnel with Operational Control
Dispatch or Flight Release
Flight/Load Manifest/Weight and Balance Control
MEL/CDL Procedures
End of Chapter
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPERATING
PAGE TOC 2-1
Chapter 2: Emergency
2.1 Emergency Equipment .............................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1
2.1.2
Description & Operation. ........................................................................ 2-1

Flightdeck Escape Rope .......................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2.1
2.1.2.2
2.1.2.3
2.1.2.4
2.1.3
2.1.4
Emergency Evacuation ................................................................................. 2-2

Location ........................................................................................................ 2-2
Preflight Check. ............................................................................................ 2-3
Operation ...................................................................................................... 2-3
Emergency Equipment Location ERJ-170 ............................................ 2-4

Emergency Equipment Location ERJ-175 ............................................ 2-5
2.1.4.1
Emergency Exits and Lights ......................................................................... 2-6
2.2 Emergency Lighting System ..................................................................... 2-7

2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
Flightdeck Control .................................................................................. 2-7

Cabin Control .......................................................................................... 2-7
Lights ...................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.3.1
2.2.3.2
2.2.4
Pilots Overhead Panel .................................................................................. 2-8

On Flight Attendant Control Panels ............................................................ 2-8
Floor Proximity Emergency Escape Path Lighting System .................... 2-9

2.2.4.1
2.2.4.2
2.2.4.3
Location ...................................................................................................... 2-10

Charging ...................................................................................................... 2-10
Flight Attendant Control Panel Cabin Lighting Console ........................... 2-11
2.3 ERJ-170 Phase II Flightdeck Door .......................................................... 2-12

2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
Background ........................................................................................... 2-12

Description. ........................................................................................... 2-12
Peephole ................................................................................................ 2-12
Power Supply ........................................................................................ 2-12
Decompression Panels .......................................................................... 2-12
Electromechanical Latch ....................................................................... 2-12
2.3.6.1
2.3.6.2
2.3.6.3
2.3.6.4
2.3.6.5
Dead Bolt System ....................................................................................... 2-13

Flightdeck Access Panel (cabin side). ........................................................ 2-13
Phase II Flightdeck Door - Cabin Side ...................................................... 2-14
Flightdeck Door Response Button and Annunciators ................................. 2-14
Phase II Flightdeck Door - Flightdeck Side ................................................ 2-14
2.4 Flightdeck Door Procedures .................................................................... 2-15

2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
Preflight Procedure ............................................................................... 2-15

Normal Procedures for Opening the Cockpit Door .............................. 2-16
Normal Flightdeck Exit Procedure ....................................................... 2-16
Emergency Flightdeck Entry Procedure ............................................... 2-16
Response to Emergency Access Aural Alarm ...................................... 2-16
Emergency Egress ................................................................................. 2-16
2.5 Emergency Exits ..................................................................................... 2-17

2.6 Cabin Doors (Main and Service) ............................................................. 2-17
2.6.1
Cabin Door Operation (Main and Service) ........................................... 2-18

2.6.1.1
2.6.1.2
2.6.1.3
2.6.1.4
2.6.1.5
OPS-07A
Escape Slide Disarm ................................................................................... 2-18

Opening Doors ............................................................................................ 2-19
Closing Main Cabin Doors ......................................................................... 2-20
Escape Slide Arming .................................................................................. 2-21
Door Emergency Opening .......................................................................... 2-22
PAGE TOC 2-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.7 Emergency Evacuation Slide ................................................................... 2-24

2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
Girt Retaining Fasteners/Straps ............................................................ 2-25

Escape Slide, Girt Bar, and Manual Inflation Handle ........................ 2-25
Passenger And Service Doors External Handle ................................. 2-26
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 2-1
Chapter 2
Emergency
2.1
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Crewmembers must be thoroughly familiar with the location and use of
emergency equipment. This chapter contains an Emergency Equipment
& Exit Location diagram and aircraft specific information on emergency
equipment.
2.1.1
DESCRIPTION & OPERATION.

The FOM contains descriptions of the following generic emergency
equipment items.
Flightdeck Window Escape Ropes
Crash Ax
Enhanced Emergency Medical Kit (EEMK)
Fire Extinguishers
First Aid Kit
Megaphone (cabin only)
Personal Flotation Devices (Life Vests)
Portable Oxygen Bottle with Mask
Protective Breathing Equipment (PBE)
Emergency Escape Path Lighting and Exit Signs
Flightdeck Oxygen Breathing System
Automatic External Defibrillators (AEDs)
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-2
2.1.2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
FLIGHTDECK ESCAPE ROPE
2
5
7
6
2.1.2.1
Emergency Evacuation
The escape ropes are used as an aid for flight crew members to
evacuate through the cockpit window emergency exit.
2.1.2.2
Location
There are two (2) escape ropes. Each is located in the ceiling above both
the captains and first officers seats.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
PAGE 2-3
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.1.2.3
Preflight Check.
1) Ensure rope is in place.
2) Check the strap is anchored to the aircraft before dropping it out
the window.
The illustrated technique is recommended but difficult & should be
used only in an extreme emergency.
2.1.2.4
Operation
1 Depress the lock button.
2 Pull the window handle in and back. Slide window aft.
3 Pull the escape rope from the overhead compartment.
4 Deploy the escape rope and exit the flightdeck head first.
5 Carefully begin evacuation down the escape rope.
6 Using the escape rope loops, continue evacuating.
7 Upon reaching the ground, assist others as necessary.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-4
2.1.3
ERJ-170 STANDARD
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT LOCATION ERJ-170
Cockpit
Cockpit
Crash Axe
Escape Rope
Flashlight
Captain Oxygen
Lifevest
Halon Extinguisher
PBE
Escape Rope
Flashlight
First Officer Oxygen
Lifevest
Observer Oxygen
Observer Lifevest
Forward Lavatory
Emergency Exit 1R
Fixed Halon
Smoke Detector
Wardrobe Closet
First Aid Kit
PBE
POB
Halon Extinguisher (2)
On-Board Wheelchair
Emergency Exit 1L
Forward FA Jumpseat
PA System
Interphone Call System
FA Lifevest
Manual Release Tool
Flashlight
Emergency Light Switch
Passenger supplemental oxygen

masks (3) located above each seat
set.
Left Overhead Bin Row 1
Passenger flotation devices

located at each passenger seat.
Grab and Go Kit

Demo Equipment
Infant life vests located aisle seats,

even rows, aircraft right.

EEMK
Aft Right Bulkhead Wall Mount
Aft Left Bulkhead Wall Mount
PBE
PBE
Aft Right Doghouse
Aft Left Doghouse
Halon Extinguisher
Megaphone
Halon Extinguisher
POB
Aft Right Bulkhead Compartment

Aft Left Bulkhead Compartment
First Aid Kit
AED
Demo Equipment
Emergency Exit 1R
Emergency Exit 2R
Aft FA Jumpseat
PA System
FA Lifevest
Manual Release Tool
Flashlight
Original 29AUG2005
Aft Lavatory
Fixed Halon
Smoke Detector
OPS-07A
SOP-07-03, PAGE 1 OF 8
SOP BULLETIN
SOP-07-03
Effective Date: August 11, 2007
To: All SOP Holders
From: Kevin Cline, RJ-170 Program Manager
Subject: Emergency Equipment Location
Directions:
1) This bulletin remains in effect until instructed to remove it in a
future revision.
2) Insert this bulletin after 2-4 in the SOM.
3) Record the insertion of SOP-07-03 in the Record of Bulletins
section on page BUL-1 of your Standard Operating Procedures
Manual.
Background: Due to the number of aircraft configuration in Republic
Airlines fleet, the SOM is being updated with all aircraft
equipment diagrams.
2.1.3
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT LOCATION ERJ170 - 70 SEAT AIRCRAFT
2.1.4
2.1.5
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT LOCATION ERJ170 - 76 SEAT NON

OVERWATER AIRCRAFT
2.1.6
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT LOCATION ERJ170 - 76 SEAT

OVERWATER AIRCRAFT
2.1.7
2.1.8
EMERGENCY EXITS AND LIGHTS
PAGE 2-5
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.1.4
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT LOCATION ERJ-175

Cockpit
Cockpit
Crash Axe
Escape Rope
Flashlight
Captain Oxygen
Lifevest
Halon Extinguisher
PBE
Escape Rope
Flashlight
First Officer Oxygen
Lifevest
Observer Oxygen
Observer Lifevest
Forward Lavatory
Emergency Exit 1R
Fixed Halon
Smoke Detector
Right Overhead Bin Row 1
Forward FA Jumpseat
First Aid Kit

PBE
POB
Halon Extinguisher (2)
PA System
FA Lifevest
Manual Release Tool
Flashlight
Passenger supplemental oxygen

masks (3) located above each seat
set.
Emergency Exit 1L
Passenger flotation devices

located at each passenger seat.
Grab and Go Kit

Demo Equipment
Infant life vests located aisle seats,

even rows, aircraft right.

EEMK
AED
Aft Left Doghouse
Aft Right Doghouse
POB
First Aid Kit
Megaphone
POB
Halon Extinguisher
PBE
Halon Extinguisher
PBE
Demo Equipment
Emergency Exit 1R
Emergency Exit 2R
Aft FA Jumpseat
Behind Aft Galley Carts
PA System
FA Lifevest
Manual Release Tool
Flashlight
Onboard Wheelchair
OPS-07A
Aft Lavatory
Fixed Halon
Smoke Detector
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-6
2.1.4.1
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Emergency Exits and Lights
EXIT
LOCATOR
SIGN
EXIT
IDENTIFIER
SIGN
121.310(b)(1)
COCKPIT
EMERGENCY
FLOODLIGHT
PASSAGE WAY
EMERGENCY
FLOODLIGHT
EXIT
MARKER
SIGN
EXIT
MARKER
SIGN
EXIT
IDENTIFIER
SIGN
PASSAGE WAY
EMERGENCY
FLOODLIGHT
EMERGENCY
LIGHT
EXIT
LOCATOR
SIGN
EXIT
IDENTIFIER
SIGN
EXIT
MARKER
SIGN
PASSAGE WAY
EMERGENCY
FLOODLIGHT
Original 29AUG2005
EXIT
IDENTIFIER
SIGN
EXIT
MARKER
SIGN
PASSAGE WAY
EMERGENCY
FLOODLIGHT
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.2
EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM
121.310(d)(1)(i)
PAGE 2-7
A.
Emergency lighting consists of internal and external lights powered

by four dedicated batteries connected to the ESS BUS. The battery
charge is sufficient to supply all emergency lights for approximately
10 minutes. External emergency lighting is provided by each of the
escape slides located at each of the four doors of the airplane.
B.
Internal emergency lights comprise the exit locator signs, exit

marker signs, exit ID signs, cabin/cockpit emergency lights and
passageway emergency lights.
C.
Passageway emergency lights are photoluminescent strips that are

charged prior to the first flight of the day through the interior cabin
lighting.
2.2.1
FLIGHTDECK CONTROL
121.310(d)(1)(ii)
A.
The emergency lighting system is controlled by the EMER LT switch

on the overhead panel. The switch has three positions, OFF,
ARMED and ON and is guarded to the ARMED position.
121.310(d)(1)(iii)
B.
With the switch in the ARMED position, the emergency exit lights will
normally be extinguished. If the power to the ESS BUS fails or if AC
power has been turned off, the emergency exit lights illuminate
automatically.
121.310(d)(1)(i)
2.2.2
121.310(d)(1)(ii)
CABIN CONTROL
A.
The emergency exit lights may be illuminated by a button on either

the forward or aft flight attendant control panels. This is an ON
button and is guarded to prevent inadvertent activation. For system
testing, there is also an adjacent TEST button.
B.
Without activating the ON button, the lights are controlled from the
flightdeck. With the button depressed, the flight attendant may
override the flightdeck controls and illuminate all the emergency
lights. Control from this panel is available in the event of automatic
control failure.
2.2.3
LIGHTS
A.
The flightdeck aft DOME light contains a separate bulb that is

powered by the emergency lighting system to provide illumination
for flightdeck evacuation.
B.
Interior emergency exit lights are located:

in the bullnose of the stowage bins to illuminate the aisle;
over the entry/service door(s) to indicate the exit locations; and
in the ceiling to assist locating the exists and provide general
illumination in the area of the exits.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-8
2.2.3.1
ERJ-170 STANDARD
C.
Self-illuminating exit locator signs are installed at the forward,

middle, and aft end of the passenger cabin.
D.
Exterior emergency lights illuminate the escape slides. The fuselage

installed escape slide lights are adjacent to the forward and aft
service and entry doors. Two lights are also installed on the fuselage
to illuminate the ground contact area
Pilots Overhead Panel
121.310(d)(1)(i)
1 EMERGENCY EXIT LIGHTS SWITCH
OFF - Lights off and batteries being charged if power is available.

ARMED - All emergency lights will illuminate automatically if power to
ESS BUS fails. Batteries being charged by the electrical system.
ON - All emergency lights illuminated by individual batteries. No
recharging.
Whenever any of the lights are illuminated, they are being powered by
their own batteries only and will last approximately 10 minutes.
2.2.3.2
On Flight Attendant Control Panels
121.310(d)(1)(i)
EMERGENCY LIGHT
ON/
ARMED
TEST
1 FLIGHT ATTENDANT EMERGENCY SWITCH
ON - Turns on all emergency lights.
TEST - One-minute test of all

passenger cabin emergency
lights.
Original 29AUG2005
NOTE
ARMED - Automatically illuminates all lights in case of ESS BUS

electrical power loss or if aircraft electrical power is turned off.
Never test the emergency light
system using this switch. This
switch is only used by maintenance.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.2.4
PAGE 2-9
FLOOR PROXIMITY EMERGENCY ESCAPE PATH LIGHTING

SYSTEM
The system operates in conjunction with the existing emergency light
system. The escape path and exit indicators are designed to quickly
locate the nearest exit during emergency evacuations when low visibility
conditions exist in the cabin. The system includes special cues for oneway egress routes. These lights are activated in conjunction with the
existing aircraft emergency lighting system.
The exit indicator signs for the forward and rear entry/service doors are
on the forward side of all doors.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-10
2.2.4.1
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Location
Photoluminescent strips are installed along the passenger cabin floor to

provide a means of identifying the emergency escape path even in
dense smoke conditions. Double red dots on the strips indicate direction
change or the end of each exit path.
AFT GALLEY
SERVICE DOOR
AFT MAIN DOOR
FWD MAIN DOOR

FWD GALLEY
SERVICE DOOR
2.2.4.2
Charging
Photoluminescent escape path strips must be charged prior to the first
flight of the day by interior cabin lighting. Ceiling and entrance cabin
lighting must be set to BRIGHT mode for at least 15 minutes. The strip
luminescence will be available for 7 hours. Luminescence time is not
limited if daylight exists in the cabin, or if cabin lighting is set to BRIGHT.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.2.4.3
PAGE 2-11
Flight Attendant Control Panel Cabin Lighting Console
1 ON - Illuminated Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicates lighting is on.

2 BRIGHT/DIM - When depressed and BRIGHT LED is lit, indicates
Floor Proximity Emergency Escape Path Lighting is at its brightest.
When further depressed and DIM LED is lit, indicates the lighting is
dimmed.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-12
2.3
2.3.1
ERJ-170 STANDARD
ERJ-170 PHASE II FLIGHTDECK DOOR
BACKGROUND
The ERJ-170 will be equipped with a Phase II Flightdeck Door. The

Phase II door incorporates several safety features designed to provide
improved security for the flightdeck.
This section provides information relating to the doors composition and
operation.
2.3.2
DESCRIPTION.
A bullet-proof, intrusion-resistant, rearward-opening, hinged door
separates the flightdeck from the passenger cabin. It has an electromagnetic locking system controlled by the pilots; a wide-angle peephole,
decompression/egress panels; cabin-side access panel; flightdeck door
response button; dead bolt system; and an operative door latch on the
flightdeck side.
2.3.3
PEEPHOLE
An improved peephole is provided with this Phase II door. This peephole
provides a 135 field of view through bulletproof glass.
2.3.4
POWER SUPPLY
The flightdeck door system operates with 28 volt DC power supplied by
DC BUS 2.
2.3.5
DECOMPRESSION PANELS
The ERJ-170 flightdeck bulkhead construction allows relief of cabin overpressure (flightdeck rapid decompression) by means of the upper and
lower door panels. When two redundant differential pressure sensors
detect rapid pressure drop on the flightdeck, panel latches will be
commanded to open simultaneously, allowing the panels to swing
forward. The upper panel configuration is such that it attempts to
minimize injury to the jumpseat rider from being hit on the head.
2.3.6
ELECTROMECHANICAL LATCH
A spring opens the electromechanical latch when it is not energized,
ensuring the fail open condition to the cockpit door. When the door is in
the closed position and power is supplied to the aircraft, the door will lock
automatically. The dead bolt system is accessible only from the
flightdeck. It allows the pilots to secure the door only when under MEL
situations and the Flightdeck Access System LOCK button has been set
to OFF. The cabin side of the deadbolt is a knob and has no effect on the
dead bolt system.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.3.6.1
Dead Bolt System
2.3.6.2
Flightdeck Access Panel (cabin side).
PAGE 2-13
The panel is installed adjacent to the door on the cabin side, on the right.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-14
2.3.6.3
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Phase II Flightdeck Door - Cabin Side
UPPER BLOW
OUT PANEL
UPPER PIVOT PIN
PEEP HOLE
DOOR PANEL
DOORKNOB
MAINTENANCE LOCK
2.3.6.4
LOWER PIVOT PIN
Flightdeck Door Response Button and Annunciators

A three-button panel is installed in the flightdeck on the center pedestal.
2.3.6.5
Phase II Flightdeck Door - Flightdeck Side

BLOW OUT
PANEL
QUICK RELEASE
PASSIVE LOCK
PEEP HOLE
DOOR PANEL
DOORKNOB
LOWER BLOW
OUT PANEL
STRAP HANDLE
ELETROMECHANICAL
LATCH
MAINTENANCE LOCK
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.4
FLIGHTDECK DOOR PROCEDURES
2.4.1
PAGE 2-15
PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
A system preflight check is required on the first flight of the day.
Accomplish the following procedures:
Step
Flight Crewmember
With a flightdeck crewmember on the flightdeck...
Flightdeck Door........................................................... CLOSE
LOCK Button.............................................. PRESS to lock door
Visually check the lock mechanism is in the LOCK position.
TEST Button ............................................................... PRESS

Continually tests the flightdeck aural alert while pressed, regardless of
audio selection.
LOCK Button.......................................... PRESS to unlock door
Flightdeck Door.............................................................OPEN
Step
Flight Crewmember
With a flightdeck crewmember still on the flightdeck and another
crewmember assisting from the cabin...
Flightdeck Door........................................................... CLOSE
LOCK Button.............................................. PRESS to lock door
EMERGENCY FLIGHTDECK ACCESS ................................ PRESS

The assisting crewmember will press the EMERGENCY FLIGHTDECK
ACCESS button on the FLIGHTDECK ACCESS PANEL (at the top of the
galley wall next to the ground service unit panel).
10
Step
Flightdeck AuralTimed entry chime

The flightdeck crewmember will hear the timed entry chime.
Flight Crewmember
After 30 seconds...
OPS-07A
11
Flightdeck Door...................................... Automatically unlocks
12
Preflight Procedure .................................................COMPLETE

The preflight procedure is considered complete if all the above steps are
successful.
13
Flightdeck Door.............................................................OPEN
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-16
2.4.2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
NORMAL PROCEDURES FOR OPENING THE COCKPIT DOOR

These procedures are located in the Flight Operations Manual
2.4.3
NORMAL FLIGHTDECK EXIT PROCEDURE

2.4.4
EMERGENCY FLIGHTDECK ENTRY PROCEDURE

2.4.5
RESPONSE TO EMERGENCY ACCESS AURAL ALARM

2.4.6
EMERGENCY EGRESS
If the door is jammed or stuck, emergency egress from the flightdeck is
provided for by removing a quick release pin, manually unlocking the
latch and pushing the flightdeck door towards the cabin.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.5
EMERGENCY EXITS
PAGE 2-17
The ERJ-170 is equipped with a total of six emergency exits. All four
main cabin doors are emergency exits. In addition, the two direct vision
windows in the flightdeck are also designed as emergency exits.
2.6
CABIN DOORS (MAIN AND SERVICE)

The ERJ-170 is equipped with two main entry doors. Both are located on
the left fuselage, forward and aft. Under normal operations, the forward
main door is used to board and deplane passengers. Additionally, two
service doors are located on the right fuselage, forward and aft.
The door opening operation is manual. The system has a mechanical
assist. The door swings outward and forward toward the airplanes nose.
Internal and external handles operate the door movement. The door
remains against the airplane fuselage when fully open, thereby leaving
the entrance completely clear for jetway use.
All doors have a sight window installed above the door handle assembly.
All doors are equipped with an emergency evacuation slide. The
emergency evacuation slide is stowed in a container at the lower part of
the door. The emergency evacuation slide is controlled by a girt bar
mechanism inside the door. The mechanism can be manipulated
manually by using the evacuation slide handle. When the door is opened
from the outside, the emergency evacuation slide release mechanism is
automatically disabled. (See also 2.7, "Emergency Evacuation Slide")
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-18
2.6.1
ERJ-170 STANDARD
CABIN DOOR OPERATION (MAIN AND SERVICE)
2.6.1.1
Escape Slide Disarm

ARMED
2
DISARMED
Lift the handle cover.
Lift the red evacuation slide/vent flap handle up.
Check the escape slide indicator. Indicator must read, DISARMED.

All visual indicators must be green prior to opening the main cabin door.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
PAGE 2-19
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.6.1.2
Opening Doors
OPS-07A
Lift up on the main handle until fully extended.
Push the door out.
Fully open the door to lock it open.
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-20
2.6.1.3
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Closing Main Cabin Doors
2
1
Pull the locking latch handle to release the door. Use the inside
mounted safety assist handle (not pictured).
2
Using both the main door handle and locking latch handle, pull the
door inward to the closed position.
3
Lower the main door handle until locked in place.
4 Flightdeck indicators will alert the flightdeck crew if the door has not
been properly secured. This door closing procedure may have to be
repeated. Ensure the door/slide is disarmed before repeating the door
closing procedure.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
PAGE 2-21
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.6.1.4
Escape Slide Arming
ARMED
ESCAPE SLIDE
GIRT BAR INDICATOR
Lift the handle cover.
Pull down the red evacuation slide/vent handle.
Check the escape slide indicator. Indicator must read, ARMED. All
visual indicators must be red for arming of the emergency escape slide.
The escape slide girt bar indicator must be red, confirming the slide is
armed.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-22
2.6.1.5
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Door Emergency Opening
A.
Emergency Power Assist: In the event of an emergency opening

the door in emergency mode (evacuation slide is ARMED) will
activate the Emergency Assist System/Power Assist that will fully
open the door after lifting up on the main internal handle all the way
to the full up position. Moving the handle to the full up position
breaks a small safety pin in the nitrogen actuator located in the door
and releases the nitrogen charge. After the charge is released, the
door will automatically move to the full open position. The
Emergency Assist System is installed in all four (4) doors.
1) The following procedure should be used when Emergency Power
Assist is available:
Assess outside conditions.

Grasp Main Cabin Door handle with both hands
and lift all the way up.
Grasp assist handle located on the side of the
door, push the door out and fully open by sliding it
forward until it locks into place against the
fuselage.
After the slide has deployed and inflated, grasp the
assist handle, pull the red inflation handle once.
The manual inflation handle will stay attached to
the evacuation slide.
Continue to grasp the assist handle and proceed
with the evacuation procedures.
When opening the door in Emergency Mode,
ensure to grasp the assist handle located to the
side of the door, as the door will open with
extreme force.
2) The following procedure should be used when Emergency Power

Assist fails:
Assess outside conditions

Grasp Main Cabin Door handle with both hands
and lift all the way up.
Grasp assist handle located on the side of the
door, push the door out and fully open by sliding it
forward until it locks into place against the
fuselage.
If the slide DOES NOT inflate, grasp the assist
handle, pull the red inflation handle once. The
manual inflation handle will stay attached to the
evacuation slide.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
PAGE 2-23
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Continue to grasp the assist handle and proceed

with the evacuation procedures.
If the door does not open fully, the Flight Attendant
must not pull the red inflation handle. The Flight
Attendant must follow the exit blocked procedures
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-24
2.7
ERJ-170 STANDARD
EMERGENCY EVACUATION SLIDE
All doors are equipped with an emergency evacuation slide which is

stowed in a container at the lower part of the door. The emergency
evacuation slide is controlled by a girt bar mechanism inside the door.
The mechanism can be manipulated manually by using the evacuation
slide handle. When the door is opened from the outside, the emergency
evacuation slide release mechanism is automatically disabled. (See also
2.5, "Emergency Exits")
Slide Stowed in Door
RESTRAINT
PATCH
GIRT
ASSEMBLY
INFLATABLE
TUBES
RESTRAINT
PATCH
SLIDE
SURFACE
LED
LIFELINE
LED
Fully Deployed Slide

LED
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
2.7.1
PAGE 2-25
GIRT RETAINING FASTENERS/STRAPS

There is excess girt material outside of the container on the forward door
slides. During an evacuation, this excess material could become caught
on the retaining clips as the door begins to open, jamming the door and
preventing the slide deployment. The pilot or flight attendant must check
to see that the girt bar indicator window is ARMED and that the pressure
gauge is within the GO range on the pressure indicator. (see also 2.7.2,
"Escape Slide, Girt Bar, and Manual Inflation Handle")
2.7.2
ESCAPE SLIDE, GIRT BAR, AND MANUAL INFLATION HANDLE
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 2-26
2.7.3
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PASSENGER AND SERVICE DOORS EXTERNAL HANDLE
TO OPEN DOOR
1. Push in vent flap to relieve residual air pressure
2. Push the latch cover and grab handle firmly
3. Pull the latch on the external handle all the way up
4. Swing the door outward until locked in position.
End of Chapter
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 3-1
Chapter 3: Limitations
3.1 Type of Aircraft Operation ........................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Foreword ................................................................................................................ 3-1

Certification Basis .................................................................................................. 3-1
Types of Operations ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 WEIGHT LIMITS ................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.1
Takeoff Weight ....................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
Landing Weight ..................................................................................................... 3-2

Additional Weight Penalties (R) ............................................................................ 3-2
Certificated Weight Limits ERJ-170 ..................................................................... 3-2
Loading .................................................................................................................. 3-2
Center-of-Gravity (CG) Envelope ERJ-170 LR .................................................... 3-3
Center-of-Gravity (CG) Envelope ERJ-175 LR .................................................... 3-4
3.3 Operations ................................................................................................................ 3-5

3.3.1
Operational Limits .................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.2
3.3.3
Crosswind Limitations (R) ..................................................................................... 3-5

Operational Envelope .......................................................................................... 3-6
3.4 Speed Limits ............................................................................................................ 3-7

3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
Turbulent Air Penetration ...................................................................................... 3-7

Landing Gear Speeds (VLO and VLE) .................................................................. 3-7
Maximum Tire Ground Speed ............................................................................... 3-7
Maximum Flap Operating Speeds - VFE .......................................................... 3-7
Minimum Control Speeds ...................................................................................... 3-7
Maximum Operating Speed .................................................................................. 3-8
Minimum Operating Limit Speed .......................................................................... 3-8
Maneuvering Speed (VA) ...................................................................................... 3-9
3.5 Ice and Rain Protection .......................................................................................... 3-10

3.5.1
General .................................................................................................. 3-10
3.5.2
3.5.3
Definition of Icing Conditions ............................................................................. 3-10

Engine and Wing Anti-Ice System Operations .................................................... 3-10
3.5.3.1
On the ground (R) ....................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.3.2
In flight ....................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.4
Windshield Wiper Operation ............................................................................... 3-10
3.6 Fuel ........................................................................................................................ 3-11

3.6.1
Fuel Quantity Chart ............................................................................. 3-11
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
Approved Fuels .................................................................................................... 3-11

Fuel Tank Temperature ........................................................................................ 3-11
Fuel Imbalance ..................................................................................................... 3-11
Crossfeed Operations ........................................................................................... 3-11
3.7 Pneumatics, Air Conditioning, & Pressurization ................................................... 3-12

3.7.1
Pressurization Chart .............................................................................. 3-12
3.7.2
Air Conditioning .................................................................................................. 3-12
3.8 Hydraulics, Brakes & Landing Gear ...................................................................... 3-12

3.8.1
Brakes ................................................................................................... 3-12
3.8.2
3.8.3
Towing ................................................................................................................. 3-12

Landing Gear Retraction ...................................................................................... 3-12
3.9 Flight Controls ....................................................................................................... 3-12

3.9.1
Flaps ...................................................................................................... 3-12
3.9.2
OPS-07A
Thrust Reversers (R) ............................................................................................ 3-13

PAGE TOC 3-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
3.10 Instrument, Navigation and Communications ..................................................... 3-14

3.10.1
Navigation ............................................................................................. 3-14
3.10.2
Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning (EGPWS) ............................................... 3-14
3.10.3
Traffic Alert And Collision Avoidance (TCAS) ................................................. 3-14
3.10.4
Weather Radar Auto Tilt ...................................................................................... 3-14
3.10.5
RVSM Minimum Equipment Required ............................................................... 3-14
3.10.6
Inertial Reference System .................................................................................... 3-15
3.10.6.1 Maximum Latitude for Stationary Alignment: ........................................... 3-15
3.10.6.2 Time to stationary alignment completion: .................................................. 3-16
3.11 Auto Flight Control System ................................................................................. 3-16

3.11.1
Minimum Altitudes ............................................................................... 3-16
3.11.2
3.11.3
Prohibited Modes ................................................................................................. 3-16

Coupled Approaches ............................................................................................ 3-16
3.12 Power Plant .......................................................................................................... 3-17

3.12.1
Type ...................................................................................................... 3-17
3.12.2
3.12.3
3.12.4
3.12.5
3.12.6
3.12.7
Engine Operational Limits ............................................................................... 3-17

Thrust Reversers .................................................................................................. 3-17
EICAS Engine Limit Display Markings (R) ........................................................ 3-18
Engine Thrust ....................................................................................................... 3-18
Engine Starter Duty Cycle Limits ........................................................................ 3-18
Engine Starter Dry Motoring Duty Cycle Limits ................................................ 3-19
3.13 APU Limits .......................................................................................................... 3-19

3.13.1
Type ...................................................................................................... 3-19
3.13.2
3.13.3
Operational Limits ............................................................................................... 3-19

Starter Duty Cycle ............................................................................................... 3-19
3.14 Ozone Concentration ........................................................................................... 3-20

3.14.1
North America - Maximum Ozone Criteria .......................................... 3-20
3.14.2
North America - Time Weighted Average (TWA) Ozone Criteria ..................... 3-21
3.15 NOISE LEVELS .................................................................................................. 3-22
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-1
Chapter 3
Limitations
TYPE OF AIRCRAFT OPERATION
3.1.1
91.9(a)
FOREWORD
A.
All limitations are Airplane

Flight Manual (AFM)
limitations unless otherwise
noted.
B.
Limitations are of such

importance that flight crew members must be continuously aware of
them in order to avoid exceeding the limitation, prevent equipment
damage, and/or ensure safety.
C.
Flight crew members shall operate the ERJ-170 accordance with the
limitations presented in this chapter.
D.
[RESERVED]
3.1.2
NOTE
3.1
(R) indicates a Republic Airlines

imposed limitation that is more
restrictive than the AFM limitation.
CERTIFICATION BASIS
Republic Airlines ERJ-170 aircraft are certificated in the Transport
Category (14 CFR 25 and 36).
3.1.3
TYPES OF OPERATIONS
A.
The ERJ-170 may be flown day and night in the following conditions,
when the required equipment is installed, in operable condition, and
approved in accordance with the applicable Federal Aviation
Regulations.
1) Visual flight (VFR)
2) Instrument flight (IFR)
3) Icing conditions
4) CAT I (R)
5) RVSM
B.
OPS-07A
The aircraft configuration must not vary from those described in the
Normal Procedures, Training Maneuvers, and Emergency/Abnormal
Procedures Chapters of the ERJ-170 SOP or from those described
in the Quick Reference Handbook (QRH) procedures.
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-2
3.2
WEIGHT LIMITS
3.2.1
121.135(b)(9)
TAKEOFF WEIGHT
121.189(a)
121.189(c)
91.605
The maximum takeoff weight (weight at brake release or at start of

takeoff roll) is limited by the most restrictive of the following:
1) Maximum takeoff weight (climb limited)
121.189(d)(2)
2) Maximum field length limited takeoff weight
121.189(c)(1)121.189(c)(3)
3) Maximum certificated takeoff weight

121.191(a)
121.191(a)(1)
121.191(a)(2)
121.195(a)
121.195(b)
4) Obstacle clearance, enroute and landing limitations

5) Brake energy limit weights
3.2.2
LANDING WEIGHT
Maximum landing weight is limited by the most restrictive of the
following:
1) Maximum approach and landing weight (runway length plus
obstacle, altitude and temperature, and including limitations for
inoperative equipment)
2) Maximum landing weight (climb limited)
3) Maximum certificated landing weight
3.2.3
3.2.4
ADDITIONAL WEIGHT PENALTIES (R)

A.
Additional weight penalties may apply due to weather conditions,

runway conditions, and MEL/CDL items.
B.
Refer to the MEL/CDL Manual and the ERJ-170 Performance

Manual to calculate weight penalties as applicable.
CERTIFICATED WEIGHT LIMITS

Parameter
Weight Limits
ERJ-170
ERJ-175
Maximum Ramp Weight (MRW)
82,364 lbs.
85,870 lbs.
Maximum Takeoff Weight (MTOW)
82,011 lbs.
85,517 lbs.
Maximum Landing Weight (MLW)
72,310 lbs.
74,957 lbs.
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight (MZFW)
65,256 lbs.
69,886 lbs.
3.2.5
LOADING
The airplane must be loaded in accordance with the information
contained in the Republic Airlines FAA approved weight and balance
program which complies with the Embraer ERJ-170 AFM requirements.
OPS-07A
SOP BULLETIN
SOP-07-05
Effective Date: December 15, 2007
To:
All SOP Holders
From:
Kevin Cline, ERJ Program Manager
Subject:
Increased Maximum Zero Fuel Weight
Directions:
future revision.
2) This bulletin is in two parts. This bulletin page 1 of 4 is Part 1 of
2.
3) Insert this bulletin page 1 after page 3-2 in the SOP.
Manual.
Background: This bulletin is being issed to incorporate the increased
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight which is applicable to the
newer ERJ-170s in the Frontier operation. Currently A/C
701 - 704 have the increased Maximum Zero Fuel
Weight. Refer to the bulletin to confirm serial number
affectivity.
3.2.4
CERTIFICATED WEIGHT LIMITS

Parameter
Weight Limits
ERJ-170
ERJ-175
Maximum Ramp Weight (MRW)
82,364 lbs.
85,870 lbs.
Maximum Takeoff Weight (MTOW)
82,011 lbs.
85,517 lbs.
Maximum Landing Weight (MLW)
72,310 lbs.
74,957 lbs.
65,256 lbs.
69,886 lbs.
Maximum Zero Fuel Weight (MZFW)
66,446 lbs.*
* The 66,446 lbs. MZFW is applicable to S/N 170-0059, 170-0065 and thereafter.
Refer to the Flight Release to confirm the applicable MZFW or refer to the Aircraft
Airworthiness certificate to confirm the aircraft serial number.
This bulletin Page 3 of 4 is Part 2 of 2. Place this page before page 3-3
in the SOP.
3.2.6
CENTER-OF-GRAVITY (CG) ENVELOPE ERJ-170 LR

The maximum permissible center of gravity range with landing gear
extended is shown in the Center-of-Gravity Limits. The effect of landing
gear retraction on the CG position is negligible.
ERJ-170 STANDARD
3.2.6
PAGE 3-3

gear retraction on CG position is negligible.
INFLIGHT LIMITS (FLAPS AND GEAR UP)

TAKEOFF AND LANDING LIMITS
NOT ALLOWED FOR TAKEOFF
REGION 1 90000
11.8%
85000
27%
8.8%
MTOW
82011 lb
4%
80000
75728 lb
75000
MLW
72310 lb
WEIGHT - lb
70000
MZFW
65256 lb
65000
60000
55000
1
50706 lb
50000
50706 lb
48060 lb
4%
45000
7%
170FAA002 - 18MAR2004
18.8%
OPS-07A
40000
35000
-10
-5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
CG POSITION - %MAC
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-4
3.2.7

gear retraction on CG position is negligible.
INFLIGHT LIMITS (FLAPS AND GEAR UP)

TAKEOFF AND LANDING LIMITS
REGION
NOT ALLOWED FOR TAKEOFF
95000
8.1%
90000
11.1%
25.1% 28.1%
MTOW
85517 lb
85000
80000
MLW
WEIGHT - lb
75000
74957 lb
70000
69886 lb
MZFW
65000
60627 lb
60000
55000
1
50000
49604 lb
45000
4%
21%
7%
27%
30%
40000
35000
-5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
CG POSITION - %MAC
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
3.3
PAGE 3-5
OPERATIONS
3.3.1
OPERATIONAL LIMITS
Parameter
Minimum Flight Crew
Limit
Pilot & Copilot
Max. takeoff and landing tailwind component
10 knots
Max. runway slope
+/- 2.0%
Runway Surface Type
PAVED
Flap maneuvering load acceleration limits. Flaps...

Up
-1.0 G to +2.5 G
Down (1,2,3,4,5,and Full)
0.0 G to +2.0 G
Max. operating altitude
41,000 feet
Max. takeoff and landing altitude
8,000 feet
Max. ambient air temperature for T/O and landing

Max. flap extension altitude
Max. flight operating latitude
52C
20,000 feet
78oN to 78oS
Min. ambient temperature approved for takeoff
-40C
Min. ambient temperature for operation
-54C
3.3.2
CROSSWIND LIMITATIONS (R)

A.
The maximum demonstrated crosswind for takeoff and landing is 28

knots.
B.
The maximum crosswinds for takeoff and landing will be

Dry Runway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 knots
Wet Runway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 knots
Runway with Compacted Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 knots
Runway with Standing Water/Slush . . . . . . . . . . . 18 knots
Runway with Wet Ice (no melting). . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 knots
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-6
3.3.3
OPERATIONAL ENVELOPE
45000
-65C 41000 ft
-21.5C
40000
35000
ALTITUDE - ft
30000
ISA + 35C
25000
20000
15000
10000
5000
0
8000 ft
c
-1000 ft
52C
-54C -40C
-5000
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
STATIC AIR TEMPERATURE - C
NOTE
TAKEOFF, LANDING & GROUND START
Original 29AUG2005
In the event of a landing below -40C,

the airplane may not takeoff without
further maintenance inspection.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
3.4
3.4.1
PAGE 3-7
SPEED LIMITS
TURBULENT AIR PENETRATION
Below 10,000 MSL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -250 KIAS
At or above 10,000 MSL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 270 KIAS/ 0.70M
- Use whichever speed is lower

3.4.2
LANDING GEAR SPEEDS (VLO AND VLE)

Maximum gear extension speed (VLO) - - - - - - - - - - -250 KIAS
Maximum gear retraction speed (VLO) - - - - - - - - - - -250 KIAS
Maximum gear extended speed (VLE) - - - - - - - - - - -250 KIAS
- VLO is the maximum speed at which the landing gear can be safely
extended and retracted.
- VLE is the maximum speed at which the aircraft can be safely flown
with the landing gear extended and locked.
3.4.3
MAXIMUM TIRE GROUND SPEED

Maximum Tire Ground Speed- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 195 Knots
3.4.4
3.4.5
MAXIMUM FLAP OPERATING SPEEDS - VFE

Flap Position
VFE (KIAS)
230
215
200
180
180
Full
165
MINIMUM CONTROL SPEEDS

The minimum control speeds are presented by the CAFM outputs
associated to takeoff flaps and engine models.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-8
3.4.6
MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED

45000
MMO=0.82
40000
35000
ALTITUDE - ft
30000
25000
VMO
20000
15000
10000
0CTA003 23APR2004
5000
0
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350
AIRSPEED - KIAS
VMO/MMO may not be deliberately exceeded in any regime

of flight (climb, cruise, or descent).
3.4.7
MINIMUM OPERATING LIMIT SPEED

Intentional speed reduction below the onset of stall warning, as defined
by stick shaker operation, is prohibited unless a lower speed is
specifically authorized for flight test or training operations. (R)
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
3.4.8
PAGE 3-9
MANEUVERING SPEED (VA)

Full application of rudder and aileron controls, as well as maneuvers that
involve angles of attack near the stall, must be confined to speeds below
240 KIAS (R).
45000
40000
MMO=0.82
35000
ALTITUDE - ft
30000
25000
VA
20000
15000
10000
0
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
AIRSPEED - KIAS
NOTE
0CTA011 -03MAR2004
5000
Maneuvers that involve angle of

attack near the stall or full application
of rudder, elevator, and aileron controls should be confined to speeds
below VA. In addition, the maneuvering flight load factor limits, presented
in this chapter, should not be
exceeded
Rapid and large alternating control inputs, especially in

combination with large changes in pitch, roll, or yaw (e.g.
large side slip angles) may result in structural failures at
any speed, even below VA.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-10
3.5
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
3.5.1
GENERAL
There is no temperature limitation for anti-icing system automatic
operation.
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.3.1
DEFINITION OF ICING CONDITIONS

A.
Icing conditions may exist whenever the Static Air Temperature

(SAT) on the ground or for takeoff, or Total Air Temperature (TAT)
inflight, is 10C or below and visible moisture in any form is present
(such as clouds, fog with visibility of one mile or less, rain, snow,
sleet, and ice crystals).
B.
Icing conditions may also exist when the SAT on the ground and for
takeoff is 10C or below when operating on ramps, taxiways, or
runways where surface snow, ice, standing water, or slush may be
ingested by the engines, or freeze on engines, nacelles, or engine
sensor probes.
ENGINE AND WING ANTI-ICE SYSTEM OPERATIONS

On the ground (R)
During taxi out and takeoff, the MCDU DATASET MENU must be set to
ALL when SAT is 10oC or below and icing conditions exist or are
anticipated.
On the ground, do not rely on visual icing evidence or ice
detector actuation to turn on the engine anti-icing system.
Use the temperature and visual moisture criteria specified
in this section. Delaying the use of the Anti-Icing system
until ice build-up is visible from the flight deck may result
in ice ingestion and possible engine damage or flameout.
3.5.3.2
In flight
The engine and wing anti-ice systems operate automatically in case of
ice encounter when the ICE PROTECTION Mode Selector is in AUTO. If
either one or both ice detectors are failed, the crew must set the mode
selector to ON when icing conditions exist or are anticipated below 10C
TAT with visible moisture.
Delaying the use of the anti-icing system until ice build-up
is visible from the flight deck may result in ice ingestion
and possible engine damage and/or flameout.
3.5.4
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION

Maximum airspeed for windshield wiper operation is 250 KIAS (R)
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
3.6
PAGE 3-11
FUEL
3.6.1
FUEL QUANTITY CHART

Fuel Quantity
ERJ-170
10392.5 lbs
Maximum usable quantity per tank
(1535.5 US Gal)
75 lbs
Unusable quantity per tank
(11 US Gal)
20,935 lbs
Aircraft maximum fuel capacity

(usable + unusable fuel)
NOTE
(3094 US Gal)
Fuel density of 6.767 lbs/gal is used in

these limitations. Different fuel densities may be used provided the volumetric limits are not exceeded.
APPROVED FUELS
3.6.2
Fuels conforming to any of the following specifications are approved for

use.
A.
Primary fuel
1) Jet A (ATSM D1655)
2) Jet A-1 (ATSM D1655)
B.
Alternate fuel
1) JP-8 (MIL-T-83133A)
C.
Brazilian Specification
1) QAV1
3.6.3
3.6.4
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE

- Minimum ............................................................................. - 40C
FUEL IMBALANCE
- Maximum fuel imbalance between tanks .......................... 794 lbs.
3.6.5
CROSSFEED OPERATIONS
The XFEED Selector must be set to OFF during takeoff and landing.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-12
3.7
PNEUMATICS, AIR CONDITIONING, &

PRESSURIZATION
3.7.1
PRESSURIZATION CHART
Pressure
PSI
Maximum Differential Pressure

Up to 37,000 feet
7.80 psi
Above 37,000 feet
8.34 psi
Maximum Differential Overpressure
8.77 psi
Maximum Differential Negative Pressure
-0.5 psi
Maximum Differential Pressure for Takeoff and Landing
0.20 psi
3.7.2
AIR CONDITIONING
The maximum altitude for single pack operation is 31,000 feet.
3.8
HYDRAULICS, BRAKES & LANDING GEAR
3.8.1
BRAKES
Cooling Limitation - do not takeoff with amber brake temperature
indicators. (R)
3.8.2
TOWING
A.
Towbarless towing is prohibited, unless the towbarless towing

operations are performed in compliance with the appropriate
operational requirements using towbarless towing vehicles that are
designed and operated to preclude damage to the airplane nose
wheel steering system, or which provide a reliable and unmistakable
warning when damage to the steering system may have occurred.
B.
Towbarless towing vehicles that are specifically accepted for this

type of airplane are listed in the documentation provided by the
airplane manufacturer.
3.8.3
LANDING GEAR RETRACTION

Activation of the landing gear downlock release button is prohibited for all
takeoffs unless obstacle clearance is required. (R)
3.9
FLIGHT CONTROLS
3.9.1
FLAPS
A.
Maximum Altitude with Flaps Extended
- Maximum altitude ....................................................... 20,000 feet.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-13
B.
Enroute use of flaps is prohibited. (R)
C.
Do not hold in icing conditions with Flaps extended. (R)
3.9.2
THRUST REVERSERS (R)

A.
Approved for ground use only.
B.
Intended for use during full stop landings.
C.
Do not attempt a go-around maneuver after deployment of the thrust

reversers.
D.
Power back operations using thrust reversers are prohibited.
E.
Landing rollout below 60 KIAS:

1) Application of maximum reverse thrust is not permitted.
2) Reduce reverse thrust to IDLE.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-14
3.10
INSTRUMENT, NAVIGATION AND COMMUNICATIONS
3.10.1
NAVIGATION
A.
TAS, TAT and SAT are only valid above 60 KIAS.
B.
Standby magnetic compass indication is not valid while transmitting

on VHF #1.
C.
Barometric altimeter minimums must be used for all CAT I

approaches.
D.
LOC Backcourse approaches using IESS is not authorized.
3.10.2
ENHANCED GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING (EGPWS)

The Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) limitations
are as follows:
1) Aircraft navigation must not be predicated upon the use of the
Terrain Awareness Display.
2) The use of predictive EGPWS functions should be manually
inhibited when landing at an airport that is not in the airport
database to avoid unwanted alerts.
3) Pilots are authorized to deviate from their current ATC clearance
to the extent necessary to comply with an EGPWS Warning.
4) The Terrain Display is intended to be used as a situational tool
only and may not provide the accuracy and/or fidelity on which
to solely base terrain avoidance maneuvering.
5) The use of predictive EGPWS functions should be manually
inhibited during QFE operations if GPS data is unavailable or
inoperative.
3.10.3
TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE (TCAS)

A.
Pilots are authorized to deviate from their current ATC clearance to

the extent necessary to comply with a Resolution Advisory (RA).
B.
Maneuvers must not be based solely on information presented in

the traffic display.
3.10.4
WEATHER RADAR AUTO TILT

Weather radar auto tilt (ACT) fine adjustment is inoperative.
3.10.5
RVSM MINIMUM EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

A.
During RVSM operation it is necessary that the following equipment

and instruments be in proper operating condition
- 2 RVSM Compliant Air Data Systems;
- 1 Autopilot with Altitude Hold Mode operative;
- 1 Altitude Alerter;
- 1 Transponder.
OPS-07A
SOP BULLETIN
SOP-07-02
Effective Date: July 30, 2007
To:
All SOP Holders
From:
Kevin Cline, Chief Pilot
Subject:
Altitude as indicated on two PFDs
Directions:
future revision.
2) This bulletin is in One Part. This is part One; insert this part
before page 3-15.
Manual.
Background: There have been several instances where crews have
written up a discrepancy in the altimeter indications
between the PFDs when the error has been in tolerance.
This guidance is being published to assist the crews in
determing when a genuine problem exists in altimetry
indications.
SOP-07-02 PAGE 2 OF 4
B.
3.10.6
The ADS1, ADS2 and

ADS3 are compliant with
RVSM operation.
The ADS3 is not considered

RVSM compliant in case of
loss of sideslip compensation. (EICAS message ADS3
SLIPCOMP FAIL displayed.)
C.
The IESS must not be

used for RVSM
operation.
D.
dShould any of the required equipment fail prior to the aircraft

entering RVSM airspace, the pilot should request a new clearance
to avoid entering this airspace.
MAXIMUM ALTIMETER DIFFERENCES

The altitude as indicated on the two PFDs must not exceed the
differences depicted in the following table:
Maximum Difference
Between PFDs
50 feet
120 feet
180 feet
Aircraft Altitude
-2000 up to 10000
10000 up to 20000
20000 up to 41000
3.10.7
INERTIAL REFERENCE SYSTEM

The aircraft may be operated within the North and South magnetic polar
cut-out regions specified in the table below, but IRS magnetic heading
and track angle magnetic data will not be available
North
South
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
Between 73.125N
and 82N
North of 82N
Between 60S and
82S
South of 82S
Between 80W and

130W
Between 0 and 180W/E
Between 120E and
160E
NOTE
MAGNETIC
CUT-OUT
REGIONS
Whenever operating within North or

South magnetic polar cutout regions,
current aircraft heading must be referenced to true heading, if not
already selected. Otherwise, the
Heading Failure Indication flag will be
displayed.
3.10.7.1 Maximum Latitude for Stationary Alignment:
- 78.25 Northern and Southern

- IRS stationary alignment will complete only after a valid aircraft
present position (latitude and longitude) is received either from the
FMS (pilot entry) or automatically from GPS.
3.10.7.2 Time to stationary alignment completion:
ALIGNMENT TIME - minutes.....
20
15
10
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
ALIGNMENT LATITUDE - degrees Northern and Southern
80
SOP-07-02 PAGE 4 OF 4
ERJ-170 STANDARD
B.
PAGE 3-15
The ADS1, ADS2 and

ADS3 are compliant with
RVSM operation.
The ADS3 is not considered

RVSM compliant in case of
loss of sideslip compensation. (EICAS message ADS3
SLIPCOMP FAIL displayed.)
C.
The IESS must not be

used for RVSM
operation.
D.
Should any of the required equipment fail prior to the aircraft

entering RVSM airspace, the pilot should request a new clearance
to avoid entering this airspace.
3.10.6
INERTIAL REFERENCE SYSTEM

The aircraft may be operated within the North and South magnetic polar
cut-out regions specified in the table below, but IRS magnetic heading
and track angle magnetic data will not be available
MAGNETIC
CUT-OUT
REGIONS
North
LONGITUDE
Between 73.125N
and 82N
North of 82N
Between 60S and
82S
South of 82S
Between 80W and

130W
Between 120E and
160E
NOTE
South
LATITUDE
3.10.6.1
Whenever operating within North or

South magnetic polar cutout regions,
current aircraft heading must be referenced to true heading, if not
already selected. Otherwise, the
Heading Failure Indication flag will be
displayed.
Maximum Latitude for Stationary Alignment:
- 78.25 Northern and Southern

- IRS stationary alignment will complete only after a valid aircraft
present position (latitude and longitude) is received either from the
FMS (pilot entry) or automatically from GPS.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-16
3.10.6.2
Time to stationary alignment completion:
ALIGNMENT TIME - minutes.....
20
15
10
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
ALIGNMENT LATITUDE - degrees Northern and Southern
3.11
AUTO FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

Reference: FAR 121.579
3.11.1
MINIMUM ALTITUDES
The autopilot installed in the Embraer 170 when operated in accordance
with these limitations, meets the minimum altitude requirements
specified in the FARs.
3.11.2
- Minimum Enroute Height ............................................. 500 ft AGL
121.579(a)
- Minimum Engagement Height ..................................... 400 ft AGL
121.579(d)
- Minimum Use Height- Coupled ILS Approach............... 50 ft AGL
121.579(b)
PROHIBITED MODES
The VOR and VNAV flight director modes are prohibited.
COUPLED APPROACHES
Before initiating an approach to
landing with the AUTOPILOT
engaged, make sure the correct
ILS identifier has been inserted
on the FMS PROGRESS PAGE
1/3, Lines 5L and 5R.
NOTE
3.11.3
Failure to ensure the correct identifier is inserted may result in the

airplane's autopilot applying
large-amplitude control inputs
while following instrument landing
system (ILS) guidance to runways
that are not included on the FMS
flight plan.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-17
3.12
POWER PLANT
3.12.1
TYPE
Two General Electric CF-34-8E5
3.12.2
ENGINE OPERATIONAL LIMITS

Min.
Max.
N1
Parameter
--
99.5%
N2
58.5%
99.4
ITT
--
815C
Normal Takeoff and

Go Around
--
965C a
Maximum Takeoff and Go Around
--
Start
949C b
1006C a
990C b
--
960C
25 psi
95 psi
Continuous
--
155C
Transient
--
163C c
Maximum Continuous
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature
a.Time limited to the first 2 minutes of the total 5 minute limit.

b.Time limited to the remaining 3 minutes of the total 5 minute limit.
c.Time limited to 15 minutes for transient operation above 155C.
3.12.3
THRUST REVERSERS
After applying thrust reverser, do not move the throttle back to the
forward thrust range, unless the REV icon on the EICAS is shown in
amber or green.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-18
3.12.4
EICAS ENGINE LIMIT DISPLAY MARKINGS (R)

The engine limit display
markings on EICAS must be
used to determine compliance
with the maximum/minimum
limits and precautionary ranges.
Red
3.12.5
If EICAS markings show

more conservative limits
than those specified below,
the limit markings on the
EICAS must be used
Maximum and Minimum Limitations
Amber
Caution Range
Green
Normal Operating Range
ENGINE THRUST
<<<FOM 7.5.2
Operation at reduced
Takeoff with the Automatic Takeoff
takeoff thrust based on
Thrust Control System (ATTCS) OFF is
the assumed
not authorized.
temperature higher
than the actual ambient
temperature is permissible if the aircraft meets all applicable
performance requirements at the planned takeoff weight and
reduced thrust setting.
B.
The total thrust reduction must not exceed 25% of the full takeoff
thrust.
C.
Use of reduced takeoff thrust procedures is not allowed on runways

contaminated with standing water, slush, snow, or ice and are not
allowed on wet runways unless suitable performance accountability
is made for the increased stopping distance on the wet runway
surface.
D.
When using reduced

The use of WET runway analysis
takeoff thrust (flex
numbers takes into account the
power takeoffs) on wet
increased stopping distance which
occurs on wet runways.
runways, the runway
analysis (takeoff
performance) must be
based on WET runway conditions.
NOTE
NOTE
A.
3.12.6
ENGINE STARTER DUTY CYCLE LIMITS
Number of Start
1st and 2nd
3rd through 5th
Maximum Time...
90 seconds ON (ground)a
120 seconds ON (in flight)b
Followed by
Cool Down of...
10 seconds OFF
5 minutes OFF
a. For ground starts, the maximum cumulative starter run time per start
attempt is 90 seconds (monitoring plus start time).
b. For in-flight starts, the maximum cumulative starter run time per start
attempt is 120 seconds (monitoring plus start time).
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
3.12.7
PAGE 3-19
ENGINE STARTER DRY MOTORING DUTY CYCLE LIMITS

The dry-motoring cycle (with thrust levers at IDLE) may be used for
engine ground starts and engine airstarts.
Number of Start
1st
2 through to 5
Maximum Time...
Followed by
Cool Down of...
90 Seconds ON
5 minutes OFF
30 Seconds ON
5 minutes OFF
a.After 5 sequential motorings, cycle may be repeated following a 15

minute cool down period.
3.13
APU LIMITS
3.13.1
TYPE
Sundstrand APS 2300
3.13.2
OPERATIONAL LIMITS
Parameter
Min.
Max.
-54C
ISA + 35C
--
30,000 ft
-62C
ISA + 35C
Electrical
--
33,000 ft
Bleed
--
15,000 ft
To Assist Engine Start
--
21,000 ft
--
108%
Start
--
1032C
Continuous
--
717C
Start
Temperature
Altitude
Operation
Temperature
Altitude
Rotor Speed
EGT
3.13.3
STARTER DUTY CYCLE

Start Cycle
Maximum...
Followed By...
1st and 2nd
60 seconds ON
60 seconds OFF
3rd cycle
60 seconds ON
5 minutes OFF
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-20
3.14
OZONE CONCENTRATION
The tables below show the aircraft altitude limitations due to ozone
concentration in atmosphere for airplanes not equipped with the Ozone
Converters.
A.
These tables are based on FAA ADVISORY CIRCULAR 120.38.
B.
The tables show altitude limitations calculated for constant ozone

concentration and cabin stabilized at 8000 ft.
C.
For conditions other than those specified in item B above, an

optimized flight plan must be approved by regulatory agencies.
D.
For longitudes, the following apply:

1) W = Western
2) E = Eastern
3) Reference = 100W longitude
3.14.1
121.578
NORTH AMERICA - MAXIMUM OZONE CRITERIA
FLIGHT
LEVEL
LATITUDE
80N
75N
70N
65N
60N
55N
50N
45N
40N
35N
FLIGHT
LEVEL
LATITUDE
80N
75N
70N
65N
60N
55N
50N
45N
40N
35N
Original 29AUG2005
JAN
W
356
376
394
407
406
-
E
323
327
341
346
356
362
376
396
-
JUL
W
346
347
356
366
-
FEB
W
333
347
376
409
366
-
E
323
323
323
326
336
346
362
376
386
-
AUG
E
W
336
346
346
356 396
366 402
382 406
406
-
MAR
W
328
338
347
366
376
376
-
E
314
321
326
327
334
341
346
366
396
-
SEP
E
W
382
396
406
406 406
-
APR
W
328
327
327
327
346
382
-
E
313
314
321
321
326
334
336
346
366
-
OCT
E
W
394
386
396
406 382
396
-
MAY
W
326
327
327
334
346
402
-
E
307
314
314
321
326
327
336
362
396
-
NOV
JUN
W
338
341
347
356
376
-
E
326
327
334
336
336
356
366
396
-
DEC
E
W
E
W
E
382
346
346
382
362
356
382
382
356
394 406 386 376 366
401 407 394 386 382
407 401 401 396
406
-
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
3.14.2
PAGE 3-21
NORTH AMERICA - TIME WEIGHTED AVERAGE (TWA) OZONE

CRITERIA
Values below are the altitude limitations which the aircraft is allowed to fly
more than 3 continuous hours.
FLIGHT
LEVEL
LATITUDE
80N
75N
70N
65N
60N
55N
50N
45N
40N
35N
FLIGHT
LEVEL
LATITUDE
80N
75N
70N
65N
60N
55N
50N
45N
40N
35N
OPS-07A
JAN
FEB
W E
- 274
- 278
- 292
W E
- 270
- 274
- 274
312
321
332
338
338
332
374
294
298
298
312
314
334
354
298
311
321
354
338
312
374
270
278
292
298
312
318
354
MAR
W
301
303
311
315
315
312
338
E
270
270
270
273
291
291
298
311
317
353
APR
MAY
JUN
W E
- 270
- 270
- 270
W E
- 270
- 270
- 270
W E
- 270
- 270
- 274
292
274
270
270
274
312
354
270
270
274
274
294
311
334
270
270
270
274
294
318
374
270
270
270
274
294
318
334
303
311
311
311
318
334
392
274
274
292
312
318
334
374
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
W E
- 270
- 274
- 274
W E
- 298
- 314
- 321
W E
- 298
- 312
- 314
W E
- 298
- 298
- 312
W E
- 292
- 294
- 298
W E
- 298
- 298
- 298
294
298
301
312
321
294
294
312
312
318
334
354
394
332
332
332
332
354
332
334
334
334
354
398
-
334
338
354
374
318
334
334
334
374
321
323
334
354
374
314
318
334
354
354
374
334
334
338
338
353
298
298
314
334
334
394 354
- 398
318
321
334
354
354
354
301
312
318
334
334
334
374
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 3-22
3.15
NOISE LEVELS
The following Effective Perceived Noise Levels (EPNLs) comply with,
FAA Part 36, Appendix C, Stage 3 noise limits and were obtained by
analysis of approved data from noise tests conducted under the
provisions of ICAO Annex 16, Volume 1 - Chapter 3 and FAA Part 36.
Airplane Model
ERJ-170 SU
ERJ-170 LR
ERJ-175 LR
NOICE LEVEL IN EPNdb

CONDITION
Flyover
Lateral
84.1
92.3
84.1
92.3
84.4
91.9
Approach
94.9
94.9
95.0
Flyover and Lateral noise levels were established for the EMBRAER 170
equipped with APU Sunstrand APS 2300, with two GE CF34-8E5
engines, with the chevron nozzle, at maximum takeoff weight, with all
engines at maximum takeoff power setting and flaps 1. Approach noise
levels were established from a 3 glideslope at the maximum landing
weight, VREF + 10 KIAS, and Flaps FULL.
No determination has been made by the Airworthiness Authority that the
noise levels in this manual are or should be acceptable or unacceptable
for operation at, into, or out of any airport.
End of Chapter
Revision 02 15 FEB2007
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 4-1
Chapter 4: Standard Operating Procedures, Maneuvers & Policies

4.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 General ...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
Adherence ............................................................................................... 4-1

Structure .................................................................................................. 4-1
Flow Patterns .......................................................................................... 4-2
Exceptions ............................................................................................... 4-2
Flow Arrow ............................................................................................. 4-2
Flow Items .............................................................................................. 4-2
Checklists ................................................................................................ 4-2
Read and Do Checklists .......................................................................... 4-3
Push Button Terminology ....................................................................... 4-3
4.2.8.1
4.2.8.2
4.2.9
4.2.10
4.2.11
4.2.12
4.2.13
4.2.14
4.2.15
Position ......................................................................................................... 4-3

Indication ...................................................................................................... 4-3
Dark and Quiet Flight Deck .................................................................... 4-3

Firewall Thrust ........................................................................................ 4-3
Maximum Thrust .................................................................................... 4-3
Automation Procedures ........................................................................... 4-3
Manipulation of Gear and Flap Controls ................................................ 4-4
Autothrottle Usage .................................................................................. 4-4
Changing AFCS/PFD Altitude ............................................................... 4-4
4.2.15.1
4.2.15.2
Aircraft On Autopilot .................................................................................... 4-4

Manually Controlled Flight .......................................................................... 4-4
4.3 In Flight Maneuvers .................................................................................. 4-5

4.3.1
4.3.2
Flight Spoiler and Thrust Usage ............................................................. 4-5

Holding ................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.2.1
4.3.2.2
Speed ............................................................................................................. 4-5

Entries ........................................................................................................... 4-5
4.4 Windshear Recovery ................................................................................. 4-6

4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
General. ................................................................................................... 4-6

Windshear Detection ............................................................................... 4-7
Windshear Escape Guidance Mode ........................................................ 4-7
Approach ................................................................................................. 4-8
Windshear Recognition Techniques ....................................................... 4-8
4.4.5.1
4.4.6
4.4.7
Windshear Recognition Diagram .................................................................. 4-9
Windshear Recovery Maneuver Actions and Callouts ....................... 4-10

Windshear Recovery Techniques ......................................................... 4-10
4.4.7.1
4.4.7.2
Windshear escape maneuver due to EGPWS announcement: .................... 4-11

Windshear escape maneuver without EGPWS announcement: ................. 4-11
4.5 EGPWS ................................................................................................... 4-12

4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
EGPWS Input Sources .......................................................................... 4-12

Use of the EGPWS ............................................................................... 4-12
EGPWS Recovery ................................................................................. 4-12
4.5.3.1
4.5.4
4.5.4.1
4.5.4.2
OPS-07A
EGPWS Recovery Action and Callouts ...................................................... 4-13
Other EGPWS Alerts ............................................................................ 4-13

TERRAIN, TERRAIN - TOO LOW TERRAIN ................................. 4-13
CAUTION TERRAIN ............................................................................. 4-13
PAGE TOC 4-2

4.5.4.3
4.5.4.4
4.5.4.5
ERJ-170 STANDARD
SINK RATE - DON'T SINK ............................................................... 4-13
TOO LOW GEAR or TOO LOW Flaps .............................................. 4-13
GLIDE SLOPE ........................................................................................ 4-13
4.6 TCAS Warnings ....................................................................................... 4-14

4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
TCAS Procedures ................................................................................. 4-14

TCAS Input Sources ............................................................................. 4-14
Traffic Advisory (TA) .......................................................................... 4-14
Resolution Advisory (RA) .................................................................... 4-14
4.7 Stalls ........................................................................................................ 4-15

4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.7.7
4.7.8
4.7.9
General .................................................................................................. 4-15

Lateral and Directional Control ............................................................ 4-15
Effect of Flaps. ...................................................................................... 4-15
Effect of Flight Spoilers. ....................................................................... 4-15
Approaches to Stalls ............................................................................. 4-15
Stall Training ........................................................................................ 4-15
Altitudes ................................................................................................ 4-15
Entry ...................................................................................................... 4-15
Recovery ............................................................................................... 4-16
4.7.9.1
4.7.9.2
4.7.9.3
4.7.9.4
4.7.10
Landing Gear. ............................................................................................. 4-16

Flaps. ........................................................................................................... 4-16
If Terrain Contact is a Factor. ..................................................................... 4-16
If Terrain Contact is Not a Factor. .............................................................. 4-16
Stall Recovery Actions and Callouts .................................................. 4-17
4.8 Unusual Attitudes .................................................................................... 4-18

4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
Nose High Recognition ......................................................................... 4-18

Nose High Recovery Actions and Callouts ........................................ 4-18
Nose Low Recognition ......................................................................... 4-19
Nose Low Recovery Actions and Callouts ......................................... 4-19
4.9 Wake Turbulence ..................................................................................... 4-20

4.9.1
4.9.2
Recognition ........................................................................................... 4-20

Wake Turbulence Recovery Actions and Callouts ............................. 4-20
4.10 Steep Turns ............................................................................................ 4-21

4.10.1
4.10.2
4.10.3
4.10.4
Objective ............................................................................................... 4-21

Configuration ....................................................................................... 4-21
Entry ...................................................................................................... 4-21
Recovery ............................................................................................... 4-21
4.11 Emergency Descent ............................................................................... 4-22

4.11.1
4.11.2
4.11.3
4.11.4
4.11.5
4.11.6
4.11.7
General ................................................................................................ 4-22

Discussion ............................................................................................. 4-22
Use of Flight Level Change (FLCH) .................................................... 4-22
Level OFF ............................................................................................. 4-22
Use of the Autopilot .............................................................................. 4-23
After Level OFF .................................................................................... 4-23
Manual Flight ........................................................................................ 4-23
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-1
Chapter 4
Standard Operating Procedures, Maneuvers
& Policies
4.1
PURPOSE
The purpose of Standard Operating Procedures is to provide a timeordered flow of a normal flight. Each pilots duties are outlined and
integrated with the duties of the other pilot. These Standard Operating
Procedures (SOPs) are intended
1) to establish a sequence in which the designated items are
accomplished,
2) to designate which crew member normally accomplishes each
item,
3) to be followed during all line flying and training.
The SOP contains instructions and information necessary to allow each
flight crew to perform their aircraft duties and responsibilities with a high
degree of safety.
121.135(a)(1)
121.135(a)(2)
Detailed explanation of a given item or policy will be found in each

chapter.
4.2
121.557(a)
121.559(a)
4.2.1
GENERAL
ADHERENCE
All pilots will follow SOPs during normal operations. The PIC has the
authority to deviate from SOPs, but only when an emergency situation
require him to do so in the interest of safety.
4.2.1
STRUCTURE
SOPs define normal phases of flight (preflight, before start, etc.) and
describes procedures that will accomplish required tasks prior to
verification with checklists. SOPs are organized in a chronological flow,
with pilot duties delineated and pilot interaction clearly indicated.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-2
4.2.2
FLOW PATTERNS
When a flow pattern appears, unless otherwise indicated, pilots are
expected to complete the items in order from memory, using applicable
checklists only after the flow pattern is completed. Flow patterns are
established to configure aircraft systems or accomplish required tasks in
an organized manner without reference to a checklist.
4.2.3
EXCEPTIONS
The Safety & Power On and Securing Checklists are read and do
checklists.
4.2.4
FLOW ARROW
The flow arrow on the flow pattern depicts the direction of the flow and
does not always stop at each individual panel.
COMPASS
4.2.5
FLOW ITEMS
Flow patterns are depicted and flow items are delineated. These flow
items contain grouped Company and manufacturer policies/procedures
used in operating the aircraft and its individual components. Flow items
are portrayed in the expanded flows as follows:
J Audio Control Panel (ACP) - - - - - - - Set for O2 Check

4.2.6
CHECKLISTS
The Checklists contain approved procedures necessary for flight

crewmembers to check for safety before starting engines, taking off, or
landing, and in engine and systems emergencies.
121.315(a)
121.315(b)
Checklists are readily available in the cockpit and flight crews shall follow
them when operating the aircraft.
121.315(c)
Checklists are the means for ensuring critical items are accomplished. If
an item can affect flight safety in a direct way, it is included in the
checklist. Do not accomplish checklists until called for.
Checklist items are numbered and bolded as follows:
1. O2 & Interphone . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked

Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.2.7
PAGE 4-3
READ AND DO CHECKLISTS

Read and Do Checklists are directly referred to when accomplishing and
will contain all items necessary to accomplish the task it was designed
for (i.e., configuring the aircraft for application of electrical power/air
conditioning and for power down).
4.2.8
PUSH BUTTON TERMINOLOGY

Push buttons have dual purposes. They are used as switches (position)
and as lights (indication).
4.2.8.1
Position
Will be either IN, Guarded, or OUT.
Guarded indicates the guard is in place and the underlying switch light
is dark (i.e., normal flight position).
4.2.8.2
Indication
Will be either dark (normal flight position) or an illuminated white bar
when the button is deselected.
4.2.9
DARK AND QUIET FLIGHT DECK

The flight deck is designed to operate in flight with all systems normal
when the
overhead, main, glareshield, and control pedestal panels have no
lights ON,
there are no aural warnings, and
the selector knobs are at the twelve oclock position.
A white bar illuminates on any button indicating it is not in its normal
position.
4.2.10
FIREWALL THRUST
Firewall thrust is defined as advancing the thrust levers to the
mechanical stops.
Overboosting the engines when the situation is not sufficiently serious, or
prior to performing all other recovery actions available, would shorten
engine life and increase the potential for engine failure proportionate to
the time and amount of overboost, engine condition, and environment.
4.2.11
MAXIMUM THRUST
Maximum thrust is defined as maximum certified N1.
4.2.12
AUTOMATION PROCEDURES
Refer to the FOM, Chapter 4, Automation Policy.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-4
4.2.13
MANIPULATION OF GEAR AND FLAP CONTROLS

In flight, the pilot monitoring (PM) will normally move the landing gear
and flap controls upon the command of the pilot flying (PF). Prior to
moving the landing gear or flap handle, the PM will check the airspeed to
ensure that it is in the normal operating envelope for the aircraft
configuration. After checking the airspeed, the PM will repeat the
command, then select the landing gear or flaps to the commanded
position.
4.2.14
AUTOTHROTTLE USAGE
When hand-flying, autothrottles may be used at pilots discretion.
4.2.15
4.2.15.1
CHANGING AFCS/PFD ALTITUDE

Aircraft On Autopilot
PF sets AFCS altitude via the guidance panel, points to the PFD
Selected Altitude Readout and verbally states the cyan preselect
altitude.
PM points to and verbally states the cyan preselect altitude in the
PFD Selected Altitude Readout.
Under high workload conditions, the PF may request the PM to set
the required altitude which is accomplished using the procedure
below.
4.2.15.2
Manually Controlled Flight

PM sets AFCS altitude via the guidance panel, points to the PFD
Selected Altitude Readout and verbally states the cyan preselect
altitude.
PF points to the new AFCS altitude and verbally states the cyan
preselect altitude in the PFD Selected Altitude Readout.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.3
PAGE 4-5
IN FLIGHT MANEUVERS
4.3.1
FLIGHT SPOILER AND THRUST USAGE

Whenever the flight spoilers are used, the PF should keep a hand on the
spoiler lever to avoid forgetting the flight spoilers are extended.Thrust
should be at flight idle when deploying spoilers. Retract the flight spoilers
before adding thrust.
4.3.2
HOLDING
4.3.2.1
Speed
A.
When an aircraft is 3 minutes or less from a clearance limit and a

clearance beyond the fix has not been received, the pilot is
expected to start a speed reduction so that the aircraft will cross the
fix, initially, at or below the maximum holding airspeed.
B.
It may be advantageous to request a clearance to reduce to holding

speed immediately. This will reduce the required holding time and
fuel burn at the holding fix.
C.
The minimum holding speeds may be determined from the holding

tables located in Chapter 9 of the ERJ-170 Aircraft Performance
Manual.
D.
The maximum holding speed is limited as follows:
Altitude
Minimum Holding Altitude through 6000 ft.
Airspeed
200 KIAS
6,001 ft. through 14,000 ft.
230 KIASa
265 KIAS
Above 14,000 ft.

a
Holding patterns from 6,001 to 14,000 may be restricted to a maximum airspeed of 210
KIAS. This nonstandard pattern will be depicted by an icon.
4.3.2.2
Entries
The FMS offers three (3) types of entries into holding patterns:
direct
teardrop
If the leg toward the holding fix is on a limit between a teardrop entry
and a parallel entry, the FMS may compute and display either of the two
entries. Do not assume the FMS is malfunctioning.
parallel
If the flight plan leg toward the holding fix is on a course that is the
reciprocal of the inbound course of the holding pattern, the aircraft will fly
a parallel entry.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-6
4.4
WINDSHEAR RECOVERY
4.4.1
GENERAL.
A.
See QRH Severe Weather/Windshear for windshear takeoff and

landing precautions. The ERJ-170 has a windshear escape
guidance mode provided by the FD. This recovery guidance occurs
only during the windshear warning.
B.
The primary recovery technique objective is to keep the airplane

flying as long as possible while attempting to exit the shear. A wide
variety of techniques were considered to establish the one best
meeting this objective. The best results were achieved by pitching
toward an initial target attitude while using necessary thrust. Several
factors were considered in developing this technique.
C.
Studies show windshear encounters occur infrequently and that only

a few seconds are available to initiate a successful recovery.
Additionally, during high stress situations, pilot instrument scan
typically becomes very limited, i.e., in extreme cases, to only one
instrument. Lastly, recovery skills will not be exercised on a day-today basis. These factors dictate that the recovery technique must
not only be effective, but simple, easily recalled, and have general
applicability.
D.
Extensive analysis and pilot evaluations were conducted. Although

a range of recovery attitudes provide good recovery capability for a
wide variety of windshears, 15 is chosen as the initial target pitch
attitude for both takeoff and approach. Additional advantages of 15
initial target pitch attitude are that it is easily recalled in emergency
situations and it is prominently displayed on the attitude director
indicator.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.4.2
PAGE 4-7
WINDSHEAR DETECTION
A.
Windshear detection is activated between 10 and 1500 ft. radio

altitude during the initial takeoff, go-around and final approach
phases of flight.
B.
Increasing headwind and up drafts detection cause the annunciation

of an amber WSHEAR on PFD and a CAUTION WINDSHEAR voice
message.
C.
Decreasing headwind (or increasing tailwind) and down drafts

detection cause the annunciation of a warning windshear condition
through a red WSHEAR on PFD and a WINDSHEAR;
WINDSHEAR; WINDSHEAR voice message.
4.4.3
WINDSHEAR ESCAPE GUIDANCE MODE

A.
The Windshear Escape Guidance Mode provides a pitch command

to recover from a windshear to minimize altitude and airspeed loss
during a windshear encounter.
B.
This mode is a flight director mode and it is engaged in the following

conditions:
- Manually: pressing the Go Around Button while a windshear

condition is detected.
- Automatically: operating in go-around or takeoff mode and a

windshear condition is detected.
- Automatically when thrust levers position is above 78 and a

C.
D.
OPS-07A
warning windshear condition is detected.

The other flight director modes are canceled and the following
modes are inhibited while in a caution or warning windshear
condition:
Altitude pre-select, go-around and takeoff modes are canceled while
in a caution or warning windshear condition. No lateral mode is
inhibited while in windshear mode.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-8
E.
The Windshear Escape Guidance Mode incorporates three control

logics:
- Gamma Submode - The airplane has a positive flight path angle.

This sub-mode allows the airspeed to build up during an increasing
performance windshear in anticipation of a decreasing performance
windshear.
- Alpha Submode - The airplane maintains airspeed when
approaching stall conditions. The windshear protection control logic
keeps the airplane angle of attack below the stick shaker firing
angle.
- Speed Target Submode - The airplane manages the airspeed to
prevent overspeed. Pitch up is commanded to maintain the
calculated airspeed.
F. Windshear conditions will not be detected if either EGPWS or the
Radar Altimeter is unavailable.
4.4.4
APPROACH
For approach, plan on using Landing Flaps 5.
4.4.5
WINDSHEAR RECOGNITION TECHNIQUES

A.
The EGPWS provides a windshear detection/annunciation system.

Additionally, some cues are presented to help the pilot in a
windshear recognition.
B.
Marginal flight path control may be indicated by uncontrolled

changes from normal, steady-state flight conditions such as follows:
When the airplane is entering the

microburst (increased head wind):
FPV speed error tape: indicates speed above the

selected speed target.
FPA acceleration pointer: indicates deceleration
of the airplane.
When the airplane is exiting the

microburst (increased tail wind):
FPV speed error tape: indicates speed below the

selected speed target.
FPA acceleration pointer: indicates acceleration of
the airplane.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.4.5.1
OPS-07A
PAGE 4-9
WINDSHEAR RECOGNITION DIAGRAM
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-10
4.4.6
WINDSHEAR RECOVERY MANEUVER ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
Step
PF
PM
Thrust
Autothrottles - disconnect
FIREWALL THRUST
Verify all actions have been

completed and call out any
omissions
Accomplished Simultaneously
Press TO/GA Switch

Set thrust
Roll
Autopilot - disconnect
Roll wings level
Pitch
If on takeoff roll, rotate no later than 2,000
remaining
Rotate toward 15 pitch, then follow FD
commands
-orIf EGPWS inoperative, rotate (3/sec) toward
15 pitch or PLI (Pitch Limit Indicator),
whichever is lower. Increase beyond 15, if
required, to ensure acceptable flight path.
Respect stick shaker/buffet
Monitor attitude, airspeed and

altitude
Monitor radio altimeter and call

out information on flight path
(e.g., 300 FEET DESCENDING; 400 FEET CLIMBING,
etc.)
Configuration
Speedbrakes - retract
Do not alter gear/flap configuration until
terrain clearance is assured
4.4.7
After Windshear Recovery

Resume normal flight
Retract gear/flaps as required
Advise ATC
WINDSHEAR RECOVERY TECHNIQUES

The windshear escape maneuver should be performed whenever the
following happens:
- A warning windshear is annunciated during approach or after lift-off.

PFD: WSHEAR (red).
Voice message: WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR.
- A caution windshear is annunciated during approach and the

captain decides to perform the windshear recovery technique.
- A caution windshear is annunciated after lift-off.
PFD: WSHEAR (amber).
Voice message: CAUTION WINDSHEAR.
- Whenever the captain decides to perform the recovery techniques

due to the presence of windshear clues without EGPWS
announcement.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.4.7.1
PAGE 4-11
Windshear escape maneuver due to EGPWS announcement:
J Thrust Levers - - - - - - - - - - - FIREWALL THRUST

When moving the thrust levers press either TOGA button.
J Flight Director Escape Guidance Cue - - - - - FOLLOW

Maintain the present configuration (gear and flaps) until 1500 ft. AGL
and with terrain clearance assured.
4.4.7.2
Windshear escape maneuver without EGPWS
announcement:
J Autopilot- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DISENGAGE
J Thrust Levers - - - - - - - - - - - FIREWALL THRUST
When moving the thrust levers press either TOGA button.
J Pitch - - - - - - - - - - - 15 or PLI whichever is lower

Maintain the present configuration (gear and flaps) until 1500 ft. AGL
and with terrain clearance assured.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-12
4.5
EGPWS
4.5.1
121.354(c)(1)
EGPWS INPUT SOURCES
121.360(b)(2)
A.
Systems that monitor altitude, airspeed, attitude, glideslope, and

position are required for operation of the EGPWS. Accelerations,
angle-of-attack (AOA), and flap position are required for the
windshear function.
B.
The EGPWS is fully active when the following systems are powered
and functioning normally:
1) EGPWS
2) Radio Altimeter
3) Air Data
4) ILS or glideslope receiver
5) AHRS, VG (attitude)
6) GPS, FMS
7) Landing gear
8) Stall warning or AOA (wind shear only)
9) Weather radar, EFIS, or a dedicated terrain display.
4.5.2
4.5.3
USE OF THE EGPWS
121.360(b)(1)(i)
The EGPWS has a self-test capability that verifies and indicates

intended functions.
B.
When a terrain warning/caution exists and the terrain is not selected

on the MFD, the terrain is automatically displayed on the MFD with a
range of 10 NM.
C.
No pilot may deactivate

the EGPWS system
except in accordance
with the procedures
contained in the QRH.
NOTE
A.
Whenever the EGPWS system has

been deactivated an entry shall be
made in the Aircraft Flight/Maintenance Logbook record that includes
the date and time of deactivation.
EGPWS RECOVERY
121.354(c)(2))
If a PULL UP or TERRAIN, TERRAIN PULL UP alert occurs at night

or in IMC, use the following maneuver:
Original 29AUG2005
121.360(d)
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.5.3.1
EGPWS Recovery Action and Callouts
121.360(b)(1)(ii)
PF
Step
1
Thrust
Autothrottles - disconnect
FIREWALL THRUST
Set firewall thrust
Pitch
Roll wings level
Rotate (3/sec) to 15 pitch
Respect stick shaker/buffet
Configuration
Do not alter gear/flap configuration until
terrain clearance is assured
Climb to safe altitude
After EGPWS Recovery

Resume normal flight
4.5.4
PAGE 4-13
PM
omissions
Monitor radio altimeter and call out
information on flight path
(e.g., 300 FEET, DESCENDING;
400 FEET, CLIMBING, etc.)
Call out the safe altitude

(e.g., MSA IS 3,400 FEET)
Advise ATC
OTHER EGPWS ALERTS

Accomplish the following:
4.5.4.1
TERRAIN, TERRAIN - TOO LOW TERRAIN

Adjust the flight path or initiate a go around.
4.5.4.2
CAUTION TERRAIN
Adjust the flight path. Stop descent. Climb and/or turn as necessary
based on analysis of all available instruments and information.
4.5.4.3
SINK RATE - DON'T SINK

Adjust pitch attitude and thrust to silence the alert.
4.5.4.4
TOO LOW GEAR or TOO LOW Flaps

Correct the configuration or perform a go around.
4.5.4.5
GLIDE SLOPE
Establish the airplane on the glide slope or press the GND PROX G/S
INHIB if non-normal situation dictates.
Intentionally flying below the glide slope is not authorized.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-14
4.6
TCAS WARNINGS
4.6.1
TCAS PROCEDURES
121.356(c)(1)(i)
A.
During the Before Start Checklist and flow, both pilots will activate
the TCAS on their respective MFD.
B.
Activate the MAP menu and select the TCAS title button using the
CCD cursor pad. Push ENTER.
C.
To control the TCAS display, move the cursor to the TCAS menu title
and push ENTER. The TCAS menu is displayed. Select range,
absolute altitude (ABS) and Normal or Expanded as desired.
4.6.2
TCAS INPUT SOURCES
121.356(c)(2)
The TCAS interfaces with the following aircraft systems:

1) Radar Altimeter
2) Mode S Transponder
3) Central Maintenance Computer (CMC)
4) Display Bus (MAU and EDS)
5) Modular Radio Cabinet (MRC)
6) Digital Voice and Data Recorder (DVDR)
7) Discretes
Weight on wheels
Landing gear down
Warning inhibits
4.6.3
TRAFFIC ADVISORY (TA)
121.356(c)(1)(ii))
If receiving a TA...
- do not maneuver based on a TA alone and

- attempt to see the reported traffic.
4.6.4
RESOLUTION ADVISORY (RA)
121.356(c)(1)(ii))
If receiving a RA...
Trigger
PF
PM
RA
Press and hold the TCS button (if

autopilot is engaged)
Follow RA PFD guidance
Respect stall, GPWS, or windshear
warnings
Maintain desired airspeed
Perform a go around procedure with
a CLIMB RA and the aircraft in a
landing configuration
Clear of
Conflict
Establish appropriate vertical/lateral modes to return to last ATC assigned

altitude before releasing TCS.
Original 29AUG2005

omissions
Monitor airspeed
Advise ATC
Attempt to see reported traffic
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.7
4.7.1
PAGE 4-15
STALLS
GENERAL
During the initial stages of a stall, local air flow separation results in initial
buffet giving natural warning of an approach to stall. A stall warning is
considered to be any warning readily identifiable by the pilot, either
artificial (stick shaker) or initial buffet. Recovery from an approach to stall
will be initiated at the earliest recognizable stall warning.
4.7.2
LATERAL AND DIRECTIONAL CONTROL

Lateral control is maintained with ailerons. Rudder (directional) control
should not be used because it causes yaw and the resultant roll is
undesirable.
4.7.3
EFFECT OF FLAPS.
Flaps are used to increase low-speed performance capability. The
leading edge devices ensure the inboard wing will stall prior to the
outboard wing.
4.7.4
EFFECT OF FLIGHT SPOILERS.

For any airspeed, the angle of attack is higher with speedbrakes up
(extended). This increases initial buffet speed and stick shaker speed,
but has a lesser effect on actual stall speed.
4.7.5
APPROACHES TO STALLS
Approaches to stalls will be accomplished using different flap
configurations. The stall speed and angle-of-attack at stall are essentially
the same power-on or power-off for jet aircraft. Jet aircraft thrust has little
effect on lowering the stall speed.
4.7.6
STALL TRAINING
Stall training is accomplished in the simulator.
4.7.7
ALTITUDES
Simulator training may be done at realistic altitudes for arrival, departure,
and level flight maneuvering altitudes.
4.7.8
ENTRY
The instructor is responsible for the set up of the stalls.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-16
4.7.9
RECOVERY
At the first stall warning indication
Call FIREWALL THRUST while advancing the thrust levers to the
mechanical stops.
Establish a pitch attitude to keep altitude loss to a minimum.
Continue accelerating and establish climb or level flight as
necessary.
When normal airspeed for the existing configuration is reached
Reduce thrust to the normal operating range
If an engine exceedance occurs or is suspected, refer to QRH
procedure.
4.7.9.1
Landing Gear.
If the entry has been made with the landing gear extended, do not retract
the landing gear until after the recovery.
4.7.9.2
Flaps.
Do not retract flaps during the recovery. Retracting the flaps from the
landing position, especially when near the ground, causes an altitude
loss during the recovery. Flap extension above 20,000 is not permitted.
4.7.9.3
If Terrain Contact is a Factor.

At the first indication of a stall (buffet or stick-shaker), disconnect the
autopilot, smoothly advance the thrust levers to firewall thrust and adjust
the pitch attitude as necessary to avoid the terrain. Simultaneously level
the wings. Control pitch as smoothly as possible. As the engines
accelerate, the airplane nose will pitch up. To assist in pitch control, add
more nose down trim as the thrust increases. Avoid abrupt control inputs
that may induce a secondary stall. Use intermittent stick shaker as the
upper limit for pitch attitude. When terrain contact is no longer a factor,
continue to adjust pitch as required to accelerate to maneuvering speed.
4.7.9.4
If Terrain Contact is Not a Factor.

At the first indication of a stall (buffet or stick-shaker), smoothly apply
firewall thrust and smoothly decrease the pitch attitude to approximately
5 above the horizon and level the wings. As engines accelerate, counter
the nose-up pitch tendency with positive forward control column pressure
and nose-down trim. (At altitudes above 20,000 feet, pitch attitudes of
less than 5 may be necessary to achieve acceptable acceleration).
Accelerate to maneuvering speed and stop the rate of descent. Correct
back to the target altitude.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.7.10
Step
1
PAGE 4-17
STALL RECOVERY ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS

PF
Thrust
Autothrottle - disconnect
PM
Verify all actions have been completed
and call out any omissions
FIREWALL THRUST
Set firewall thrust
Roll
Roll wings level
Pitch
Adjust pitch as required to minimize
altitude loss
Respect stick-shaker/buffet
Configuration
Do not alter gear/flap configuration
After Stall Recovery

Resume normal flight.
Retract gear/flaps as required.
Monitor attitude, airspeed and altitude

Monitor radio altimeter, and call out
(e.g., 300 FEET DESCENDING;
400 FEET CLIMBING, etc.)
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-18
4.8
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
This section provides the
basic recovery procedures
from unusual attitudes.
4.8.1
Excessive use of pitch trim,

or rudder, may aggravate an
upset situation, or may
result in loss of control and/
or high structural loads.
NOSE HIGH RECOGNITION

A nose-high pitch attitude is recognized by
4.8.2
high pitch attitude

high rate of climb
increasing altitude
decreasing airspeed.
NOSE HIGH RECOVERY ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
Step
PF
Thrust
Apply thrust proportional to airspeed
degradation
Roll
Increase or introduce banka to aid in
lowering pitch
PM
completed and call out any omissions

Pitch
Reduce pitch
Roll to wings-level when

approaching the horizon
Check airspeed and adjust thrust
Establish pitch attitude
Advise ATC if required
a.Bank aids in lowering pitch while maintaining a positive load factor

to avoid zero or negative G-forces. Depending upon the degree and
rate of pitch change, bank angles from 35 to 70 (in the direction of
any initial roll) may be required.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.8.3
PAGE 4-19
NOSE LOW RECOGNITION

A nose-low pitch attitude is recognized by low pitch attitude, high rate of
descent, increasing airspeed, and possibly excessive bank angle.
4.8.4
NOSE LOW RECOVERY ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS

Step
1
PF
PM
Thrust
Reduce thrust and extend speedbrakes

Roll
Roll in the shortest direction toward
wings-level attitudea

Pitch
Apply back pressure when bank has
been reduced to wings-level and raise
nose to horizonb
2

a.During recovery from nose-low, high bank angle attitudes, focus on

the bank indicator (sky pointer) of the attitude indicator. Roll the
aircraft in the direction of the bank indicator. This is the shortest
direction toward an upright wings-level attitude.
b.The primary concern is to decrease bank angle (if present) to
prevent overloading the aircraft when the pitch is raised to the
horizon.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-20
4.9
WAKE TURBULENCE
4.9.1
RECOGNITION
An encounter with wake vortices is associated with abrupt roll and
aerodynamic loads similar to turbulence encounters. Prompt initiation of
recovery procedures is necessary to preclude an unusual attitude.
4.9.2
WAKE TURBULENCE RECOVERY ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
Step
1
PF
Thrust
Add thrust as necessary
PM
Roll
Apply ailerons and rudder to recover
wings-level attitude
Pitch
Adjust pitch to horizon

Initiate go-around if on approach with
probability of further encounter

Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
4.10
4.10.1
PAGE 4-21
STEEP TURNS
OBJECTIVE
4.10.2
CONFIGURATION
The aircraft in a clean
configuration with the flight
director and autothrottles
OFF.
4.10.3
NOTE
The objective of the steep turn maneuver is to familiarize pilots with the
aircraft handling characteristics and improve the instrument panel scan.
Steep turns shall consist forty five (45) banked turn of 180 or 360 in
each direction. Altitude, airspeed, and angle of bank should remain
constant.
Trimming during the maneuver is

optional.
ENTRY
Once stabilized at 250 KIAS and on altitude & constant heading
smoothly roll into a 45 bank turn.
4.10.4
RECOVERY
Approximately fifteen (15) degrees prior to the desired heading start
rolling out.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 4-22
EMERGENCY DESCENT
4.11.1
GENERAL
NOTE
4.11
This maneuver is designed

Use of the autopilot is recommended.
to provide a smooth
descent to a safe altitude, in
minimum time, with the
lowest possible passenger discomfort.
4.11.2
DISCUSSION
If structural damage is suspected, limit airspeed as much as possible,
and avoid high maneuvering loads.
When turbulent air is encountered or expected, reduce to turbulent air
penetration speed (270 KIAS/.7 MACH).
Rapid descent is normally made with the landing gear up and
speedbrakes OPEN to FULL.
4.11.3
USE OF FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE (FLCH)

Because of airspeed and altitude protection and reduced crew workload,
use of the autopilot with FLCH mode is the recommended technique for
rapid descents. Use of vertical speed (V/S) mode is not recommended.
To initiate an emergency descent, set a lower altitude in the altitude
window (Spin). Engage FLCH (Push), retard thrust levers to idle (Pull),
and smoothly OPEN to FULL the speedbrakes (Pull). The aircraft will
pitch down smoothly. Adjust the speed as necessary and ensure the
altitude window is correctly set for the level off. During descent, the IAS/
MACH speed window changes from MACH to IAS at approximately 300
KIAS. Manually reset to VMO as desired.
4.11.4
LEVEL OFF
A.
Level off at 10,000 feet or safe altitude, whichever is higher.
B.
Safe altitude is:

On airway:
- Minimum Enroute Altitude (MEA), or Minimum Obstacle Clearance

Altitude (MOCA), whichever is higher, or
Off airway:
- Minimum Off-Route Altitude (MORA), or any other altitude based on
terrain clearance, navigation aid reception, or
Within terminal area:
- Highest Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
C. Approximately 1,000 feet above the desired altitude, smoothly return
the speedbrake to CLOSE during the level off maneuver.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
D.
4.11.5
PAGE 4-23
When approaching the selected altitude, the altitude capture will

engage automatically. Adjusting the command speed to
approximately LRC or 300 knots prior to level off minimizes thrust
lever activity at altitude capture. The pitch mode will then control
altitude and the thrust levers will increase to hold speed.
USE OF THE AUTOPILOT

The autopilot should remain engaged and used to accomplish the
descent.
4.11.6
AFTER LEVEL OFF

Determine new course of action based on weather, oxygen, fuel
remaining and available airports. Obtain new ATC clearance.
4.11.7
MANUAL FLIGHT
A.
To manually fly the maneuver, disconnect the autothrottles and

retard thrust levers to idle. Smoothly OPEN the speedbrakes,
disconnect the autopilot, and smoothly lower the nose to initial
descent attitude, (approximately 10 nose-down). About 10 knots
before reaching target speed (VMO/MMO), slowly reduce the pitch
attitude to maintain target speed. Keep the aircraft in trim at all
times. If VMO/MMO is inadvertently exceeded, change pitch smoothly
to decrease speed.
B.
Approaching level off altitude, smoothly adjust pitch attitude to

reduce rate of descent. The speedbrake lever should be returned to
CLOSE approximately 1,000 feet above the desired altitude. After
reaching level flight, add thrust to maintain desired speed.
End of Chapter
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 4-24
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 5-1
Chapter 5: Normal Procedures Checklist

5.1 Normal Procedures Checklist .................................................................... 5-1
5.2 ERJ-170 Jumpseat Briefing Card ............................................................. 5-3
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
OPS-07A
Jammed Door Emergency Egress ........................................................... 5-3

Pilot/Copilot/Observer Oxygen Mask .................................................... 5-4
Observer Seat .......................................................................................... 5-5
Cockpit Window Emergency Exit .......................................................... 5-6
PAGE TOC 5-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
SOP-08-02, PAGE 1 OF 16
SOP BULLETIN
SOP-08-02
Effective Date: May 9, 2008
To:
All SOP Holders
From:
Kevin Cline, ERJ 170 Program Manager
Subject:
Revised Taxi Checklist
Directions:
future revision. This bulletin supersedes SOP-07-01 and be sure
to remove SOP-07-01 from your SOP.
2) This Bulletin is in Four parts. This is part One.
3) Record the insertion of SOP-08-02 and removal of SOP-07-01 in
the Record of Bulletins section on page BUL-1 of your Standard
Operating Procedures Manual.
Background: In response to the FAA Industry efforts to eliminate
runway incursions, one of the elements is to reduce the
amount of time spent doing duties that interfere with a
flight crews ability to keep their attention outside of the
aircraft during taxi. There, Republic Airlines has reduced
the number of items on the Taxi Checklist to a minimum in
order to minimize the distractions associated with running
checklist items that could be performed prior to aircraft
movement.
SOP-08-02, PAGE 2 OF 16
Placement: Insert this part One before page 5-1. This part adds
changes to the Normal Procedures Checklist in Section 5.1.
SAFETY & POWER ON
ERJ-170
NORMAL
PROCEDURES
CHECKLIST
GND SVC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not in use

Maintenance Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
GPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUT
APU GEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
BATT 1 & BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
FUEL DC PUMP & AC PUMPs 1 & 2 . . . . . . AUTO
EMER LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
WINDSHIELD WIPERs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
HYD SYS 1, 2, & 3B ELEC PUMPs . . . . . . . AUTO
HYD SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Landing Gear Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DN
POWERPLANT START/STOP 1&2 . . . . . . . STOP
Speed Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CLOSE
Thrust Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
BATT 1 / BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ON / AUTO
Displays 2 & 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available
EICAS Messages . . . . . . None annunciated first
5 seconds
BATT 1 & BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.5 vDC Min
SLAT/FLAP Lever . Agrees with surface position
FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
Electrical Power/Air Conditioning . . . . Establish
ORIGINATING / RECEIVING
PART NUMBER
RW-NCL-R3-5-9-08-WT
REV: 3
DATE: 09MAY2008
Logbook, Forms & Manuals .Verify . . . Checked

QRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . .Installed
Gear/RAT Pins . . . . . . . . . . . .[FO] . . . . . Stowed
CB Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . Checked
Panel Prep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . .Complete
O2 & Interphone . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . Checked
Receiving Checklist . . . . . . .[FO] . . . .Complete
SOP-08-02, PAGE 3 OF 16
BEFORE START
Preflight Inspections . . .Verify . . . . . . . Complete
Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . .Verify . . ___REQ,___OB
MCDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . Set
O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . .Checked
Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . __.__Set
PASSENGER SIGNS . . .[C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Departure Review . . . . .[C] . . . . . . . . . Complete
Doors/Windows . . . . . . .Verify . Closed &Locked
RED BCN . . . . . . . . . . . .[FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
PARKING BRAKE . . . . .[C] . . . . . . . . ON or OFF
Before Start Checklist . .[FO] . . . . . . . . Complete
AFTER START
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . ___
Flight Controls . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . .Checked
PITCH & TRIM. . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . _._&Green
Takeoff Data . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . __,__,__,__/__
EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[FO] . . . . . . . . .Checked
Shoulder Harness . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . .On
After Start Checklist . . .[FO] . . . . . . . . Complete
TAXI
EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Temp . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takeoff Briefing . . . . . . . . .
Taxi Checklist. . . . . . . . . . .
Verify . . . . .Checked
[FO] . . . . . . . . Green
[PF]. . . . . . Complete
[FO] . . . . . Complete
BEFORE TAKEOFF
T.O. MIN Fuel Quantity . . .
Flight Attendants . . . . . . . .
Transponder. . . . . . . . . . . .
T/O CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Takeoff Checklist. .
Verify___Req,___OB
[FO] . . . . . . Notified
[FO] . . . . . . . .TA/RA
[FO] . . . . . .Checked
AFTER TAKEOFF
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UP
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UP
After Takeoff Checklist . . . [PM] . . . . . Complete
DESCENT
Shoulder Harness. . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . On
FSTN BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . ON
Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . .__.__Set
Landing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . Set
EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . Checked
Approach Briefing . . . . . . . [PF] . . . . . .Complete
Descent Checklist . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . .Complete
LANDING
Flight Attendants . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . Notified
EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . Checked
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . Verify . . Down, 3 Green
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . __
Landing Checklist . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . .Complete
AFTER LANDING
Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .As Req
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP
APU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF or ON
After Landing Checklist . . . [FO]. . . . . .Complete
PARKING
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . .
Thrust Levers . . . . . . . . . . .
START/STOP 1 & 2 . . . . . . .
PASSENGER SIGNS. . . . . .
RED BCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Checklist . . . . . . . .
[C] . . . . . . ON or OFF
[C} . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
[C] . . . . . . . . . . STOP
[C] . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
[C] . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
[C] . . . . . . . . . . . . Set
[FO]. . . . . .Complete
NTSB REPORTABLE EVENT

Both CVRs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . [C] . . . . . . Deactivate
Logbook Enrties . . . . . . . . . [C] . . . . . . .Complete
CVR Deactivation Checklist[C] . . . . . . .Complete
SECURING
Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
EXTERNAL LIGHTS Switches (All) . . . . . . . . OFF
EMER LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
GPU/APU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
BATT 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
DOME Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Entrance Light Switchlight
(Forward FA Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
QRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removed
Securing Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Complete
SOP-08-02, PAGE 4 OF 16
ERJ-170 STANDARD
121.315(a)
121.315(b)
121.315(c)
PAGE 5-1
Chapter 5
Normal Procedures Checklist
5.1
NORMAL PROCEDURES CHECKLIST
SAFETY & POWER ON
ERJ-170
NORMAL
PROCEDURES
CHECKLIST
GND SVC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not in use

Maintenance Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
GPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUT
APU GEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
BATT 1 & BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
FUEL DC PUMP & AC PUMPs 1 & 2 . . . . . . AUTO
EMER LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
WINDSHIELD WIPERs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
HYD SYS 1, 2, & 3B ELEC PUMPs . . . . . . . AUTO
HYD SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Landing Gear Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DN
POWERPLANT START/STOP 1&2 . . . . . . . STOP
Speed Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .CLOSE
Thrust Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
BATT 1 / BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ON / AUTO
Displays 2 & 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available
EICAS Messages . . . . . . None annunciated first
5 seconds
BATT 1 & BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22.5 vDC Min
SLAT/FLAP Lever . Agrees with surface position
FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
Electrical Power/Air Conditioning . . . . Establish
ORIGINATING / RECEIVING
Logbook, Forms & Manuals .Verify . . . Checked
QRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . .Installed
Gear/RAT Pins . . . . . . . . . . . .[FO] . . . . . Stowed
CB Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . Checked
Panel Prep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . .Complete
O2 & Interphone . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . Checked
Receiving Checklist . . . . . . .[FO] . . . .Complete
REV: 1
DATE: 15FEB2007
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 5-2
BEFORE START
Preflight Inspections . . .Verify . . . . . . . Complete
Fuel Quantity . . . . . . . . .Verify . . ___REQ,___OB
MCDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . Set
O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . .Checked
Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . __.__Set
PASSENGER SIGNS . . .[C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Departure Review . . . . .[C] . . . . . . . . . Complete
Doors/Windows . . . . . . .Verify . Closed &Locked
RED BCN . . . . . . . . . . . .[FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
PARKING BRAKE . . . . .[C] . . . . . . . . ON or OFF
Before Start Checklist . .[FO] . . . . . . . . Complete
AFTER START
Flight Controls . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . .Checked
EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[FO] . . . . . . . . .Checked
Shoulder Harness . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . .On
After Start Checklist . . .[FO] . . . . . . . . Complete
TAXI
EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Temp . . . . . . . . . . . .
PITCH & TRIM. . . . . . . . . . .
Takeoff Data . . . . . . . . . . . .
Takeoff Briefing . . . . . . . . .
Taxi Checklist. . . . . . . . . . .
Verify . . . . .Checked
Verify . . . . . . . ___
[FO] . . . . . . . . Green
Verify . . . _._&Green
Verify __,__,__,__/__
[PF]. . . . . . Complete
BEFORE TAKEOFF
T.O. MIN Fuel Quantity . . .
Flight Attendants . . . . . . . .
Transponder. . . . . . . . . . . .
T/O CONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Takeoff Checklist. .
Verify___Req,___OB
[FO] . . . . . . Notified
[FO] . . . . . . . .TA/RA
[FO] . . . . . .Checked
AFTER TAKEOFF
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UP
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UP
After Takeoff Checklist . . . [PM] . . . . . Complete
DESCENT
Shoulder Harness. . . . . . . .
FSTN BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Landing Data. . . . . . . . . . . .
EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approach Briefing . . . . . . .
Descent Checklist . . . . . . .
Verify . . . . . . . . . On
[PM] . . . . . . . . . . ON
Verify . . . . .__.__Set
[PM] . . . . . . . . . . Set
[PM] . . . . . Checked
[PF] . . . . . .Complete
[PM] . . . . .Complete
LANDING
Flight Attendants . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . Notified
EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . Checked
Landing Gear . . . . . . . . Verify . . Down, 3 Green
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . __
Landing Checklist . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . .Complete
AFTER LANDING
Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STBY
Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP
APU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF or ON
After Landing Checklist . . . [FO]. . . . . .Complete
PARKING
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . .
Thrust Levers . . . . . . . . . . .
START/STOP 1 & 2 . . . . . . .
PASSENGER SIGNS. . . . . .
RED BCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Checklist . . . . . . . .
[C] . . . . . . ON or OFF
[C} . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
[C] . . . . . . . . . . STOP
[C] . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
[C] . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
[C] . . . . . . . . . . . . Set
[FO]. . . . . .Complete

Both CVRs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . [C] . . . . . . Deactivate
Logbook Enrties . . . . . . . . . [C] . . . . . . .Complete
CVR Deactivation Checklist[C] . . . . . . .Complete
SECURING
Chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
EXTERNAL LIGHTS Switches (All) . . . . . . . . OFF
EMER LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
GPU/APU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
BATT 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
DOME Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
Entrance Light Switchlight
(Forward FA Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
QRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removed
Securing Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Complete
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
5.2
PAGE 5-3
ERJ-170 JUMPSEAT BRIEFING CARD

The following four pages contain the Jumpseat Briefing Card as
referenced in the FOM.
No Smoking
Use of Seat Belt and Shoulder Harness
Location and operation of Emergency Exits
Use oxygen/smoke goggle equipment
Operation of the cockpit door locking mechanism and challenge and
response procedure.
Use of headset and interphone
Sterile cockpit policy
Responsibility in the the event of an emergency
5.2.1
OPS-07A
JAMMED DOOR EMERGENCY EGRESS
1. Check the red indication to

assure the door is unlatched.
2. Remove the quick release

pin.
3. Push the door outboard

while holding the handle
4. Remove the door.
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 5-4
5.2.2
PILOT/COPILOT/OBSERVER OXYGEN MASK
Yellow indicates oxygen

is flowing.
Test /Reset button
OXY ON FLAG appears
when oxygen is supplied
to the mask.
Purge Valve
Harness Inflation Button - Pressing inflates the harness so the mask

may be donned.
Regulator - Emerg supplies 100% under positive pressure
100% supplies pure oxygen, Norm oxygen/air mixture
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
5.2.3
PAGE 5-5
OBSERVER SEAT
1
6
6
4
5
Release the seat.

Let the seat down slowly into
position.
Release the strap
Bring the seat bottom to a
horizontal position.
Pull the backrest up to top-off
fitting.
Lock the backrest.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 5-6
5.2.4
COCKPIT WINDOW EMERGENCY EXIT
1 Press lock button.

3
Pull escape rope from

overhead panel.
6 Use escape rope loops.
2 Pull the handle in & backward.

5
Deploy escape rope.

Exit flight deck
Assist others after
7
reaching ground.
End of Chapter
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 6-1
Chapter 6: Preflight
6.1 General ...................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
Flight Release/Weather Package/ Performance ...................................... 6-1

Report to Aircraft ................................................................................... 6-1
ATIS Information ................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Interior Flight Deck Inspection ................................................................. 6-2

6.2.1
General .................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2.1.1
6.2.1.2
6.2.2
Who ............................................................................................................... 6-2

When ............................................................................................................. 6-2
Flow Pattern ............................................................................................ 6-2

6.2.2.1
6.2.2.2
6.2.2.3
6.2.2.4
6.2.2.5
6.2.2.6
Logbook and Manuals - Checked ................................................................. 6-2

Doorway ........................................................................................................ 6-2
Captains Side ............................................................................................... 6-2
First Officers Side ........................................................................................ 6-3
Aft Control Pedestal ...................................................................................... 6-3
Observer Seat ................................................................................................ 6-3
6.3 Safety & Power On Checklist ................................................................... 6-4

6.3.1
General .................................................................................................... 6-4

6.3.1.1
6.3.1.2
6.3.2
6.3.3
Who ............................................................................................................... 6-4

When ............................................................................................................. 6-4
Flow Patterns .......................................................................................... 6-4

Safety & Power On Expanded Checklist ................................................ 6-4
6.4 Establishing Electrical Power/Air Conditioning ....................................... 6-7

6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
General .................................................................................................... 6-7

Electrical ................................................................................................. 6-7
Ground Power ........................................................................................ 6-7
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) .................................................................. 6-7
Air Conditioning ................................................................................... 6-8
Fly By Wire Power Up Built-In Test (PBIT) ......................................... 6-8
6.4.6.1
6.4.6.2
Electrical PBIT ............................................................................................. 6-8

Hydraulic PBIT ............................................................................................. 6-9
6.5 Exterior Inspection .................................................................................. 6-10

6.5.1
General .................................................................................................. 6-10

6.5.1.1
6.5.1.2
6.5.1.3
6.5.1.4
6.5.1.5
6.5.2
6.5.3
Exterior Inspection Route ..................................................................... 6-12

Flow Pattern .......................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.3.1
6.5.3.2
6.5.3.3
6.5.3.4
6.5.3.5
6.5.3.6
6.5.3.7
6.5.3.8
OPS-07A
Who ............................................................................................................. 6-10

When ........................................................................................................... 6-10
Check .......................................................................................................... 6-10
Conditions/Discrepancies ........................................................................... 6-10
Procedures ................................................................................................. 6-11
Nose Section ............................................................................................... 6-12

Nosewheel and Gear ................................................................................... 6-12
Right Forward Fuselage .............................................................................. 6-13
Right Wing .................................................................................................. 6-13
Right Main Gear ......................................................................................... 6-13
Tail Cone ..................................................................................................... 6-14
Left Main Gear ............................................................................................ 6-14
Left Wing .................................................................................................... 6-14
PAGE TOC 6-2

6.5.3.9
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Left Forward Fuselage ................................................................................ 6-15
6.6 [RESERVED] .......................................................................................... 6-16

6.7 Interior Cabin Inspection ......................................................................... 6-17
6.7.1
General .................................................................................................. 6-17

6.7.1.1
6.7.1.2
6.7.2
Who ............................................................................................................. 6-17

When ........................................................................................................... 6-17
Flow Pattern .......................................................................................... 6-17

6.7.2.1
6.7.2.2
6.7.2.3
6.7.2.4
6.7.2.5
6.7.2.6
6.7.2.7
6.7.2.8
6.7.2.9
6.7.2.10
6.7.2.11
6.7.2.12
6.7.2.13
6.7.2.14
6.7.2.15
Forward Galley ........................................................................................... 6-17

Forward Lavatory ....................................................................................... 6-17
Forward Flight Attendant Jumpseat ............................................................ 6-17
Left Overhead Bin - Row 1 ......................................................................... 6-17
Forward Emergency Equipment Compartment .......................................... 6-17
Wardrobe Closet ......................................................................................... 6-18
Aft Galley ................................................................................................... 6-18
Left Overhead Bin - Row 18 ....................................................................... 6-18
Aft Left Doghouse ...................................................................................... 6-18
Aft Left Bulkhead Wallmounted ................................................................ 6-18
Aft Flight Attendant Jumpseat .................................................................... 6-18
Aft Right Doghouse .................................................................................... 6-18
Aft Right Bulkhead Wallmounted .............................................................. 6-18
Aft Right Bulkhead Compartment .............................................................. 6-18
Aft Lavatory ............................................................................................... 6-18
6.8 Originating/Receiving Checklist ............................................................. 6-19

6.8.1
General .................................................................................................. 6-19

6.8.1.1
6.8.1.2
6.8.2
Captains Flow Pattern .......................................................................... 6-19

6.8.2.1
6.8.2.2
6.8.3
Captains Abbreviated Flow ....................................................................... 6-20

Captains Expanded Flow ........................................................................... 6-21
First Officers Flow Pattern .................................................................. 6-28

6.8.3.1
6.8.3.2
6.8.4
Who ............................................................................................................. 6-19

When ........................................................................................................... 6-19
First Officers Abbreviated Flow ................................................................ 6-28

First Officers Expanded Flow ................................................................... 6-29
Originating/Receiving Checklist ........................................................... 6-31
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-1
Chapter 6
Preflight
6.1
GENERAL
6.1.1
FLIGHT RELEASE/WEATHER PACKAGE/ PERFORMANCE

Flight Release, weather package, and performance package should
normally be available sixty (60) minutes prior to departure. The gate
agent will normally have the paperwork printed out prior to the crew
arrival.
6.1.2
REPORT TO AIRCRAFT
Captain
Accomplish Crew Briefing when originating

trip (FOM)
First Officer
Participate in Crew Briefing
If electrical power is not established on the aircraft, read and do the Safety & Power On
Checklist
Accomplish Interior Flight Deck Inspection
Accomplish Exterior Inspection
Accomplish Originating/Receiving Checklist Flow Patterns
6.1.3
ATIS INFORMATION
Normally the first officer records the current ATIS information.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-2
6.2
6.2.1
INTERIOR FLIGHT DECK INSPECTION

GENERAL
The interior flight deck inspection ensures flight deck emergency
equipment is on board and operational.
6.2.1.1
Who
Normally accomplished by the captain.
6.2.1.2
When
This inspection is accomplished on the first flight of the day, subsequent
flights when flight deck crew changes occur or when the flight deck has
been left unattended.
6.2.2
FLOW PATTERN
A circle flow pattern starting at the doorway, then to the captains side,
first officers side, and ending at the doorway.
6.2.2.1
Logbook and Manuals - Checked

Check that the following manuals are on board and current:
121.628(a)(4)
1) Aircraft Flight/Maintenance Logbook (AFML)

(a) Check aircraft tail number vs. flight release vs. aircraft
number on the AFML.
(b) Review the AFML for MEL'd items, CDL'd items, open writeups, completed 2-Day sign-off, and Airworthiness Release.
121.628(a)(2)
2) Minimum Equipment List (MEL/CDL)

3) ERJ-170 Performance Manual (170-PFM)
4) Data Cards / Jumpseat Briefing Cards
121.315(c)
5) Normal Checklists (1)

6) Honeywell Pilots FMS Guide (Volume II)
121.153(a)(1)
7) Registration and Certificate of Airworthiness

6.2.2.2
Doorway
J PBE (1) - - - Check for seal integrity (verify the blue dot).
J Halon Fire Extinguisher (1) Pressure in green, pin installed
J Crash Axe (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Stowed
6.2.2.3
Captains Side
J Flashlight - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LED steady

J Life Vest(1) - - - - - - - - - Installed in seat back pocket
J Circuit Breakers - - - - - - - - - - - - Closed or collared
OPS-07A
121.337(c)
121.337(c)(1)(ii)
121.309(c)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-3
J Escape Rope - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.2.2.4
First Officers Side
J
J
J
J
J
J
6.2.2.5
Flashlight - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LED steady

Circuit Breakers - - - - - - - - - - - - Closed or collared
Life Vest(1) - - - - - - - - - Installed in seat back pocket
Jumpseat Life Vest (1) - - - - Installed in seat back pocket
Escape Rope - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Landing Gear and RAT Safety Pins - - - - - - On board
Aft Control Pedestal
J SeeGee C.G. Calculator - - - - - - - - - - - - On board

6.2.2.6
Observer Seat
J Observer Seat - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Check Condition

J Observer Safety Belt and Shoulder Harness - - - - Check
121.311(i)
If seat unoccupied, belt and shoulder harness must be secured so as

not to interfere with crewmembers or rapid egress of occupants in an
emergency.
J Observer O2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J Observer Audio Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
J Headset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Check Condition
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
If seat unoccupied, headset may be stowed. If seat will be occupied,

install headset for use by observer.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-4
6.3
6.3.1
SAFETY & POWER ON CHECKLIST

GENERAL
This checklist safely configures the aircraft for application of electrical
power and/or air conditioning.
6.3.1.1
Who
Normally accomplished by the first pilot arriving at the aircraft.
6.3.1.2
When
Arriving at an aircraft with no electrical power.
6.3.2
FLOW PATTERNS
This is a read and do checklist with no established flows. Each item is
read and accomplished silently.
6.3.3
SAFETY & POWER ON EXPANDED CHECKLIST
1. GND SVC Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NOT IN USE

Ensure the GND SVC (Ground Service) Bus on the GSU Panel (at the
top of the galley wall, behind the opened flight deck door) is not in use
(i.e., the IN USE light is not illuminated).
2. Maintenance Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

If not already accomplished as part of the Interior Flight Deck Inspection,
verify all maintenance items are appropriate and all MEL/CDLs
considered cleared. Circuit breakers are either in (closed) or out
(collared) as appropriate. Verify all applicable safety items are on board.
3. GPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUT
To read the battery voltage, the GPU pushbutton must be disconnected
(pushed OUT).
4. APU GEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
5. BATT 1 & BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
6. FUEL DC PUMP & AC PUMPS 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
7. EMER LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
8. WINDSHIELD WIPERs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
9. HYDRAULIC SYS 1, 2, & 3B ELEC PUMPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO
10. HYDRAULIC SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
11. Landing Gear Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DN
12. POWERPLANT START/STOP 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP
13. Speed Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLOSE
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-5
14. Thrust Levers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE

15. BATT 1 & BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON/AUTO
Ensure airplane is not moved until IESS is initialized. Initialization occurs
within 90 seconds after power-up.
16. Displays 2 & 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AVAILABLE

Verify that only displays 2 and 3 are available. if more than displays 2
and 3 are available, the airplane must not be dispatched.
17. EICAS Messages . . . . NONE ANNUNCIATED FIRST 5 SECONDS

18. BATT 1 & BATT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 vDC MIN
Check the battery voltages on
the MFD Status page.
Step
Each battery voltage must

be at least 22.5 volts. DO
NOT turn off either battery
to check the remaining battery voltage.
Flight Crewmember
One or both battery voltage levels is less than 22.5 volts-
Determine lowest battery voltage If....
Then....
Battery voltage is
between 21.0 and 22.5
volts...
Recharge the batteries prior to

takeoff, through any AC source
(including engines during taxi)
for:
- Battery Temp => -10C 40mins.
- Battery Temp < -10C 50 mins
Battery voltage is below

21.0 volts...
Call maintenance.
DO NOT depart.
19. SLAT/Flap Lever . . . . . . . . AGREES WITH SURFACE POSITION

Ensure the surface area is clear prior to moving any flight control
surfaces.
121.309(c)
20. FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

Perform Originating/Receiving FIRE EXTINGUISHER flow item.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-6
21. Electrical Power/Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESTABLISH

A.
To avoid battery depletion, establish AC electrical power as soon as

possible.
B.
If the Display Units 2 and/or 4 are configured as PFDs, set the

respective reversionary panel selector knob to MFD then to AUTO.
After approximately 8 seconds, the affected display configuration will
return to the MFD display.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
6.4
PAGE 6-7
ESTABLISHING ELECTRICAL POWER/AIR

CONDITIONING
6.4.1
GENERAL
With all of the variables to consider (i.e., ground equipment, aircraft
equipment, inside the aircraft temperature, outside air temperature,
ground time, departure time, etc.), use the following priorities when
applying electrical power and/or air conditioning.
6.4.2
6.4.3
ELECTRICAL
A.
Preferred priority is to utilize ground power whenever available to

reduce APU cycles.
B.
To allow the flight controls built in test to complete, wait three (3)
minutes after power up to turn any hydraulic pump on.
C.
Ensure the aircraft is not moved before the IESS is initialized
GROUND POWER
Step
1
Flight Crewmember
If...
Then...
NOTE
AVAIL light is illuminated
Step
OPS-07A
If the source of AC power is lost,

power down the airplane utilizing the
Securing Checklist and the perform
the power up procedure utilizing the
Safety & Power On Checklist.
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU)

The following procedure is a
flow since it is accomplished
whenever necessary
throughout the course of a
normal flight.
NOTE
6.4.4
GPU Switch ....................... Push IN
BATT 1 must be ON and BATT 2 must

be in the AUTO for the APU to start.
Flight Crewmember
EMER STOP Button ....................................................Guarded
APU CONTROL MASTER ........................ ON, START then release
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-8
6.4.5
AIR CONDITIONING
To avoid cabin air contamination, do not operate air

conditioning packs using the
ground pneumatic start cart.
NOTE
Preferred priority is to utilize

ground air whenever available
to reduce APU cycles. When
necessary, start the APU to
ensure passenger comfort.
6.4.6
Comfortable outside air temperatures may not require air conditioning to be applied to the aircraft.
FLY BY WIRE POWER UP BUILT-IN TEST (PBIT)

A.
The FBW PBIT test consists of two different tests:

An Electrical PBIT test which lasts three (3)minutes
An Hydraulic PBIT test which lasts one (1) minute
B.
A FLT CTRL BIT EXPIRED EICAS message is displayed if the last

successful PBIT was more that 20 hours old while the aircraft is on
the ground and the EICAS messages are no longer inhibited.
C.
The message will continue being displayed on the EICAS until a

new electrical and hydraulic PBIT test is successfully completed.
D.
The elapsed time since a successful electrical and hydraulic PBIT is

displayed on the FLT CTRL Synoptic page.
E.
If the FLT CTRL BIT EXPIRED EICAS message is displayed, or the

elapsed time since the last PBIT is low, perform the electrical and/or
hydraulic PBIT test.
F.
If the FLT CTRL BIT EXPIRED EICAS message remains displayed

after accomplishing the Hydraulic PBIT, the flightcrew must, wait one
(1) minute, and then
6.4.6.1
Electrical PBIT
A.
The electrical PBIT provides detection of out-of-tolerance conditions

and failures in the FCMs, P-ACEs and S-ACEs.
B.
The electrical PBIT is automatically performed during power up after

the airplane is powered by any AC source.
C.
The electrical PBIT test takes approximately three (3) minutes to

complete and can be observed by the flightcrew on the FLT CTRL
synoptic page on the MFD.
D.
After the three (3) minute test is complete, the hydraulic PBIT test
must also be performed to complete a valid Fly By Wire PBIT test.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
E.
PAGE 6-9
An electrical PBIT test will be interrupted if

Any hydraulic pump is running.
The Flight Control Mode Panel switches are cycled.
The AC power supply is interrupted.
F.
To perform an Electrical PBIT

Step
Flight Crewmember
Perform an Electrical PBIT test
6.4.6.2
Power down the aircraft using the Securing Checklist
Wait a minimum of one (1) minute.
Perform the power up procedure utilizing the Safety & Power On

Checklist.
Wait 3 minutes for the Electrical PBIT to run.
Perform a Hydraulic PBIT if required.
Hydraulic PBIT
A.
The Hydraulic PBIT provides functional testing of the flight control

actuators.
B.
The Hydraulic PBIT is performed when all three (3) hydraulic

systems are pressurized for at least one minute.
C.
The Hydraulic PBIT test will be interrupted if any flight control

surface is moved while the test is running.
D.
To perform a Hydraulic PBIT

Step
Flight Crewmember
Perform an Hydraulic PBIT test
Do not move any flight control surface.
Confirm STEER OFF EICAS message is illuminated.

If....
STEER OFF EICAS message is not illuminated...
STEER OFF EICAS message is illuminated...
OPS-07A
Then....
Press the Steering Disengage Switch
on the control yoke.
Proceed to Step 2.
Proceed to Step 3.
Turn the electrical hydraulic pumps 1,2 and 3A to ON.
Wait 60 seconds.
At this point, the FLT CTRL BIT EXPIRED EICAS message should
extinguish.
Turn the electrical hydraulic pumps 1,2 and 3A to OFF if they are
no longer needed.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-10
6.5
6.5.1
EXTERIOR INSPECTION
GENERAL
The exterior inspection ensures the overall condition of the aircraft and
its visible components and equipment are airworthy condition and safe
for flight.
6.5.1.1
Who
Normally accomplished by the first officer.
6.5.1.2
When
This inspection is accomplished prior to each flight.
Before beginning the inspection, review the Maintenance Log to
determine the maintenance status and, if electrical power is not
established; complete the Safety & Power On Checklist.
6.5.1.3
Check
The word Check is used throughout this inspection to describe a visual
examination to detect obvious unsatisfactory conditions/discrepancies.
6.5.1.4
Conditions/Discrepancies
Verify the aircraft is acceptable for flight. Even though not noted
individually, the aircraft and its visible components must be checked for
the following:
proximate area is free of potential foreign object damage (FOD)
items
passenger walkway and boarding stairs are safe and clear
flight control surfaces are unobstructed and free from
contamination
all vents, ports, intakes, and exhausts are unobstructed
tire condition and pressure are acceptable
all covers, plugs, picket/mooring lines removed
pay particular attention to any evidence of fluid leaks from
components, drains, panels, aircraft skin, and in ground vicinity
condition of skin (visible damage) on radome section, fuselage,
wings, nacelles, pylons, and empennage
all access panels and doors not actually involved in maintenance
are secured
pitot static probes for evidence of freezing, severe discoloration,
condition, and security
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
6.5.1.5
PAGE 6-11
Procedures
Step
Flight Crewmember
Prior to commencing the inspection:
Review the Maintenance logbook per FOM
Complete the Safety & Power On Checklist, if electrical power is

not established
Turn on the RED BCN and NAV lights
Initialize both the Captain and First Officer FMS positions
Ensure Parking Brake is set and EMERG/PRKG BRAKE light on.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-12
6.5.2
EXTERIOR INSPECTION ROUTE

Start at the Forward Entry Door and proceed in the direction indicated in
the external route below, and terminate at the bottom of the passenger
stair unit or Jet Bridge.
6.5.3
FLOW PATTERN
6.5.3.1
Nose Section
J
J
J
J
J
6.5.3.2
External Power Receptacle - - - - - - - - - - - CHECK

Smart Probes/TAT Sensors/Ice Detectors - - - - CHECK
Windshield Wipers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CHECK
Radome - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CHECK
Forward Avionics Compartment - - - - - - - SECURED
Nosewheel and Gear
J Nose Gear- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Check if the nose wheel position indication mark is within the nose
wheel position indication scale limits.
J
J
J
J
Wheels and Tires - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Nose Gear Up Lock Hook - - - - - - - - - - - Unlocked
Nose Gear Strut/Wheel Well/Doors - - - - - - - - - Check
Ground Locking Pin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Remove
Remove locking pin if installed.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-13
J Landing and Taxi Lights - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

J Nose Gear Strut/Wheel Well/Doors- - - - - - - - - Check
6.5.3.3
Right Forward Fuselage
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
6.5.3.4
RAT Safety Lock Pin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Removed

Oxygen Discharge Indicator - - - - - - - - - Green DISC
Fwd Cargo Door - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Inspection Light - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Landing Lights - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Antennas - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Red Beacon Light - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Ram Air Inlets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear
Air Inlets and Outlets- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear
Right Wing
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Wing Leading Edges- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Pylon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Right Engine - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Thrust Reverser Cowl - - - - - - - Flushed with Nacelle
Refueling Compartment Door - - - - - - - - - - Secured
Access Panels- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Secured
Magnetic Level Indicators - - - - - - - - - - -Pushed IN
Pressure Relief Valve - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Fuel Tank Vent - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear
Navigation and Strobe Lights- - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Static Dischargers - - - - - - - - - - Number and Check
Ensure three (3) on the aileron and six (6) on the winglet.
J Flight Control Surfaces and Fairings - - - - - - - - Check

6.5.3.5
Right Main Gear
J
J
J
J
J
Right Main Gear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Right Main Gear Up Lock Hook - - - - - - - - Unlocked
Right Gear Strut/Wheel Wells - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Right Ground Locking Pin - - - - - - - - - - - - Remove
J Brake Wear Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-14
6.5.3.6
Tail Cone
J
J
J
J
J
J
Access Doors and Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - Secured
J
J
J
J
APU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Aft Cargo Door- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Antennas - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Battery Air Outlet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear
Flight Control Surfaces- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Static Dischargers - - - - - - - - - - Number and Check
Ensure four (4) on the rudder and four (4) on each elevator.
6.5.3.7
External Power Receptacle - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Potable Water Service Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Pressurization Static Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear
Left Main Gear
J
J
J
J
J
Left Main Gear- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Left Main Gear Up Lock Hook - - - - - - - - - Unlocked
Left Gear Strut/Wheel Wells - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Left Ground Locking Pin - - - - - - - - - - - - - Remove
J Brake Wear Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.5.3.8
Left Wing
J Flight Control Surfaces and Fairings - - - - - - - - Check

J Static Dischargers - - - - - - - - - - Number and Check
Ensure three (3) on the aileron and six (6) on the winglet.
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Navigation and Strobe Lights - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Fuel Tank Vent- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear
Pressure Relief Valve - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Magnetic Level Indicators - - - - - - - - - - -Pushed IN
Access Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Secured
Thrust Reverser Cowl - - - - - - - Flushed with Nacelle
Left Engine - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Check engine for leaks and obstructions in the air inlets.
J Left Pylon - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

J Wing Leading Edges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
6.5.3.9
PAGE 6-15
Left Forward Fuselage
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Air Conditioning Connection Access Door - - - - - Check

Air Inlets and Outlets- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear
Ram Air Inlets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear
Red Beacon Light - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Antennas - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Landing Lights - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Inspection Light - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-16
6.6
[RESERVED]
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
SOP-07-04, PAGE 1 OF 10
SOP BULLETIN
SOP-07-04
Effective Date: August 11, 2007
To: All SOP Holders
From: Kevin Cline, Chief Pilot
Subject: Interior Cabin Inspection
Directions:
future revision.
2) Insert this bulletin before page 6-17 in the SOP.
Manual.
Background: Due to the number of aircraft configuration in the
Republic Airlines fleet, the SOP is being updated with all
aircraft interior cabin inspection configurations.
6.7
6.7.1
INTERIOR CABIN INSPECTION

GENERAL
The interior cabin inspection ensures cabin emergency equipment is on
board and operational and the cabin is ready for departure.
6.7.1.1
Who
Normally accomplished by the flight attendants; or on flights without flight
attendants, a flight deck crew member.
6.7.1.2
When
This inspection is accomplished on the first flight of the day and
subsequent flights when flight crew changes occur.
6.7.2
FLOW PATTERN
A "front" to "back" flow pattern from the galley to the lavatory. When
proceeding, ensure the overhead bins are closed and locked.
SOP-07-04, PAGE 2 OF 10
6.7.3
ERJ-170 - 70 SEAT AIRCRAFT
6.7.3.1
Left Overhead Bin - Row 1
J Grab And Go Kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.7.3.2
Forward Flight Attendant Jumpseat
J Life Vest (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check in package

J Flashlight (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LED Steady
J Manual Release Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - On board
6.7.3.3
Forward Lavatory
J Smoke Detector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Operational

J Trash Flap - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Springs Closed
6.7.3.4
Forward Galley
J
J
J
J
6.7.3.5
Forward Entry Door (1L) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

Forward Service Door (1R)- - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Trash Flap - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Springs Closed
Wardrobe Closet
J
J
J
J
J
6.7.3.6
Galley Carts and Containers - - - - - - Closed & latched
First Aid Kit (1)- - - - - - - - - - - - - -Sealed & secure

PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Halon Fire Extinguisher (2)- - - Pressure in green, pin installed
Onboard Wheelchair - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Portable O2 Cylinder & Mask - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J EEMK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.3.7
J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.7.3.8
Aft Left Doghouse
J Halon Fire Extinguisher (1)- - - - Pressure in green, pin installed

J Portable O2 Cylinder & Mask - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.3.9
J First Aid Kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Sealed & secure
SOP-07-04, PAGE 3 OF 10
6.7.3.10
Aft Flight Attendant Jumpseat

6.7.3.11
Aft Lavatory

6.7.3.12
Aft Galley
J
J
J
J
6.7.3.13

Aft Entry Door (2L)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Aft Service Door (2R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J AED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.3.14
Aft Right Doghouse
J Megaphone (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

J Halon Fire Extinguisher (1) - - - Pressure in green, pin installed
6.7.3.15
J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.7.4
6.7.4.1


6.7.4.2

6.7.4.3
Forward Lavatory

SOP-07-04, PAGE 4 OF 10
6.7.4.4
Forward Galley
J
J
J
J
6.7.4.5

Wardrobe Closet
J
J
J
J
J
6.7.4.6

PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Halon Fire Extinguisher (2)- - - - Pressure in green, pin installed
Onboard Wheelchair - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J EEMK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.4.7
J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.7.4.8
Aft Left Doghouse

6.7.4.9

6.7.4.10

6.7.4.11
Aft Lavatory

SOP-07-04, PAGE 5 OF 10
6.7.4.12
Aft Galley
J
J
J
J
6.7.4.13

J AED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.4.14
Aft Right Doghouse

6.7.4.15
J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.7.5
ERJ-170 - 76 SEAT AIRCRAFT (OVER WATER)
6.7.5.1

6.7.5.2

6.7.5.3
Forward Lavatory

6.7.5.4
Forward Galley
J
J
J
J

SOP-07-04, PAGE 6 OF 10
6.7.5.5
Closet
J
J
J
J
6.7.5.6

PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Halon Fire Extinguisher (2)- - - - Pressure in green, pin installed
J EEMK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J AED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.5.7
Aft Left Doghouse

6.7.5.8

J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.5.9

6.7.5.10
Aft Lavatory

6.7.5.11
Aft Galley
J
J
J
J
J
6.7.5.12

Onboard Wheelchair (behind galley carts) - - - - - Check

J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
SOP-07-04, PAGE 7 OF 10
6.7.5.13
Aft Right Doghouse

6.7.6
ERJ-170 - 76 SEAT AIRCRAFT (NON-OVER WATER)
6.7.6.1

6.7.6.2

6.7.6.3
Forward Lavatory

6.7.6.4
Forward Galley
J
J
J
J
6.7.6.5

J
J
J
J
6.7.6.6
First Aid Kit (1)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Sealed & secure

PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Halon Fire Extinguisher (2) - - - Pressure in green, pin installed
J EEMK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J AED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.6.7
Aft Left Doghouse
J First Aid Kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Sealed & secure
SOP-07-04, PAGE 8 OF 10
6.7.6.8

J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.6.9

6.7.6.10
Aft Lavatory

6.7.6.11
Aft Galley
J
J
J
J
J
6.7.6.12


J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.6.13
Aft Right Doghouse

6.7.7
6.7.7.1


6.7.7.2

SOP-07-04, PAGE 9 OF 10
6.7.7.3
Forward Lavatory

6.7.7.4
Forward Galley
J
J
J
J
6.7.7.5

J
J
J
J
6.7.7.6
First Aid Kit (1)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Sealed & secure

PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Halon Fire Extinguisher (2) - - - Pressure in green, pin installed
J EEMK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J AED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.7.7
Aft Left Doghouse

J First Aid Kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Sealed & secure
6.7.7.8

J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.7.9

6.7.7.10
Aft Lavatory

SOP-07-04, PAGE 10 OF 10
6.7.7.11
Aft Galley
J
J
J
J
J
6.7.7.12


J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Aft Right Doghouse

ERJ-170 STANDARD
6.7
6.7.1
PAGE 6-17
INTERIOR CABIN INSPECTION

GENERAL
The interior cabin inspection ensures cabin emergency equipment is on
board and operational and the cabin is ready for departure.
6.7.1.1
Who
Normally accomplished by the flight attendants; or on flights without flight
attendants, a flight deck crew member.
6.7.1.2
When
This inspection is accomplished on the first flight of the day and
subsequent flights when flight crew changes occur.
6.7.2
FLOW PATTERN
A front to back flow pattern from the galley to the lavatory. When
proceeding ensure the overhead bins are closed and locked.
6.7.2.1
Forward Galley
J Galley Doors - - - - - - - - - - - - - Closed & latched

J Forward Entry Door - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J Forward Service Door - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.2.2
Forward Lavatory

6.7.2.3

6.7.2.4

6.7.2.5
Forward Emergency Equipment Compartment
J First Aid Kit (1)- - - - - - - - - - - - - -Sealed & secure

J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J Halon Fire
121.337(c)
121.337(c)(2)
121.309(c)
Extinguisher (2) - - - - - Pressure in green, pin installed
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-18
6.7.2.6
Wardrobe Closet
J Onboard Wheelchair - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

J Portable O2 Cylinder & Mask - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.2.7
121.337(c)
121.337(c)(1)(i)
Aft Galley
J Galley Doors - - - - - - - - - - - - - Closed & latched

J Aft Entry Door - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
J Aft Service Door - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.2.8
J EEMK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.2.9
Aft Left Doghouse
J Halon Fire
121.309(c)

J Portable O2 Cylinder & Mask - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.2.10
Aft Left Bulkhead Wallmounted
J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.7.2.11
121.337(c)
121.337(c)(1)(i)
121.337(c)
121.337(c)(2)

6.7.2.12
Aft Right Doghouse

J Halon Fire
121.309(c)

6.7.2.13
Aft Right Bulkhead Wallmounted
J PBE (1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

6.7.2.14
121.337(c)
121.337(c)(2)
J AED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
6.7.2.15
Aft Lavatory
121.308(a)

OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
6.8
PAGE 6-19
ORIGINATING/RECEIVING CHECKLIST
6.8.1
GENERAL
This checklist ensures all equipment is operating properly and set up for
engine start.
6.8.1.1
Who
Initiated by the captain; read by the first officer.
6.8.1.2
When
A.
The checklist shall be performed if any of the following conditions

are occur
First flight of the day
Change in PIC
Aircraft has been left unattended, or
Maintenance has been performed on the aircraft
B.
6.8.2
MCDU
The checklist should be completed prior to passenger boarding and

early enough to ensure maintenance has sufficient time to correct
any irregularities.
CAPTAINS FLOW PATTERN
COMPASS
F
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-20
6.8.2.1
Captains Abbreviated Flow
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
MCDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
DVDR Control Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Tested
Electrical Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Cockpit Lights Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - As Required
Fuel Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Passenger Signs Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
121.310(d)(2)
Fire Extinguisher Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

APU Control Panel- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Windshield Wipers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Off
External Lights Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - As Required
Hydraulic Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Pressurization Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Windshield Heating - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
Ice Protection Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Air Conditioning/Pneumatic Panel - - - - - - - - - - Set
Passenger Oxygen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Standby Compass - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
Guidance Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Display Controller Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Glareshield Light Control Panel - - - - - - - As Required
Reversionary Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
MFD- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
IESS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked & Set
GND PROX TERR INHIB - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT
121.354(c)(1)
Parking Brake Light - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Clock - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Landing Gear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DN
ELT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Arm
GND PROX G/S INHIB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT
LG WRN INHIB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
121.354(c)(1)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
121.354(c)(1)
6.8.2.2
PAGE 6-21
Flight Control Mode Panel - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

Stall Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Powerplant Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
EICAS FULL- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT
Speed Brake Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
Thrust Levers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IDLE
RAT Manual Deploy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Stowed
Parking Brake - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set or OFF
Audio Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set for O2 Test
O2 & Interphone - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Flashlight - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LED Steady
Audio Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
GND PROX FLAP OVRD - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
SLAT / FLAP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
Trim Panel- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
COCKPIT DOOR CONTROL - - - - - - - - - Checked
ELEVATOR DISCONNECT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
AILERON DISCONNECT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
Captains Expanded Flow
POS INIT
Initialize position on
both pilots FMSs if not
previously done.
121.359(a)
NOTE
J MCDU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
If a VERIFY POSITION message
appears after initializing, both pilots
will verify the correct position prior
to any further FMS POS INIT entries.
DVDR
On the MCDU, do the following:
NOTE
- MENU Function Key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select

- MISC (1L) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- DVDR (5R) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
Ensure recording ON (green) is
active. Use the 1L key to toggle from
ON to OFF and vice versa.
The DVDR must be operated continuously from start of the use of the
Before Start Checklist to completion
of the Parking Checklist.
Electronic CBs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-22
- On the MCDU, do the following:
NOTE
CB Function Key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
Ensure agreement with maintenance

status.
J DVDR CONTROL PANEL - - - - - - - - - - - - Tested

J ELECTRIC AC POWER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
IDG 1 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
IDG 2 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
GPU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
- If AVAIL light is illuminated and ground power usage appropriate...

GPU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
AC BUS TIES Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
APU GEN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
J ELECTRIC DC POWER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

TRU 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
TRU ESS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
TRU 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
BATT 1 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON
DC BUS TIES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
BATT 2 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
J COCKPIT LIGHTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required

MAIN PNL, OVHD PNL & PEDESTAL Knobs - - - - - - As required
ANNUCIATORS TEST Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press
- Pushbutton Striped Bars & Caption Indications - - Check

DOME - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
J FUEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
XFEED Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
DC PUMP Selector- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
AC PUMP 1 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
AC PUMP 2 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
J PASSENGER SIGNS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

EMER LT Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
- EMER LT Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
- Ensure EMER LT ON and EMER LT NOT ARMED EICAS messages
annunciate.
- EMER LT Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ARMED

NO ELEC DEVICES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
121.310(d)(2)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-23
FSTN BELTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF

STERILE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
J FIRE EXTINGUISHER - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

Prior to performing the FIRE Panel Test ensure that there are no fire
detection/extinguishing system messages displayed on the EICAS.
If a FIRE EXTINGUISHER Check ___
done in conjunction with the Safety &
Power On Checklist...
Then this check is considered...
was
complete and not done during the Originating/Receiving Checklist.
was not
not accomplished and must be done

during the Originating/Receiving Checklist.
# 1 & # 2 EXTG Handles - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Stowed

CARGO SMOKE FWD/AFT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
APU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
APU CONTROL EMER STOP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
Fire Detection TEST Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press & Hold
Observe the following:
- Lights:
- # 1 Engine Fire Extinguishing handle
- # 2 Engine Fire Extinguishing handle
- FIRE EXTINGUISHER CARGO SMOKE FWD pushbutton
- FIRE EXTINGUISHER CARGO SMOKE AFT pushbutton
- FIRE EXTINGUISHER APU pushbutton
- APU CONTROL EMER STOP pushbutton (upper half)
- captain and first officer master WARN lights (flashing)
- EICAS messages:
- ENG 1 FIRE
- ENG 2 FIRE
- APU FIRE
- CARGO FWD SMOKE
- CARGO AFT SMOKE
- left and right FIRE warning icon on ITT EICAS indicators
- Aural warnings:
- Continuous bell, silence by pressing either master WARN lights
J APU CONTROL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

J WINDSHIELD WIPER 1 & 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
J EXTERNAL LIGHTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
NAV - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON
STROBE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-24
RED BCN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF

LOGO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
- Day time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF

- Night time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
- During sunset to sunrise and during low visibility procedures.
TAXI NOSE & SIDE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
INSP- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
LANDING LEFT/NOSE/RIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
J HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
SYS 1 ENG PUMP SHUTOFF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
PTU Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
SYS 2 ENG PUMP SHUTOFF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
SYS 1 ELEC PUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
SYS 3 ELEC PUMP B - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
J PRESSURIZATION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
-
CABIN ALT Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STOP

MODE Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
DUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
LFE Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STOP
J WINDSHIELD HEATING 1 & 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN

J ICE PROTECTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
ENGINE 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
WING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
ENGINE 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
MODE Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
TEST Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
- The TEST function is a maintenance procedure.
J AIR COND / PNEUMATIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

CKPT Knob - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
RECIRC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
PAX CABIN Knob - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
PACK 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
PACK 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
XBLEED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
BLEED 1- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
APU BLEED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
BLEED 2- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
J PASSENGER OXYGEN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

MASK DEPLOY Selector
Original 29AUG2005
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-25
MASK DEPLOYED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - No Light
J Standby Compass - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

Cross check heading against pilot and copilot HSIs on the PFD and
MFD.
- Heading information may be inaccurate due to ground equipment

magnetic disturbance at the gate.
J Guidance Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

- ALT SEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Ft. only
- SPEED- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAN
- SRC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PF
J Display Controller Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

BARO SET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN (inches Hg.)
- Set current station pressure by rotating the selector and verify on

PFD that FL<###> is not displayed in the altitude select window.
HSI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Compass or Arc
BRG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - On or Off
J GLARESHIELD Lights Control Panel - - - - - As required

J REVERSIONARY PANEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
DISPLAYS Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
SENSORS Selectors (ADS/IRS) - - - - - - - - - - - - -As required
J PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Airspeed Tape - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Speeds not shown
EADI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Level & flag-free
Altitude Tape- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Within limits
VSI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
EHSI and compass - - - - - - - - - - - No flags & same headings
J MFD- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Hydraulic Synoptic page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
- Verify hydraulic fluid quantity and pressure.

Status page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
NOTE
- Verify:
- Hydraulic brake accumulator pressures
- Oil quantities
- Oxygen quantity
OPS-07A
Oxygen supply for flight compartment crew must comply with minimum requirements (see QRH OPS
DATA pages).
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-26
J IESS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked & Set

Attitude - - - - - - - - - - - - Compare with PFD attitude indicators
Altimeter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set if known
- Compare readout with the PFD altitude tapes

ALT or SPD Flags - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - None displayed
VSI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -0
J GND PROX TERR INHIB - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT

J EMERG/PRKG BRAKE Light - - - - - - - - - Checked
ON light indicates brakes are applied.
J EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Verify all displayed EICAS messages are normal for the current
operational aircraft configuration.
J Clock - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
GPS/INT/SET Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - GPS
- If the clock displays dashes (-- -- --), adjust as follows:

GPS/INT/SET Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SET
- Enter the correct time

- GPS/INT/SET Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INT
J Landing Gear Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DN

J ELT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ARM
Testing is a maintenance function.
J GRD PROX GS INHIB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT

J LG WRN INHIB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
J FLIGHT CONTROLS MODE - - - - - - - - - - Checked
ELEVATORS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
RUDDER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
SPOILERS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
J STALL WARNING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

SHAKER 1 CUTOUT- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT
SHAKER 2 CUTOUT- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT
J POWERPLANT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
START/STOP 1 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STOP
START/STOP 2 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STOP
IGNITION 1 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
IGNITION 2 Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
J EICAS FULL- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT

J Speed Brake Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CLOSE
J Thrust Levers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IDLE
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-27
J RAT MANUAL DEPLOY Handle - - - - - - - - - Stowed

Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Flush
J PARKING BRAKE Handle - - - - - - - - - - Set or OFF

J Audio Control Panel (ACP)- - - - - - - - Set for O2 Test
MIC Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
SPKR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select (light ON)
VOL Knob - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -As required
J O2 & Interphone - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
Control Wheel Com Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -MIC HOT

Regulator Control Knob - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 100%
TEST/RESET Button- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press and hold
- Indicator - - - - - - - - - - - Short illumination (or blink)

- Headset - - - - - - - - - - - - Audible pressure sound
- Indicator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT
- Once the mask fully pressurizes, the indicator must go OUT
showing the system is leak free.
- TEST/RESET Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Release

Regulator Control Knob - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EMER
TEST/RESET Button- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press and hold
Indicator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Continuously showing
- Indicates oxygen flow.

TEST/RESET Button- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Release
J Flashlight - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LED Steady

J Audio Control Panel (ACP)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
- MIC Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
- SPKR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - De-select (light OUT)
J GND PROX FLAP OVRD - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded

J SLAT / FLAP Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
J TRIM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
SYS 1 CUTOUT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
SYS 2 CUTOUT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-28
Verify Roll, Yaw and
Pitch (Main and Backup)
trims are operating
properly both directions.
Verify systems 3-second
protection is working
properly. Adjust Yaw and
Roll trim to the neutral
position and Pitch trim to
the green band.
If only one half of a trim

switch is erroneously actuated for more than 7 seconds, that switch will be
automatically deactivated, an
aural warning Trim will be
activated for 6 seconds and
an advisory EICAS message
will be observed requiring
maintenance action to clear.
J COCKPIT DOOR CONTROL - - - - - - - - - Checked

LOCK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Guarded
- This check is accomplished on the first flight of the day. (Sec 2.4)
J ELEVATOR DISCONNECT - - - - - - - IN & NO EICAS

J AILERON DISCONNECT - - - - - - - - IN & NO EICAS
6.8.3
FIRST OFFICERS FLOW PATTERN
S
MCDU
Alt
Gear
Ext. F
6.8.3.1
O2
Mask
First Officers Abbreviated Flow
J
J
J
J
J
MCDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - POS INIT

Display Controller Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Glareshield Light Control Panel - - - - - - - As required
Reversionary Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
6.8.3.2
PAGE 6-29
PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Audio Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set for O2 Test
O2 & Interphone - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Flashlight - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LED Steady
Audio Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Alt Gear Extension- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
First Officers Expanded Flow
Initialize position on
both pilots FMSs if not
previously done.
NOTE
J MCDU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - POS INIT

If a VERIFY POSITION message
appears after initializing, both pilots
will verify the correct position prior
to any further FMS POS INIT entries.

SRC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PF
SPEED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAN
ALT SEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Ft. only
J Display Controller Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

BARO SET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN (inches Hg.)
- Set current station pressure by rotating the selector and verify on

PFD that FL<###> is not displayed in the altitude select window.
HSI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Compass or Arc
BRG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - On or Off
J GLARESHIELD LIGHTS CONTROL PANEL - As required

J REVERSIONARY PANEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
DISPLAYS Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
SENSORS (ADS/IRS) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -As required
J PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Airspeed Tape - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Speeds not shown
EADI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Level & flag-free
Altitude Tape- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Within limits
VSI - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
EHSI and compass - - - - - - - - - - - No flags & same headings
J MFD- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
- Verify hydraulic fluid quantity and pressure.

OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 6-30
NOTE
- Verify:
- Hydraulic brake accumulator pressures
- Oil quantities
- Oxygen quantity
Oxygen supply for flight compartment crew must comply with minimum requirements (see QRH OPS
DATA pages).
J Audio Control
Panel (ACP)Set for O2 Test
MIC Button- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
SPKR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select (light ON)
VOL Knob - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
J O2 & Interphone - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

Control Wheel Com Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MIC HOT
TEST/RESET Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press and hold
Indicator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Short illumination (or blink)
Headset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Audible pressure sound
Indicator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUT
- Once the mask fully pressurizes, the indicator must go OUT showing
the system is leak free.
TEST/RESET Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Release
Regulator Control Knob - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EMER
TEST/RESET Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press and hold
Indicator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Continuously showing
- Indicates oxygen flow.

TEST/RESET Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Release
J Flashlight - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LED Steady

J Audio Control Panel (ACP) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
MIC Button- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
SPKR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - De-select (light OUT)
J Alternate Gear Extension Compartment - - - - Checked

Alternate Gear Extension Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - Full down
Electrical Override Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NORMAL
- Open the door to ensure switch position.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
6.8.4
PAGE 6-31
ORIGINATING/RECEIVING CHECKLIST
This is a Do-Verify checklist.
1. Preflight Inspections . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE

Verifies the appropriate exterior/interior preflight inspections are
complete.
2. Logbook, Forms, & Manuals . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

Refer to the FOM, Forms and Manuals Required for the list of items
required to be onboard the aircraft.
3. QRH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLED

The QRH must be within reach, exposed, and readily accessible.
4. Gear/RAT Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .STOWED

Verifies the landing gear and RAT safety pins are stowed (done during
the Preflight - Interior Flight Deck Inspection).
5. CB Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

Verifies the CB panels are checked (done during the Preflight - Interior
Flight Deck Inspection).
6. Panel Prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE

Verifies the captain and first officer Panel Prep flow items are completed.
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
7. O2 & Interphone . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

8. Receiving Checklist. . . . . . . . . . [FO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
End of Chapter
OPS-07A
PAGE 6-32
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 7-1
Chapter 7: Start
7.1 Before Start ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
7.1.7
7.1.8
7.1.9
7.1.10
7.1.11
7.1.12
7.1.13
7.1.14
7.1.15
7.1.16
7.1.17
7.1.18
20 Minutes Prior to Departure & Fueling Complete .............................. 7-1

Fuel ........................................................................................................ 7-1
ACARS ................................................................................................... 7-1
ATC Clearance ....................................................................................... 7-1
Initial Altitude ......................................................................................... 7-1
Transponder ............................................................................................ 7-1
Disconnecting Power .............................................................................. 7-1
FMS Routing ........................................................................................... 7-1
Paperwork Review .................................................................................. 7-2
Communication/Navigation Frequencies & Courses ............................. 7-2
Guidance Panel ....................................................................................... 7-2
Jumpseat .................................................................................................. 7-2
Welcome Aboard Announcement ........................................................... 7-2
Gate Departure ........................................................................................ 7-2
Early Departures ..................................................................................... 7-2
Weight and Balance (W & B) ................................................................. 7-2
Cabin Ready Notification ....................................................................... 7-3
Pushback or Start Clearance ................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Before Start Checklist (To the Line) ......................................................... 7-4

7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.4
General .................................................................................................... 7-4

Who ......................................................................................................... 7-4
When ....................................................................................................... 7-4
Captains Flow Pattern (To the line) ....................................................... 7-4
7.2.4.1
7.2.4.2
7.2.5
Captains Abbreviated Flow (To the Line) .................................................. 7-4

Captains Expanded Flow (To the Line) ....................................................... 7-5
First Officers Flow Pattern (To the Line) ............................................ 7-7

7.2.5.1
7.2.5.2
First Officers Abbreviated Flow (To the Line) ........................................... 7-7

First Officers Expanded Flow (To the Line) ............................................... 7-7
7.3 Before Start Checklist (To the Line) ......................................................... 7-8

7.4 Weight & Balance (W & B) .................................................................... 7-10
7.4.1
7.4.2
Captains Expanded Flow .................................................................... 7-10

First Officers Expanded Flow ............................................................. 7-10
7.5 Before Start Checklist (Below the Line) ................................................. 7-11

7.5.1
Captains Flow Pattern (Below the Line)

7.5.1.1
7.5.1.2
7.5.2
.......................................... 7-11
Captains Abbreviated Flow (Below the Line) ........................................... 7-11

Captains Expanded Flow (Below the Line) ............................................... 7-11
First Officers Flow Pattern (Below the Line) ..................................... 7-12

7.5.2.1
7.5.2.2
First Officers Abbreviated Flow (Below the Line) ................................... 7-12

First Officers Expanded Flow (Below the Line) ....................................... 7-12
7.6 Before Start Checklist (Below the Line) ................................................. 7-13

7.7 Pushback/Powerback Procedures ............................................................ 7-14
7.7.1
7.7.2
Pushback ............................................................................................... 7-14

Powerback ............................................................................................. 7-14
7.8 Engine Start Procedure ............................................................................ 7-14

OPS-07A
PAGE TOC 7-2

7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
7.8.4
7.8.5
ERJ-170 STANDARD
General .................................................................................................. 7-14

Procedure .............................................................................................. 7-14
Stable Engine Indications ..................................................................... 7-15
Aborted Engine Start ............................................................................ 7-15
Engine Warm-Up .................................................................................. 7-15
7.9 Delayed Engine Start Procedure .............................................................. 7-15

7.10 Supplemental Start Procedures .............................................................. 7-15
7.10.1
7.10.2
7.10.3
7.10.4
7.10.5
7.10.6
Definition .............................................................................................. 7-15

Procedure .............................................................................................. 7-15
External Air Start .................................................................................. 7-16
Crossbleed Start ................................................................................... 7-16
[RESERVED] ....................................................................................... 7-17
Manual Starter Valve Operation Engine Start ...................................... 7-17
7.11 Extended Ground Delay ........................................................................ 7-17

7.12 After Start Checklist .............................................................................. 7-18
7.12.1
7.12.2
7.12.3
7.12.4
7.12.5
General .................................................................................................. 7-18

Who ....................................................................................................... 7-18
When ..................................................................................................... 7-18
After Start ............................................................................................. 7-18
Captains Flow Pattern .......................................................................... 7-19
7.12.5.1
7.12.5.2
7.12.6
First Officers Flow Pattern ................................................................. 7-20
7.12.6.1
7.12.6.2
7.12.7

After Start Checklist ............................................................................. 7-21
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-1
Chapter 7
Start
7.1
BEFORE START
7.1.1
20 MINUTES PRIOR TO DEPARTURE & FUELING COMPLETE
7.1.2
FUEL
Captain
Checks the fuel slip for accuracy,

Verifies the fuel load is within limits of the
RAMP and
Verifies fuel load is balanced.
7.1.3
First Officer
Resets Fuel Used on the Flight Summary
page.
ACARS
The first officer enters the flight number.
7.1.4
ATC CLEARANCE
The first officer normally obtains the ATC clearance. If done verbally,
both pilots should listen and copy the clearance when possible.
7.1.5
INITIAL ALTITUDE
Both pilots will verify the initial altitude in their respective PFD.
7.1.6
TRANSPONDER
The first officer normally sets the assigned transponder code and Flight
ID.
7.1.7
DISCONNECTING POWER
The captain will give POWER OFF/OUT command/signal when ready
to disconnect the air and/or power.
Captain
First Officer
Accomplish Before Start Checklist (To the Line) Flow Patterns
7.1.8
FMS ROUTING
A.
OPS-07A
The PF normally enters the routing into the FMS.
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-2
7.1.9
B.
The other pilot will verify the

routing is entered correctly
and active.
C.
Compare the total distance

on the FMS Progress Page
against the Flight Release.
D.
Resolve any discrepancies.
It is particularly important
to verify the correct runway for departure has
been entered into the FMS
on FMS departures to
ensure the proper flight
path after takeoff.
PAPERWORK REVIEW
Both pilots will review Flight Release, Airport Runway Analysis &
Weather Package and all pertinent Jeppesen pages.
7.1.10
COMMUNICATION/NAVIGATION FREQUENCIES & COURSES

Both pilots set communication frequencies and navigation frequencies
and courses for departure.
7.1.11
GUIDANCE PANEL
The PF sets up the guidance panel for departure.
7.1.12
JUMPSEAT
One of the pilots will accomplish a jumpseat briefing if required.
7.1.13
WELCOME ABOARD ANNOUNCEMENT

The captain will normally accomplish a welcome aboard announcement
just prior to departing the gate and after most of the passengers are
situated.
7.1.14
GATE DEPARTURE
Company aircraft will power out or pushback from the gate no later than
departure time.
7.1.15
EARLY DEPARTURES
Early departures are encouraged when the boarding process is
complete. This may be earlier than the scheduled departure time.
7.1.16
WEIGHT AND BALANCE (W & B)

The station agent will verify the GSI status. After computing the W & B,
ensure the proper paperwork is given to the gate agent and carried on
board.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
>>>FOM 6.9.3C
7.1.17
PAGE 7-3
CABIN READY NOTIFICATION

Prior to locking the cockpit door, the A flight attendant will advise the
flight crew, Cabin secure signifying all passengers are seated, carry-on
baggage is properly stowed, seat backs are upright, tray tables are
stowed, slides are armed and the cabin is ready for aircraft
movement.Relay any pertinent information (such as short-taxi, etc.)
Captain
Establish communication with ground

personnel
First Officer
Obtain pushback or start clearance (if
required)
Accomplish Before Start (Below the Line) Flow Patterns
7.1.18
PUSHBACK OR START CLEARANCE

Captain
First Officer
Accomplish Pushback Operation (if required)
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-4
7.2
7.2.1
BEFORE START CHECKLIST (TO THE LINE)

GENERAL
This flow and checklist is used to prepare for starting the engines.
7.2.2
WHO
7.2.3
WHEN
After fueling is completed, and ATC clearance is received.
7.2.4
CAPTAINS FLOW PATTERN (TO THE LINE)
7.2.4.1
Captains Abbreviated Flow (To the Line)

At least three (3) minutes after AC electrical power is established and
done early enough to allow maintenance action (if required).
Confirm STEER OFF EICAS message is annunciated.
J PARKING BRAKE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
J O2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
J MCDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set (if PF)
OPS-07A
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
J
J
J
J
J
J
121.317(b)
7.2.4.2
PAGE 7-5

PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
MFD- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
PASSENGER SIGNS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
Departure Review - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Brief if PF
Call for Before Start Checklist
Captains Expanded Flow (To the Line)
At least three (3) minutes after AC electrical power is established

and done early enough to allow maintenance action (if required).
To allow the flight controls
built in tests, wait three (3)
minutes after establishing
AC electrical power prior to
turning on any hydraulic
pump(s).
EICAS STEER OFF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Annunciate
Serious injury may result if hydraulics are introduced without STEER OFF annunciated.
HYD SYS 1 ELEC PUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON

HYD SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON
HYD SYS 3 ELEC PUMP B - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
FLT CTRL NO DISPATCH - - - - - - - - - - - - - Not annunciated
After fueling is completed and ATC clearance is received
J PARKING BRAKE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
EMERG/PRKG BRAKE Light- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Illuminated
J O2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
J MCDU (if PF) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
FMS
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Load
- Enter flight plan route.

T/O DATASET MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- Enter the following data:

- T/O MODE (TO-1)
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-6
NOTE
- T/O TEMP (__C)

- ATTCS (ON)
- REF ECS (ON or Select OFF from APG Performance)
ENG REF ECS DISAG message will
always be annunciated when the
REF ECS is set to on with the APU
running and thrust levers at idle.
- REF A/I (OFF or if in

icing conditions, ALL)
Transponder Code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Ensure assigned code
- Normally, the transponder code is already entered after receipt of the

ATC clearance. If not done, enter the assigned code now.

J PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
ALT SEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Initial Assigned altitude
EHSI- - - - - - - - - - - Departure course and NAV source selected
Heading Bug - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set for departure procedure
J MFD- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
- Ensure hydraulic fluid quantity green

- Ensure the following are green:

- BRAKES EMER ACCUM SYS 1 & SYS 2
- ENGINE OIL LEVEL
- CREW OXY PRESSURE
J EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Ensure required fuel on board and balanced.
Check STEER OFF message illuminated.
J PASSENGER SIGNS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
121.317(b)
STERILE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
NO ELEC DEVICES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON
FSTN BELTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON
J Departure Review (if PF) - - - - - - - - - - - - Complete

If PF and after the first officer has completed his flows, review the RA
Plan and accomplish the Departure Review.
OPS-07A
121.306(a)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
7.2.5
PAGE 7-7
FIRST OFFICERS FLOW PATTERN (TO THE LINE)
7.2.5.1
First Officers Abbreviated Flow (To the Line)

After fueling is completed and ATC clearance is received
J
J
J
J
J
J
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)

PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
MFD- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
MCDU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set (if PF)
O2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Departure Review
Brief if PF
After the captain calls Before Start Checklist
J Accomplish Before Start Checklist (To the Line)

7.2.5.2
First Officers Expanded Flow (To the Line)

J PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
ALT SEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Initial Assigned altitude
EHSI - - - - - - - - - - Departure course and NAV source selected
Heading Bug- - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set for departure procedure
J MFD- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
MAP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
- Select appropriate setting for Radar/TCAS/Navaids/Waypoints, etc.

PFD, HSI, and MAP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Crosschecked
- Crosscheck initial heading, altitude, source, and course on the PFD,

HSI, and MAP.
J MCDU (if PF) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

FMS
OPS-07A
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Load
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-8
NOTE
- Enter flight plan route.

- T/O DATASET MENU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- Enter the following data:
- T/O MODE (TO-1)
- T/O TEMP (__C)
- ATTCS (ON)
- REF ECS (ON or Select OFF from APG Performance)
ENG REF ECS DISAG message will
always be annunciated when the
REF ECS is set to on with the APU
running and thrust levers at idle.
- REF A/I (OFF or if in icing conditions, ALL)

Transponder Code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Ensure assigned code
- Normally, the transponder code is already entered after receipt of the

ATC clearance. If not done, enter the assigned code now.
J Departure Review (if PF) - - - - - - - - - - - - Complete

If PF and when the captain is ready, review the APG Performance data
and accomplish the Departure Review IAW the FOM.
7.3
BEFORE START CHECKLIST (TO THE LINE)

1. Preflight Inspections . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete

Exterior Inspection has been completed.
Panel scans have been completed.
2. Fuel Quantity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . __REQ, __OB

Crosscheck the fuel on board against the required RAMP on the Flight
Release and ensure the wing tanks are balanced.
3. MCDU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET

4. O2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
121.333(c)(1)
121.333(c)(4)
5. Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . ___.___ SET

Captain cross checks the left PFD and IESS field elevation and
barometric settings.
First officer cross checks the right PFD field elevation and barometric
settings.
Compare indicated altitude, max difference 50 feet (ICAO); 75 feet
(FAA).
6. PASSENGER SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

7. Departure Review . . . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
OPS-07A
121.317(b)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
-
PAGE 7-9
Clearance
Standard Instrument Departure (SID)
Acceleration Altitude
Special Considerations
Unique
Airport Advisory Information
Noise Abatement Procedures
Engine Failure Procedures
Emergency Return Plan
Lower Than Standard Takeoff and Takeoff Alternates
Significant
Terrain / Obstacles
Weather Conditions
- Any other known risks / Intentions

The preceding portion of the Before Start Checklist may be
accomplished anytime prior to start. The following portion should be
accomplished after W & B calculations are completed and just prior to
pushback (or just prior to engine start if no pushback).
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-10
7.4
WEIGHT & BALANCE (W & B)
Step
Captain
First Officer
After Weight and Balance paperwork (Load Report and

Cabin Weight & Balance Form) is received
7.4.1
Confirm Passenger seating

zones.
Crosscheck the loading with the Captain
Perform CG calculations
Complete the Republic Airlines
via the See GeeTM Calcula- ERJ-170 Load Manifest (RAF 416)
tor (Whiz Wheel)
Set takeoff trim.
Enter Zero Fuel Weight

(Perf Init Page 3/3)
MCDU - TRS - TO Dataset
Compute V speeds and enter

(Perf T/O Page 3/3)
Set VFS
(Speed Select on Guidance Panel)
CAPTAINS EXPANDED FLOW
J Passenger seating zones - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify

Compare the Load Report and the Cabin Weight & Balance Form to
verify passenger count.
J CG Calculation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Perform
Enter the passenger count by zone from the Cabin Weight & Balance
Form and cargo/baggage weights from the Load Report.
J Takeoff Trim - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

Set takeoff trim according to the setting establish on the load manifest.
7.4.2
FIRST OFFICERS EXPANDED FLOW
J Loading - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify
Compare the Load Report and the Cabin Weight & Balance Form to
verify passenger count.
J Load Manifest (RAF 416) - - - - - - - - - - - Complete

Enter the passenger and cargo/baggage weights from the Cabin Weight
& Balance Form and the Load Report.
J ZFW- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Perf Init Page 3/3
J TRS - T/O DATASET- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

Verify takeoff data and select Flex temperature
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-11
J V Speeds - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Perf T/O Page 3/3
J VFS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Set speed using the Speed Select Knob on the Guidance Panel and
verify speed on the PFD.
7.5
BEFORE START CHECKLIST (BELOW THE LINE)
7.5.1
CAPTAINS FLOW PATTERN (BELOW THE LINE)

S
Window
7.5.1.1
Captains Abbreviated Flow (Below the Line)

Just prior to pushback (or just prior to engine start if no pushback)
J
J
J
J
J
7.5.1.2
STERILE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
Cockpit Window/Door - - - - - - - - - Closed & Locked
PARKING BRAKE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Call for Below the line
Captains Expanded Flow (Below the Line)
J STERILE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
J Cockpit Window/Door - - - - - - - - - Closed & Locked
121.587(a)
Verify the window is closed and locked, the cockpit door is locked, the
Cockpit Door Control Unlocked light is out, and all doors show green on
the Status Page.
The cockpit door shall be closed and locked at all times when the aircraft
is being operated.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-12
J PARKING BRAKE -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON or OFF
The Parking Brake shall not be released without verification

from ground crew that they are ready to pushback.
If....
Then....
pushback is required
Parking Brake ......................... OFF
pushback is not required
Parking Brake ...........................ON
J EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Verify the STEER OFF annunciator is shown on the EICAS.
J Call for Below the Line.

7.5.2
FIRST OFFICERS FLOW PATTERN (BELOW THE LINE)
S
Window
F
7.5.2.1
First Officers Abbreviated Flow (Below the Line)

Just prior to pushback (or just prior to engine start if no pushback)
J RED BCN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
J EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
After the captain calls Below the line
J Accomplish Before Start Checklist (Below the Line)

7.5.2.2
First Officers Expanded Flow (Below the Line)
J RED BCN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-13
121.587(a)
Verify the window is closed and locked, the cockpit door is locked, the
Cockpit Door Control Unlocked light is out, and all doors show green on
the Status Page.
The cockpit door shall be closed and locked at all times when the aircraft
is being operated.
J EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Verify the STEER OFF annunciator is shown on the EICAS.
J Accomplish the Before Start Checklist - Below the Line.

7.6
BEFORE START CHECKLIST (BELOW THE LINE)

121.587(a)
1. Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . CLOSED & LOCKED

Status Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No red indications displayed
2. RED BCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
3. PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . [C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON or OFF
4. Before Start Checklist . . . . . . . . [FO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-14
7.7
7.7.1
PUSHBACK/POWERBACK PROCEDURES
PUSHBACK
Pushback procedures are accomplished IAW the FOM.
Ensure EICAS annunciates STEER OFF.
7.7.2
POWERBACK
Powerback is not authorized.
7.8
7.8.1
ENGINE START PROCEDURE

GENERAL
Normally start the #1 engine first.
7.8.2
PROCEDURE
The first officer initiates the engine start and monitors the start process.
Start the engine using the following procedures:
Step
First Officer
Starting the engine:
START/STOP #__ Selector .............................START, then RUN

a. Momentarily hold in Start position.
EICAS Display ........................................................... Observe

a. N2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Increasing.
at 7% N2...:
a. IGN A or B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displayed
at approximately 20% N2...
b. N1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Increasing
c. Fuel Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Increasing
at light-off (within 5 seconds after fuel flow)...
d. ITT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Increasing
at approximately 50%N2....
e. IGN A or B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extinguishes
f. Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive Indication
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
7.8.3
PAGE 7-15
STABLE ENGINE INDICATIONS

The following parameters indicate a stable engine at ISA:
7.8.4
N1 ........................................................................................... 27%
ITT....................................................................................... 460C
N2 ........................................................................................... 62%
Fuel Flow...............................................Approximately 480 lbs./hr.
Oil Pressure .................................................... Greater than 25 psi
ABORTED ENGINE START

Refer to QRH, Engine Abnormal Start.
7.8.5
ENGINE WARM-UP
Before applying takeoff thrust, allow the engines to warm up for five (5)
minutes (preferred); three (3) minutes (minimum).
7.9
7.10
7.10.1
DELAYED ENGINE START PROCEDURE

A.
Perform the entire Before Start checklist, start the desired engine
(normally #1) and after the first engine start is complete, perform the
entire After Start checklist. (Gate or ramp conditions may require
both engines to be operating until clear of the area. In this case,
shutdown an engine for a known ground delay when appropriate.)
B.
The delayed engine start may be accomplished anytime it is

convenient considering crew workload and proximity to the takeoff
runway.
C.
Do not initiate the delayed engine start while crossing a runway or

on congested ramp areas unless the aircraft is stopped and the
parking brake is set.
SUPPLEMENTAL START PROCEDURES

DEFINITION
A supplemental start procedure is a procedure used in lieu of a normal
procedure in certain circumstances (e.g., cross-bleed engine start, etc.).
It is not a non-normal procedure.
7.10.2
PROCEDURE
Pilots may accomplish the supplemental start procedure
- from memory,
- by reviewing the procedure prior to its accomplishment, or
- by reading the procedure during its accomplishment.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-16
7.10.3
EXTERNAL AIR START

Step
Flight Crew
Decision is made to use external air start:
Before Start Checklist ............................................Accomplish
PACK 1 .................................................................. Push OUT
PACK 2 .................................................................. Push OUT
Ground Cart ............................................................. Connect

Before connecting the
ground pneumatic cart, the
packs must be pushed OUT
in order to avoid any cabin
air contamination.
7.10.4
Minimum Duct Pressure................................................. 33 psi

- With the ground cart connected, check on the STATUS page of the
MFD the minimum duct pressure.
Engine Start .........................................................Accomplish

a. START/STOP Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . START then RUN
GPU (if used) ......................................................... PUSH OUT
PACK 1 .................................................................... Push IN
PACK 2 .................................................................... Push IN
10
After Start Checklist ..............................................Accomplish
CROSSBLEED START
Step
Flight Crew
Decision is made to do a crossbleed start:
Before Start Checklist ............................................Accomplish

a. Complete (D) delayed engine start item(s)
Ensure rear of aircraft is
clear.
Parking Brake .................................................................. ON
Thrust Lever (operating engine) ...................... Advance Slightly
Duct Pressure ............................................... 33 PSI Minimum

- Verify on EICAS AMS Status page
START/STOP Selector.....................................START, then RUN

- Start the engine using normal start procedures
After the engine is started and is stabilized...
Original 29AUG2005
Thrust Levers.................................................................IDLE
After Start Checklist ..............................................Accomplish

a. Complete (D) delayed engine start item(s)
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
7.10.5
7.10.6
PAGE 7-17
[RESERVED]
MANUAL STARTER VALVE OPERATION ENGINE START
Accomplish an engine start with the following difference:
1) Prior to turning the start selector to START, coordinate with the
ground crew to keep the Starter Control Valve (SCV) in the open
position.
2) When N2 reaches 53%, signal the ground crew to close the SCV.
7.11
EXTENDED GROUND DELAY

In the event one or both engines are shut down due to an extended
ground delay, accomplish the following:
This procedure assumes the aircraft is not chocked or connected to a
tug.
Step
Captain
Engine Shutdown due to extended delay:
APU............................................................................START
PARKING BRAKE ..............................................................Set
HYDRAULIC .....................................................................Set
a. HYD SYS 1 ELEC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
b. HYD SYS 2 ELEC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
c. HYD SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Engines .................................................................Shutdown
PASSENGER SIGNS ..........................................................Set

a. NO ELEC DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . As required
b. FSTN BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . As required
Step
Captain
Engine Restart after extended delay:
OPS-07A
HYDRAULIC .....................................................................Set
a. HYD SYS 1 ELEC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AUTO
b. HYD SYS 2 ELEC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AUTO
c. HYD SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
PASSENGER SIGNS ..........................................................Set

a. NO ELEC DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . As required
b. FSTN BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . As required
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-18
7.12
AFTER START CHECKLIST
7.12.1
GENERAL
This flow and checklist is used to configure the aircraft for taxiing.
7.12.2
WHO
7.12.3
WHEN
Before taxiing.
7.12.4
AFTER START
Step
Captain
First Officer
After starting engines

1
Give ground personnel a

thumbs up signal when
no longer needed.
Do not release parking brake until
receiving acknowledgment from
ground crew.
Verbally state to the first

officer when receiving
thumbs up signal from the
ground crew
Verbally acknowledge the captains

statement
BUL-SOP-06-01
OPS-07A
SOP-08-02, PAGE 5 OF 16
Placement: This is Part Two. Insert this Part Two before page 7-19.
SOP-08-02, PAGE 6 OF 16
7.12.5CAPTAINS FLOW PATTERN
Rudder Pedals
F
Shoulder
Harness
7.12.5.1 Captains Abbreviated Flow
After engine start, before taxiing
J APU - - - - - - - - - OFF, unless operationally required

After first officer selects FLIGHT CONTROL Synoptic Page
J
J
J
J
J
Speed Select - - - - - - - - - - - - -VFS Crosschecked

TRS Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify
Flight Controls - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Shoulder Harness - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - On
Call for After Start Checklist
7.12.5.2 Captains Expanded Flow

J APU CONTROL MASTER Selector - - - - - ON or OFF

J Speed Select - - - - - - - - - - - - -VFS Crosschecked
SOP-08-02, PAGE 7 OF 16
J TRS Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify

z Check the following data:
T/O MODE (TO-1)

T/O TEMP (___C)
ATTCS (ON)
REF ECS (ON or Select OFF from performance data)
REF A/I (OFF or ALL, if in icing conditions)
FLEX T/O (ON or OFF)
FLEX TEMP (___C)
J Flight Controls - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked

Ensure the tow bar is disconnected prior to
accomplishing this check.
z Nosewheel steering - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
- Steering disengage switch on back of control wheelActivate

- Ensure nosewheel steering EICAS message displayed STEER OFF.
z Rudder Pedals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Full left and right deflection
- Check for smooth

movement without
binding.
- Verify proper RUD
If taxiing on #2 only, DO
NOT exercise any other control surface during the rudder check.
movement on the
Flight Controls synoptic page.
J Shoulder Harness - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - On
z Ensure the shoulder harness is on for takeoff IAW the FOM.
SOP-08-02, PAGE 8 OF 16
7.12.6 FIRST OFFICERS FLOW PATTERN
Control Wheel
F
Shoulder
Harness
7.12.6.1 First Officers Abbreviated Flow

J
J
J
J
J
J
J
Flaps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ___ Set

Flight Control Synoptic Page - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
Flight Controls - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
PITCH & TRIM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
MCDU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
After the captain calls After Start Checklist
J Accomplish After Start Checklist

7.12.6.2 First Officers Expanded Flow
J Flaps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ___ Set

z SLAT/FLAP Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set flaps ___
z EICAS S/F Display - - - - - - - - - - Agrees with SLAT/FLAP Lever
J Flight Control Synoptic Page - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
SOP-08-02, PAGE 9 OF 16

z FLIGHT CONTROLS Synoptic Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- Control Wheel - - - - - - - - Full left and right deflection

- Check for smooth movement without binding.
- Verify proper AIL movement on the FLIGHT CONTROLS Synoptic
Page.
z Control Wheel - - - - - - - - - - - - - Full front and back deflection

- Verify proper ELEV movement on the FLIGHT CONTROLS synoptic
page.
J PITCH & TRIM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set

z EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify
- Trim Position Display (Roll, Yaw, & Pitch Green & UP<TO Setting>)
J MCDU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
z Check the following TAKEOFF 3/3:
- V1, VR, V2 and VFS set

- The first officer will verbalize <V1>, <VR>, <V2>, <VFS> from the TLR
while the Captain verifies this information of the Airspeed Display.
- The captain and first officer will also verbalize calculated <Flex Temp,
if used.>
J EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
z Check the following:
engine indications
oil pressure
oil temperature
engine vibrations
z Ensure all displayed EICAS messages are normal for the current
J Accomplish After Start Checklist.
7.12.7 AFTER START CHECKLIST
1. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___

z EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify
- SLATS/Flaps Position Display- - - - <TO Setting>, Green

2. Flight Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
3. PITCH & TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . __.__, Green
SOP-08-02, PAGE 10 OF 16
4. Takeoff Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . __, __, __, __/__
z PFD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify
- The first officer will verbalize <V1>, <VR>, <V2>, <VFS> from the TLR
while the Captain verifies this information on the Airspeed Display.
- The captain and first officer will also verbalize calculated <Flex Temp,
if used.>
5. EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

6. Shoulder Harness. . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
7. After Start Checklist . . . . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
ERJ-170 STANDARD
7.12.5
PAGE 7-19
Rudder Pedals
F
Shoulder
Harness
7.12.5.1
J APU - - - - - - - - - OFF, unless operationally required


J Call for After Start Checklist
121.311(h)
7.12.5.2
J APU CONTROL MASTER Selector - - - - - ON or OFF

OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-20

Ensure the tow bar is disconnected prior to
accomplishing this check.
Nosewheel steering - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
- Steering disengage switch on back of control wheelActivate

- Ensure nosewheel steering EICAS message displayed STEER OFF.
Rudder Pedals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Full left and right deflection
- Check for smooth
If taxiing on #2 only, DO
NOT exercise any other control surface during the rudder check.
movement without
binding.
- Verify proper RUD

movement on the
Flight Controls synoptic page.
Ensure the shoulder harness is on for takeoff IAW the FOM.
7.12.6
Control Wheel
F
Shoulder
Harness
7.12.6.1
J Flaps - T.O. Setting display agrees with SLAT/FLAP Lever

J EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
OPS-07A
121.311(h)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 7-21

121.311(h)
After the captain calls After Start Checklist
J Accomplish After Start Checklist

7.12.6.2
J Flaps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ___ Set

SLAT/FLAP Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set flaps ___
EICAS S/F Display - - - - - - - - - - Agrees with SLAT/FLAP Lever
J EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Check the following:
engine indications
oil pressure
oil temperature
engine vibrations
Ensure all displayed EICAS messages are normal for the current

FLIGHT CONTROLS Synoptic Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- Control Wheel - - - - - - - - Full left and right deflection

- Verify proper AIL movement on the FLIGHT CONTROLS Synoptic
Page.
Control Wheel - - - - - - - - - - - - - Full front and back deflection

- Verify proper ELEV movement on the FLIGHT CONTROLS synoptic
page.
J Accomplish After Start Checklist.
121.311(h)
7.12.7
AFTER START CHECKLIST

1. Flight Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED

2. EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
121.311(h)
3. Shoulder Harness . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

4. After Start Checklist . . . . . . . . . [FO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
OPS-07A
PAGE 7-22
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 8-1
Chapter 8: Before Takeoff

8.1 General ...................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
Thrust Management ................................................................................ 8-1

Speed ....................................................................................................... 8-1
Aircraft Movement ................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.3.1
8.1.3.2
Initial ............................................................................................................. 8-1

Sustaining ...................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.4
Nosewheel/Rudder Pedal Steering .......................................................... 8-2
8.1.5
Brakes ..................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.6
Turning Radius ....................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Taxi Procedures ....................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1
Primary Task ........................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2
Taxi Clearance ........................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.3
Use of Thrust .......................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.4
Single Engine Taxi .................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.4.1
8.2.4.2
General Guidelines ....................................................................................... 8-3

Specific Procedures ....................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.5
Delayed Engine Start .............................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Taxi Checklist .......................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1
General .................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.2
Who ......................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.3
When ....................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.4
Captains Flow Pattern ............................................................................ 8-5
8.3.4.1
8.3.4.2
8.3.5
Captains Abbreviated Flow ......................................................................... 8-5

Captains Expanded Flow ............................................................................. 8-5
First Officers Flow Pattern ................................................................... 8-6

8.3.5.1
8.3.5.2
First Officers Abbreviated Flow .................................................................. 8-6

First Officers Expanded Flow ..................................................................... 8-6
8.3.6
Taxi Checklist ......................................................................................... 8-7
8.4 Cleared for Takeoff .................................................................................................. 8-8
8.4.1
First Officer Takeoff ............................................................................... 8-8
8.5 Before Takeoff Checklist ......................................................................................... 8-8
8.5.1
Captains Flow Pattern ............................................................................ 8-8
8.5.1.1
8.5.1.2
8.5.2
First Officers Flow Pattern ................................................................... 8-9

8.5.2.1
8.5.2.2
8.5.3
OPS-07A
Captains Abbreviated Flow ......................................................................... 8-8

Captains Expanded Flow ............................................................................. 8-9
First Officers Abbreviated Flow .................................................................. 8-9
Before Takeoff Checklist ...................................................................... 8-10
PAGE TOC 8-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 8-1
Chapter 8\
Before Takeoff
8.1
GENERAL
8.1.1
THRUST MANAGEMENT
Thrust use during ground operations demands sound judgement and
techniques. The air blast effects at relatively low thrust can be
destructive and cause injury. Be aware of aircraft behind and likewise
avoid following other aircraft too closely.
.
Jet blast is a major cause of

foreign object damage
(FOD).
Consider tow out if the thrust

required could cause injury/
damage
8.1.2
SPEED
The tendency is to taxi faster than desired, especially during runway
turnoff after landing. The appropriate taxi speed will depend on the turn
radius and surface condition. Nosewheel scrubbing indicates excessive
steering angle and/or excessive taxi speed for surface condition. The
normal straight ahead taxi speed should not exceed thirty (30) knots.
When approaching a turn, adjust speed for the surface conditions.
8.1.3.1
AIRCRAFT MOVEMENT
Initial
To begin taxiing, release the
brakes and smoothly increase
thrust to the minimum
required for the aircraft to
move forward.
8.1.3.2
NOTE
8.1.3
Allow time for aircraft response to

each thrust change.
Sustaining
NOTE
Once taxi has commenced,

idle thrust is more than
The nosewheel should not be turned
when the aircraft is static.
adequate for most conditions.
Do not start a turn until
sufficient forward speed has
been attained to allow the aircraft to turn at idle thrust.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 8-2
8.1.4
NOSEWHEEL/RUDDER PEDAL STEERING

During a turn, maintain positive pressure on the nose steering tiller to
prevent the nose gear from returning to center abruptly. Straight ahead
steering and large radius turns should be accomplished with rudder
pedal steering only. Avoid stopping the aircraft in a turn, as excessive
thrust will be required to start taxiing again. After completing a turn, and
prior to stopping, center the nosewheel and allow the aircraft to roll
straight ahead for short distance.
8.1.5
BRAKES
Avoid riding the brakes to control taxi speed. If taxi speed is too high,
reduce the speed with a steady brake application and then release the
brakes to permit brake cooling. Continuous braking should be avoided.
Allow for decreased braking effectiveness on slick surfaces.
8.1.6
TURNING RADIUS
The turning radius illustration shows the minimum turning radius
capability. The tail tip has the largest arc while turning and determines
the minimum obstruction clearance path.
Aircraft
ERJ-170
ERJ-175
Original 29AUG2005
Steering Angle
76 degrees
Nose
Right Winglet
R1
48 ft. 9 in.
52 ft. 5 in.
R5
51 ft.
54 ft. 8 in.
Right Tail Tip

R6
54 ft. 3 in.
57 ft. 3 in.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
8.2
PAGE 8-3
TAXI PROCEDURES
8.2.1
PRIMARY TASK
The captain will taxi the
aircraft. The flight crews
primary task is to safely taxi
the aircraft and should not be
diverted from this task.
8.2.2
Do not taxi so close behind

other aircraft as to ingest
foreign objects.
TAXI CLEARANCE
Normally the first officer requests taxi clearance. Both pilots will listen for
the clearance and acknowledge any hold short instructions to ATC and
each other.
8.2.3
USE OF THRUST
Use only the thrust necessary to start the aircraft rolling. Consider tow
out if the thrust required could cause injury/damage.
8.2.4
SINGLE ENGINE TAXI

Single engine taxi procedures are permitted. Normally taxi with the #1
engine running. Use the following general guidelines and specific
procedures:
8.2.4.1
General Guidelines
A.
Consider crew experience, workload requirements, and passenger

comfort.
B.
Consider single engine taxi if anticipated delay time will exceed

15 (fifteen) minutes.
C.
Consider gross weight, temperature, ramp congestion and taxiway

surface conditions before deciding to single engine taxi away from
the gate.
High thrust settings required
for breakaway can damage
equipment in close proximity
to the aircraft.
OPS-07A
D.
If possible, begin single engine taxi with a slight turn toward the nonoperating engine. There will be less resistance, resulting in a lower
thrust setting.
E.
Sharp turns toward the operating engine will be difficult.
F.
Constant pressure on the tiller will be required due to asymmetric

thrust. Do not use rudder trim to counteract this turning tendency.
G.
Keep the APU running for taxi-out; an APU start is more efficient
than a crossbleed start.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 8-4
H.
If lengthy ground delays after gate departure are encountered with

both engines operating, consider shutting down an engine.
I.
If the right engine is used for the single engine taxi, the HYS SYS 1
& 2 ELEC PUMPS should be turned ON.
A.
Single engine taxi is not authorized when
8.2.4.2
Specific Procedures
- ramps and taxiways when braking action is less than Good.

- stations use power-out taxi
8.2.5
B.
Fuel balancing limitations must be observed.
C.
Because the starting sequence involves both pilots, the aircraft must
not cross any runways or be taxiing in a congested area while
conducting a delayed engine start. Plan taxi operations accordingly.
DELAYED ENGINE START

Start the remaining engine using the normal start procedure. If APU is
unavailable, perform a crossbleed start (see Supplemental Start
Procedures). Allow enough time to complete the Before Takeoff
Checklist.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
SOP-08-02, PAGE 11 OF 16
Placement: This is Part Three. Insert Part Three before page 8-5.
SOP-08-02, PAGE 12 OF 16
8.3
TAXI CHECKLIST
8.3.1
GENERAL
This flow and checklist is used to ensure the aircraft is ready for takeoff.
8.3.2
WHO
WHEN
After a runway assignment is
issued.
8.3.4
NOTE
8.3.3
If performing single engine taxi procedures, do not accomplish this

checklist until both engines are
started.

The captain does not have a flow pattern.
8.3.4.1

After a runway assignment is issued and both engines are started
J EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
J Takeoff Briefing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Brief if PF
J Call for Taxi Checklist
8.3.4.2
J EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
z Check the following information is displayed:
- Proper Power Setting

- White ATTCS displayed
J Takeoff Briefing (if PF) - - - - - - - - - - - - - Complete

z If PF perform a Takeoff Briefing IAW the FOM/SOP.
SOP-08-02, PAGE 13 OF 16
8.3.5

F
8.3.5.1

J Brake Temp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Green

J HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
J Takeoff Briefing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Brief if PF
After the captain calls Taxi Checklist
J Accomplish Taxi Checklist

8.3.5.2

z Status Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify
- Brake Temperature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Green
J HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
z HYD SYS 1 ELEC PUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
z HYD SYS 2 ELEC PUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO

z If PF perform a Takeoff Briefing IAW the FOM.
SOP-08-02, PAGE 14 OF 16
8.3.6
TAXI CHECKLIST
1. EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked

2. Brake Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
3. Takeoff Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete
Ensure the Takeoff Briefing has been completed by the PF.
- Initial
z Heading
z Altitude
z Fix
- Special Considerations
z Unique
z Significant
Terrain / Obstacles
Weather Conditions
- Any other known risks / intentions
ERJ-170 STANDARD
8.3
8.3.1
PAGE 8-5
TAXI CHECKLIST
GENERAL
This flow and checklist is used to ensure the aircraft is ready for takeoff.
8.3.2
WHO
WHEN
After a runway assignment is
issued.
8.3.4
NOTE
8.3.3
If performing single engine taxi procedures, do not accomplish this

checklist until both engines are
started.

The captain does not have a flow pattern.
8.3.4.1

J
J
J
J
J
8.3.4.2
TRS Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify

EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Speed Select - - - - - - - - - - - - -VFS Crosschecked
Takeoff Briefing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Brief if PF
Call for Taxi Checklist
J TRS Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify

Check the following data:
T/O MODE (TO-1)

T/O TEMP (___C)
ATTCS (ON)
REF ECS (ON or Select OFF from performance data)
REF A/I (OFF or ALL, if in icing conditions)
J EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Check the following information is displayed:
- Proper Power Setting

- White ATTCS displayed
J Speed Select - - - - - - - - - - - - -VFS Crosschecked

If PF perform a Takeoff Briefing IAW the FOM/SOP.

OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 8-6
8.3.5
S
F
8.3.5.1

J
J
J
J
Brake Temp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Green

HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
PITCH & TRIM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Takeoff Briefing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Brief if PF

8.3.5.2

Status Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify
- Brake Temperature - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Green
J HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
HYD SYS 1 ELEC PUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
HYD SYS 2 ELEC PUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
J PITCH & TRIM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Green

EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Verify
- Trim Position Display (Roll, Yaw, & Pitch Green & UP<TO Setting>)
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 8-7

If PF perform a Takeoff Briefing IAW the FOM.

8.3.6
TAXI CHECKLIST
1. EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked

2. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___
a.EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify
SLATS/Flaps Position Display - - - - - - - - - <TO Setting>, Green
3. Brake Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green

4. PITCH & TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . __.__, Green
5. Takeoff Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Verify . . . . . . . . . __, __, __, __/__
a.PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify
The first officer will verbalize <V1>, <VR>, <V2>, <VFS> from the Speed
& Performance Flip Charts (corrected as appropriate) while the Captain
verifies this information of the Airspeed Display.
The captain and first officer will also verbalize calculated <Flex Temp, if
used.>
6. Takeoff Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete

Ensure the Takeoff Briefing has been completed by the PF.
- Initial
Heading
Altitude
Fix
- Special Considerations
Unique
Significant
Terrain / Obstacles
Weather Conditions
- Any other known risks / intentions
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 8-8
8.4
CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF

The Before Takeoff Checklist will be called for after being cleared onto
the takeoff runway and completed prior to takeoff roll.
Captain
First Officer
Accomplish Before Takeoff Flow Patterns

Scan short final and runway for any potential conflict before entering the runway.
8.4.1
FIRST OFFICER TAKEOFF

Do not transfer aircraft control to the first officer until the aircraft is
aligned on the runway center line.
8.5
8.5.1
BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECKLIST

F
8.5.1.1

After being cleared onto the takeoff runway; completed prior to takeoff
roll
J
J
J
J
J
External Lights- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required

A/T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
Altimeters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
TOGA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ARMED
Call for Before Takeoff Checklist
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
8.5.1.2
PAGE 8-9
NOTE
STROBE lights are used for all flight

operations as long as they do not
create a distraction to the flight
crew.
NOTE
J External Lights- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
LOGO lights should be ON for all

operations below 10,000 feet at
night. External lights are required
for all operations conducted below
10,000 feet, as long as their use
does not create a distraction to the
flight crew.
J A/T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
J Altimeters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Check indicated altitude with published elevation of the runway end as
depicted on the Jeppesen Airport diagram.
J TOGA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ARMED
Verify ROLL & TO and autothrottles (TO white) are displayed in the
FMA.
8.5.2
8.5.2.1

After being cleared onto the takeoff runway; completed prior to takeoff
roll
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 8-10
J
J
J
J
Altimeters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
MCDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set XPDR to TA/RA
Flight Attendants- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notified
T/O CONFIG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
After the captain calls Before Takeoff Checklist
J Accomplish Before Takeoff Checklist

8.5.2.2
J Altimeters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
Check indicated altitude with published elevation of the runway end as
published on the Jeppesen Airport diagram.
J Transponder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -TA/RA
Radio Function Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- TA/RA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
J Flight Attendants- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notified

PA Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press and hold
- Notify the flight attendants when takeoff is imminent IAW the FOM.
J T/O CONFIG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check

T/O CONFIG- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press
- Verify TAKEOFF OK aural message.

8.5.3
BEFORE TAKEOFF CHECKLIST

1. T/O Min Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . ___ Req, ___ OB

Crosscheck the fuel on board against the required T.O. MIN fuel on the
Flight Release. Ensure at least this amount of fuel is on board prior to
beginning the takeoff roll. If the amount is less, an amended Flight
Release or more fuel is required.
2. Flight Attendants . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NOTIFIED

3. Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TA/RA
4. T/O CONFIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
5. Before Takeoff Checklist . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
End of Chapter
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 9-1
Chapter 9: Takeoff
9.1 Normal Takeoff ......................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1
Setting Takeoff Thrust ............................................................................ 9-1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
Guarding the Thrust levers .................................................................................... 9-1

Initial Steering ........................................................................................................ 9-1
Aft Center-of-Gravity Effects ................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Other Takeoff Types ................................................................................................ 9-2

9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
Rolling ................................................................................................................... 9-2

Maximum Performance ......................................................................................... 9-2
Crosswind .............................................................................................................. 9-2
Flap 1 ..................................................................................................................... 9-2
Flap 4 ..................................................................................................................... 9-2
ECS OFF ................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.3 Rotation & Lift-Off .................................................................................................. 9-3

9.3.1
Rotation and Liftoff ................................................................................ 9-3
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
Initial Climb ........................................................................................................... 9-3

Flight Director ........................................................................................................ 9-3
Clean-Up and Acceleration .................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.4.1
Flap Retraction Speed Schedule ................................................................... 9-3
9.3.4.2
Slat/Flap Retraction Complete ...................................................................... 9-3
9.4 Normal Takeoff Profile ............................................................................................ 9-4

9.5 Normal Takeoff Actions & Callouts ........................................................................ 9-5
9.6 Rejected Takeoff Actions & Callouts ...................................................................... 9-7
9.6.1
After a Rejected Takeoff ......................................................................... 9-7
9.6.2
Communications .................................................................................................... 9-7
9.7 Loss of Thrust At or Above V1 ............................................................................... 9-8

9.7.1
General .................................................................................................... 9-8
9.7.1.1
Considerations .............................................................................................. 9-8
9.7.1.2
Takeoff Performance .................................................................................... 9-8
9.7.2
Engine Failure ........................................................................................................ 9-8
9.7.2.1
Engine Fire .................................................................................................... 9-9
9.7.3
Engine Severe Damage .......................................................................................... 9-9
9.7.4
Compressor/Engine Stall ....................................................................................... 9-9
9.7.4.1
Single/Multiple with Self Recovery ........................................................... 9-10
9.7.4.2
Multiple Requiring Pilot Action ................................................................. 9-10
9.7.4.3
Non-Recoverable ........................................................................................ 9-10
9.7.4.4
Compressor/Engine Stall Considerations ................................................... 9-10
9.7.5
Engine Failure Recognition ................................................................................. 9-11
9.7.5.1
Engine Failure Callout ................................................................................ 9-11
9.7.6
Thrust Requirements ............................................................................................ 9-11
9.7.7
Directional Control Prior to Liftoff ..................................................................... 9-11
9.7.8
Rotation ................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.7.9
Directional Control After Liftoff ......................................................................... 9-12
9.7.10
Initial Climb ......................................................................................................... 9-12
9.7.10.1 Ground Track Consideration ...................................................................... 9-12
9.7.11
Acceleration and Clean-Up .................................................................................. 9-12
9.7.11.1 Max Continuous Thrust .............................................................................. 9-13
9.7.12
Follow-Up Actions .............................................................................................. 9-13
9.7.12.1 Altitude ....................................................................................................... 9-13
9.7.12.2 Autopilot Usage .......................................................................................... 9-13
OPS-07A
PAGE TOC 9-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
9.7.12.3 Notification ................................................................................................. 9-13

9.7.13
Landing ................................................................................................................ 9-13
9.8 Loss of Thrust At or Above V1 Profile ................................................................. 9-14

9.9 Loss of Thrust At or Above V1 Actions & Callouts ............................................. 9-15
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 9-1
Chapter 9
Takeoff
9.1
9.1.1
NORMAL TAKEOFF
SETTING TAKEOFF THRUST
The PM will confirm the thrust

levers advance, ATTCS is
enabled (displayed in green),
TO-1 or FLEX TO-1 (if used)
is annunciated on the EICAS.
The PM then calls TOGA Set.
9.1.2
NOTE
Crossing the runway hold short line, as part of the Before Takeoff flow,
press the TOGA switch(s) and verify ROLL & TO and autothrottles (TO
white) are displayed in the FMA. As the aircraft lines up on the runway,
the PF advances the thrust levers to approximately 40% N1 and verifies
the engines are spooled evenly. After the engines are stabilized, the PF
releases the brakes, advances the thrust levers to approximately 50
degrees TLA (thrust lever angle), verifies autothrottle engagement (TO &
AT annunciates green) and calls TOGA.
The exact amount of the setting is
not as important as setting symmetrical thrust.
GUARDING THE THRUST LEVERS

Since the normal takeoff profile involves the use of the autothrottle
system, only the Captain will have his hands on the thrust levers after the
autothrottle system is engaged. There is no need for the other pilot to
guard the thrust levers during the takeoff roll.
- Whenever the First Officer is making the takeoff, the FO will push
the thrust levers up, call TOGA and move his hands off of the
thrust levers.
- The Captain will then place his hands on the thrust levers
until V1 is called by the PM.
9.1.3
INITIAL STEERING
Keep the airplane on the runway center line with nosewheel steering until
rudder effectiveness. The rudder becomes effective between 40 and 60
KIAS.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 9-2
9.1.4
AFT CENTER-OF-GRAVITY EFFECTS

At aft CG and light weights nose wheel steering effectiveness may be
reduced. Hold the control wheel slightly forward to improve nose wheel
steering.
9.2
OTHER TAKEOFF TYPES
9.2.1
ROLLING
The rolling takeoff is the same as the normal takeoff except that brakes
are not applied.
9.2.2
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE
The maximum performance takeoff is the same as the normal takeoff
except the brakes are held until after takeoff thrust N1 is achieved.
9.2.3
CROSSWIND
The aircraft demonstrates good crosswind control capability during the
takeoff roll. Directional deviations should be corrected immediately with
smooth and positive control inputs.
The aileron becomes effective as the aircraft accelerates through
approximately 80 KIAS. Use aileron as needed to maintain wings level
and rudder to maintain center line.
9.2.4
FLAP 1
Flap 1 takeoffs are authorized and use the same profile as Flap 2
takeoffs.
9.2.5
FLAP 4
Flaps 4 takeoffs are authorized under the following conditions:
Captains must perform all Flaps 4 takeoffs unless the First Officer is
a Check Airman, in which case the Check Airman may perform the
takeoff from the right seat.
Flaps 4 takeoff data must be available for the runway in use.
9.2.6
ECS OFF
ECS OFF takeoffs are performed when additional performance is
required.
B.
Select ECS OFF on the T/O DATASET MENU p1/1. Ensure the
ENG REF ECS DISAG Caution EICAS message is not displayed.
C.
If the APU is available,

leave the APU running
during takeoff and turn
the APU off after the
AFTER TAKEOFF
checklist is complete.
NOTE
A.
The EICAS display will not declutter

until the APU has been shutdown.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
9.3
9.3.1
PAGE 9-3
ROTATION & LIFT-OFF

ROTATION AND LIFTOFF
At VR, rotate smoothly toward the target pitch attitude in one continuous
motion. Use a rotation rate of approximately 2 to 3 per second. Correct
rotation technique is important to ensure adequate performance is
obtained. Lift-off will occur prior to reaching initial climb target attitude.
After lift-off and once a positive rate of climb has been established, select
landing gear up.
9.3.2
INITIAL CLIMB
With all engines operating, adjust the pitch attitude to maintain V2 + 10 to
15 knots to the acceleration altitude.
9.3.3
FLIGHT DIRECTOR
Following liftoff continue the rotation rate as follows:
If....
9.3.4
Then....
the flight director is operative...
fly the flight director pitch commands.
the flight director is inoperative...
fly a maximum deck angle limited to 12. Fly a maximum

deck angle limited to 12.
CLEAN-UP AND ACCELERATION

At acceleration altitude (1,000 feet AFE), adjust the pitch attitude to
maintain a slight climb rate while accelerating to 210 KIAS.
Flap Retraction Speed Schedule
Retract flaps to the
next setting when
airspeed is equal to or
greater than the F
bug.
9.3.4.2
NOTE
9.3.4.1
During flap 4 takeoffs, until the flaps

are retracted to flaps 2, the flap limit
speed may be less than the desiredVFS. After each flap retraction the PM
should check the Selected Airspeed
Bug to confirm it matches the VFS
Bug. If the Selected Airspeed Bug is
less, it should be adjusted up to the
VFS Bug or Flap Limit Speed, whichever is less.
Slat/Flap Retraction Complete

Once the SLAT/Flap retraction is complete and above 3000 ft. AFE,
select 250 knots and resume normal climb.
OPS-07A
- 80 Knots
80 KIAS
Pilot Monitoring - PM
400 AFE
- Positive Rate
- Position Gear Lever Up

- Gear Up
- Gear Up
- Rotate
VR
- Vee One
V1-5
- Verify ATTCS annunciates green

- Verify TO and AT annunciates green
- Verify takeoff N1
- TOGA SET
T/O ROLL
- Checked
3000 AFE
and
Flaps/Slats
Retracted
- Accelerate to 250 KIAS
- Select FLCH
- Set Selected Speed Bug to 210
- If Flap Limit Speed is less than 210
then set Selected Speed Bug to Flap Limit Speed
- Check Airspeed, select requested flap setting
- Flaps ___
- If Flap Limit Speed is less than 210
- Accomplish After Takeoff Checklist
1000 AFE
- Flight Level Change, Speed 210

- Accelerate to 210 KIAS
- Flaps __
- Retract flaps on schedule
(F Bug or greater)
- Flaps Up, After Takeoff Checklist
- Autopilot On (if desired)

- HDG or FMS NAV
9.4
- Advance TLs to 40% N1

- Ensure engines spool evenly
- Advance TLs to engage Autothrottle at 50* TLA
- TOGA
Pilot Flying - PF
PAGE 9-4
ERJ-170 STANDARD
NORMAL TAKEOFF PROFILE
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
9.5
PAGE 9-5
NORMAL TAKEOFF ACTIONS & CALLOUTS
Normal Takeoff to Flap Retraction

Trigger
Commencing
takeoff roll
PF
Verify autothrottle armed (TO
white)
Verify Flight Director modes
ROLL & TO on FMA
Advance thrust levers to approx
40% N1
PM
Verify modes ROLL & TO on FMA

Verify ATTCS annunciates green
Ensure engines are spooled

Advance thrust levers to
approximately 60 degrees TLA
TOGA
Verify TO & AT annunciates green

Verify takeoff N1
TOGA Set
80 kts
80 Knots
Verify HOLD is annunciated on
FMA
Checked
V1 - 5 knots
V1
Rotate
VR
Rotate to F/D commanded
attitude
After liftoff
Verify positive rate of climb on

VSI
Positive Rate
Verify positive rate of climb
Gear Up
Establish initial climb speed of V2
+10-15 kts
Position gear lever up

Gear Up
Monitor speed and altitude
400 AFE
Autopilot On (if desired)

HDG or FMS NAV
OPS-07A
Select autopilot on when

requested
Select HDG or FMS NAV (if
required)
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 9-6
Normal Takeoff to Flap Retraction (Continued)

Trigger
1,000 feet
PF
Flight Level Change, 210
(or speed as required)
Accelerate to 210 kts
Check airspeed
Flaps __
PM
Select FLCH
Set Speed Bug to 210 kts or
requested speed
If Flap Limit Speed is less than
210 kts, set Selected Speed Bug
to be equal to the Flap Limit
Speed.
Check airspeed
Flaps __
(Retract flaps at or above F bug)

Select proper flap setting, when
requested
If the Flap Limit Speed is below
210 kts, adjust the Selected
Speed bug to be equal to the Flap
Limit Speed. Otherwise, set the
Selected Speed Bug to 210 kts.
Flaps UP, After Takeoff
Checklist
Check airspeed
Flaps UP
Retract Flaps
Accomplish After Takeoff
Checklist
Flap/slat
retraction
complete, at or
above 3000 ft.
AFE
Accelerate to 250 knots
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
9.6
PAGE 9-7
REJECTED TAKEOFF ACTIONS & CALLOUTS
Rejected Takeoff
Captain
First Officer
Reject
Retard thrust levers to IDLE
Disconnect AT
Ensure maximum braking, if necessary
Set maximum reverse thrust consistent with
conditions
2 (1) (No) Reverse

Monitor deceleration throughout the reject
Notify tower, when able
Notify passengers when able
80 Knots
60 Knots
Check brake temperature indication on MFD status page
9.6.1
AFTER A REJECTED TAKEOFF

A.
Consider the condition of the aircraft and the reason for the
rejection. If the situation is stable, clear the runway before stopping
the aircraft. Stop on the runway if the potential for an evacuation
exists. The runway provides crash fire and rescue vehicles better
access to the aircraft.
B.
Consider requesting assistance from the tower, ground personnel or

the flight attendants in evaluating the situation. Use all available
information in formulating a response plan.
9.6.2
COMMUNICATIONS
A.
Notify the tower of any rejected takeoff. Communications with the

flight attendants and passengers must be considered.
B.
Rejected Takeoff PA Announcements - A rejected takeoff can cause

a great deal of anxiety among passengers. A prompt and
professional announcement will reassure the passengers and may
prevent an unwarranted evacuation initiated by flight attendants or
passengers.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 9-8
9.7
LOSS OF THRUST AT OR ABOVE V1
9.7.1
GENERAL
In the event of a single engine malfunction accompanied by a loss of
thrust at or above V1, follow the Loss of Thrust At or Above V1
procedure. If the engine is still producing normal thrust (such as an
engine fire or compressor/stall), clean up using the normal takeoff profile
except fly
- the runway heading or

- follow the applicable route manual Engine Failure - Takeoff
procedure.
9.7.1.1
Considerations
The PF must fly the aircraft and not be distracted trying to analyze the
problem while the aircraft is in a critical phase of flight.
Normally, the safest course of action is to accomplish the appropriate
non-normal checklist after the flaps are up and the desired climb speed
has been attained. However, under compelling circumstances such as
severe vibration, adverse flight characteristics, etc., it may be necessary
to accomplish the immediate action items as early as 400 ft. AFE.
9.7.1.2
Takeoff Performance
Takeoff performance using an assumed temperature is predicated on an
engine failure, thus advancing thrust may not be necessary to maintain
safe flight. In the event ATTCS does not adjust to MAX Thrust, manually
advancing thrust to maximum takeoff thrust has the potential to
aggravate the situation by increasing adverse yaw.
However, additional thrust is available and must be used if necessary to
sustain safe flight.
9.7.2
ENGINE FAILURE
An engine failure is an engine malfunction accompanied by thrust loss
without any apparent damage. The potential for a relight, inflight start, or
continued operation at reduced thrust exists.
Engine Failure without Severe Damage

Initially identified by:
increasing yaw and

decreasing N1/N2 indications
Airborne indications:
N1 rotation, FAIL icon on N1 gauge and

N2 rotation, and
oil pressure may indicate zero even though no damage exists
Follow:
Loss of Thrust At or Above V1 procedure and

QRH ENG 1 (2) FAIL procedure
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
9.7.2.1
PAGE 9-9
Engine Fire
If the engine is on fire and is still producing normal thrust, aircraft
performance should not be adversely affected. However, if the engine
has lost thrust, the performance loss necessitates the use of the Loss of
Thrust At or Above V1 procedure.
Engine Fire
engine fire warning indications

little, if any, yaw will occur (if the engine is still producing thrust)
After airborne:
engine failure/severe damage may be imminent
Follow:
normal climb profile except fly the runway heading or follow the
applicable route manual Engine Failure - Takeoff procedure
or if loss of thrust occurs follow Loss of Thrust At or Above V1
procedure and
QRH ENG 1 (2) FIRE or Engine Fire, Severe Damage or
Separation procedure
9.7.3
ENGINE SEVERE DAMAGE

Engine severe damage may be due to turbine seizure or failure. Seizure
may not occur until the engine is shutdown. If the engine has separated:
fuel flow, N1, and N2 will drop to zero with associated hydraulic,
pneumatic, and electrical system non-normal indications. The potential
for further damage or fire exists.
Engine Severe Damage
decreasing engine N1/N2 and vibration indications on EICAS

vibration/noise from the affected engine, and
yaw (may be rapid)
surge/stall
Confirmed after airborne

by:
seized N1 or
seized N2 or
zero oil pressure
ITT rise
vibration indications on EICAS display
Follow:
procedure and
QRH Engine Fire, Severe Damage or Separation procedure
9.7.4
COMPRESSOR/ENGINE STALL
There are three (3) types of compressor/engine stalls:
1) Single or multiple compressor/engine stalls prior to self
recovery.
2) Multiple compressor/engine stalls requiring pilot action to
recovery.
3) A non-recoverable compressor/engine stall.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 9-10
9.7.4.1
Single/Multiple with Self Recovery

During takeoff a single stall will be followed by a loud bang, yaw,
vibration, and engine instrument fluctuation. The engine normally
recovers so quickly, if no engine monitoring message is received, it may
be difficult to detect which engine stalled. For multiple stalls, the loud
bang, yaw, vibration, engine instrument fluctuation, and ITT increase will
repeat with each stall until self recovery.
9.7.4.2
Multiple Requiring Pilot Action

The loud bang, yaw, vibration, engine instrument fluctuation, and ITT
increase will repeat with each stall until thrust is reduced.
9.7.4.3
Non-Recoverable
The loud bang, yaw, vibration, engine instrument fluctuation, and ITT
increase will repeat with each stall until the engine is shut down or fails.
9.7.4.4
Compressor/Engine Stall Considerations

Multiple compressor/engine stall events increase aircraft handling
difficulty. The magnitude of the symptoms are difficult to simulate and
have distracted crews from flying the aircraft in the past. The loud bang,
yaw, and vibration associated with the stall have been misidentified as
tire failure, a bomb, or more frequently, severe damage.
Compressor/Engine Stalls
loud bang and yaw (may be repetitive)

vibration,
engine instrument fluctuation,
ITT rise, and
flames from inlet and tailpipe
Single/Multiple with Self Recovery
the engine returns to normal or close to normal parameters
Multiple Requiring Pilot Action
Confirmed after airborne

for:
stall symptoms cease when the thrust lever is retarded (ITT

may not decrease immediately)
Non-Recoverable
stall symptoms do not cease until the engine is shut down or
fails
Follow:
Original 29AUG2005
procedure and
QRH Engine Fire, Severe Damage or Separation procedure
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
9.7.5
PAGE 9-11
ENGINE FAILURE RECOGNITION

An engine failure due to turbine failure or other internal causes at or after
V1 will initially affect yaw much like a crosswind. Vibration and noise from
the affected engine may be apparent and the onset of the yaw may be
rapid.
9.7.5.1
Engine Failure Callout

The first pilot recognizing the engine failure will make the callout Engine
Failure, but will not identify the engine.
9.7.6
THRUST REQUIREMENTS
NOTE
The PF will continue the takeoff roll and if an assumed temperature (Flex
thrust) has been used for takeoff, the ATTCS adjusts for loss of thrust.
The PM verifies this compensation by verifying T/O-1 RSV is displayed
on the EICAS.
9.7.7
Engine-out takeoff performance

meets or exceeds required climb
gradients even at FLEX thrust settings.
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
PRIOR TO LIFTOFF
To counter the thrust asymmetry due to an engine failure between V1
and liftoff, maintain directional control by smoothly applying rudder
proportionally to thrust decay; thereby, maintaining the desired ground
track. Use aileron to keep wings level during the liftoff. Anticipate
additional rudder displacement when the nosewheel leaves the runway.
9.7.8
ROTATION
At VR, the PM will callout Rotate. The PF will rotate with one continuous
motion at a rate slightly less than for a normal takeoff, or approximately
2 per second. After liftoff continue the rotation rate as follows:
If....
OPS-07A
Then....
the flight director is operative...
fly the flight director pitch commands.
the flight director is inoperative...
fly a maximum deck angle limited to 8.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 9-12
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL AFTER LIFTOFF

The first indication of engine
failure will be a yaw towards
the failed engine. If an engine
failure occurs after liftoff,
apply rudder in the direction
the control wheel is displaced.
9.7.10
NOTE
9.7.9
Inflight, correct input will approximate the leveling of the control

wheel.
INITIAL CLIMB
A.
When safely airborne, with a positive rate of climb on the VSI; the
PM will callout, Positive Rate and the PF will command Gear Up.
B.
When time and conditions permit, the PM will notify ATC.
C.
When at or above 400 feet AFE, the PF will
- fly the runway heading or

- call for the appropriate FD roll mode to comply with airport specific
Engine Failure - Takeoff procedure, if published.
9.7.10.1
Ground Track Consideration
If an engine failure occurs after turning from the runway centerline, or the
Engine Failure - Takeoff ground track, the crew must determine the
safest lateral flightpath. As a guide, the closer the aircraft is to the
runway, the more likely the extended runway centerline or Engine
Failure Takeoff ground track is the safest lateral path. However, as
altitude increases and ATC/departure procedure turns are accomplished,
other lateral flightpaths may be the safer option.
9.7.11
ACCELERATION AND CLEAN-UP

A.
At Engine Out acceleration altitude, the PF will
- call for Flight Level Change, VFS,

- accelerate, and
- retract the flaps on schedule.
B.
The PM will select the proper flap setting when requested.
C.
If the flaps are extended beyond Flaps 2, the Flap Limit Speed may
be lower than VFS. In that event after each flap retraction, the PM
must check the Selected Speed Bug is set either to the current Flap
Limit Speed or VFS whichever is lower.
D.
At the last flap retraction, the PF will respond Flaps UP and the PM
will retract the flaps. As the flaps are retracted and the aircraft
accelerates, adjust the rudder pedal position to maintain the control
wheel level and apply trim to relieve rudder pedal pressure.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
9.7.11.1
PAGE 9-13
Max Continuous Thrust
At VFS the PM will select CON on MCDU and verify CON is displayed on
the EICAS.
9.7.12
FOLLOW-UP ACTIONS
The PF will then call for the appropriate QRH procedure if immediate
actions apply. If no immediate actions, the captain assigns the PF, and
then accomplishes the QRH procedures.
After the QRH procedures are complete, the PM will accomplish the After
Takeoff Checklist.
9.7.12.1
Altitude
Climb to the assigned/safe altitude at the Flaps UP maneuver speed.

9.7.12.2
Autopilot Usage
The autopilot should be engaged as soon as possible (if available) to

reduce workload but in no case lower than 400 ft. AFE.
9.7.12.3
Notification
The failure or shutdown of an engine inflight must be reported to the

appropriate ATC agency and the controlling dispatcher. ATC and the
controlling dispatcher should be kept informed of the flight progress,
work load permitting. Immediately after landing, the captain will
- call the dispatcher (if not previously done)

- enter the discrepancy in the logbook
- complete an Irregularity Report (IR).
9.7.13
LANDING
When one engine of a two engine aircraft fails or is shut down inflight, a
landing shall be made at the nearest suitable airport.
OPS-07A
Pilot Monitoring - PM
- Engine Failure
(First pilot to recognize
failure)
LOSS OF THRUST
400 AFE
- CON
1500 AFE
- Memory Items
(if applicable)
- Call for Non-Normal
Checklist
- Select FLCH
- Set Selected Speed Bug to VFS
- If Flap Limit Speed is less than VFS
- Check Airspeed, select requested flap setting
- Flaps ___
- If Flap Limit Speed is less than VFS
- Accomplish Memory Items

- Accomplish Non-Normal
Checklist
- Select CON on MCDU

- Verify CON on EICAS
VFS
and
Flaps/Slats
Retracted
- Flight Level Change, VFS

- Accelerate to VFS
- Flaps __
- Retract flaps on schedule
(F Bug or greater)
- Flaps Up
ACCELERATION
ALTITUDE
(Normally 1000 AFE)
- Position Gear Lever Up

- Gear Up
- Positive Rate
- Rotate
VR
- Gear Up
- Maintain FD
pitch command
for V2-V2+10
- Rotate to FD
pitch command
- Autopilot On (if desired)

- HDG or FMS NAV
9.8
- Engine Failure
(First pilot to recognize
failure)
Pilot Flying - PF
PAGE 9-14
ERJ-170 STANDARD
LOSS OF THRUST AT OR ABOVE V1 PROFILE
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
9.9
PAGE 9-15
LOSS OF THRUST AT OR ABOVE V1 ACTIONS &

CALLOUTS
Loss of Thrust At or Above V1

Trigger
Loss of thrust
PF
PM
First pilot recognizing engine failure

Engine Failure
Verify TO-1 RSV
VR
Rotate
Rotate to F/D commanded
attitude
After liftoff

VSI
Positive Rate
Gear Up
Maintain FD commanded attitude
to maintain V2 to V2 +10
At or above
400 ft. AFE (or
altitude as
specified on
applicable
route manual
Engine Failure - Takeoff
procedure
Gear Up
Position gear lever up
Monitor speed and altitude
Comply with airport specific Engine Failure - Takeoff procedure (if

published); otherwise, fly runway heading
Autopilot On (if desired)
HDG or FMS NAV
Select autopilot ON when
requested
Select HDG or FMS NAV
Advise ATC, when able
Climbing
through
Engine Out
Acceleration
Altitude
Flap retraction schedule
Flight Level Change, VFS

Reduce Pitch and accelerate to
VFS
Select FLCH
Set Speed Bug to VFS
VFS, set Selected Speed Bug to
be equal to the Flap Limit Speed.
Check airspeed
Check airspeed
Flaps __
(Retract flaps at or above F Bug)
Check airspeed
Flaps UP
Flaps ___
Select Flaps __
Check airspeed
VFS, set Selected Speed Bug to
be equal to the Flap Limit Speed.
Otherwise, set the Selected
Speed Bug to VFS
Flaps UP
Select Flaps UP
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 9-16
Loss of Thrust At or Above V1 (Continued)

Trigger
At VFS
PF
PM
CON
Climb at VFS speed to assigned/
safe altitude
Above 1500
AFE
Select CON on MCDU

Verify CON displayed on EICAS
Accomplish appropriate non-normal checklist followed by the After Takeoff

Checklist
End of Chapter
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 10-1
Chapter 10: Climb, Cruise & Descent

10.1 Climb Speed and Angle ......................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1
Climb Speed Determination .................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
10.1.5
Maneuvering ........................................................................................................ 10-1

Speed Schedule .................................................................................................... 10-1
Climb Thrust ........................................................................................................ 10-1
Maximum Angle Climb ....................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 After Takeoff Checklist ....................................................................................... 10-2

10.2.1
General .................................................................................................. 10-2
10.2.1.1 Who ............................................................................................................. 10-2
10.2.1.2 When ........................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.2
PFs Flow Pattern ................................................................................................. 10-2
10.2.2.1 PFs Abbreviated Flow ............................................................................... 10-2
10.2.2.2 PFs Expanded Flow ................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.3
PMs Flow Pattern .............................................................................................. 10-2
10.2.3.1 PMs Abbreviated Flow .............................................................................. 10-3
10.2.3.2 PMs Expanded Flow .................................................................................. 10-3
10.2.4
After Takeoff Checklist ....................................................................................... 10-3
10.3 Passing 10,000 feet MSL ..................................................................................... 10-4

10.3.1
General .................................................................................................. 10-4
10.3.1.1 Who ............................................................................................................. 10-4
10.3.1.2 When ........................................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.2
PFs Flow Pattern ................................................................................................. 10-4
10.3.2.2 PFs Expanded Flow ................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.3
PMs Flow Pattern ............................................................................................... 10-4
10.3.4
Seat Belt Sign ....................................................................................................... 10-5
10.4 Climbing Through Transition Altitude ................................................................ 10-6

10.4.1
General .................................................................................................. 10-6
10.4.1.1 Who ............................................................................................................. 10-6
10.4.1.2 When ........................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.2
PFs Flow Pattern ................................................................................................ 10-6
10.4.2.2 PFs Flow .................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4.3
PMs Flow Pattern .............................................................................................. 10-7
10.5 Cruise ................................................................................................................... 10-8

10.5.1
Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 10-8
10.5.1.1 Flight Progress ............................................................................................ 10-8
10.5.1.2 Fuel ............................................................................................................. 10-8
10.5.2
Enroute Position Reports ..................................................................................... 10-8
10.5.3
Altitude/Routing Changes .................................................................................... 10-8
10.5.4
Arrival Information Available ............................................................................. 10-8
10.5.5
Optimum Descent Point ..................................................................................... 10-8
10.6 Descent ................................................................................................................. 10-9

10.6.1
Descent Speed Schedule ....................................................................... 10-9
10.6.2
OPS-07A
Rate ...................................................................................................................... 10-9

PAGE TOC 10-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
10.6.2.1 Descent Ratio .............................................................................................. 10-9

10.6.2.2 Factors ......................................................................................................... 10-9
10.6.3
Configuration ....................................................................................................... 10-9
10.6.4
Planning ............................................................................................................... 10-9
10.6.5
In-Range Report ................................................................................................. 10-10
10.6.6
Approach Briefing ............................................................................................. 10-10
10.6.6.1 PM Duties ................................................................................................ 10-10
10.6.6.2 PF Duties .................................................................................................. 10-10
10.7 Descent Checklist .............................................................................................. 10-11

10.7.1
General ................................................................................................ 10-11
10.7.1.1 Who ........................................................................................................... 10-11
10.7.1.2 When ......................................................................................................... 10-11
10.7.2
PFs Flow Pattern .............................................................................................. 10-11
10.7.2.1 PFs Abbreviated Flow ............................................................................. 10-11
10.7.2.2 PFs Expanded Flow ................................................................................. 10-11
10.7.3
PMs Flow Pattern ............................................................................................ 10-12
10.7.3.1 PMs Abbreviated Flow ............................................................................ 10-12
10.7.3.2 PMs Expanded Flow ................................................................................ 10-13
10.7.4
Setting Non-Normal Landing Speeds ................................................................ 10-16
10.7.5
Passing through the transition level ................................................................... 10-16
10.7.6
Descent Checklist .............................................................................................. 10-16
10.8 Descending Through 10,000 feet MSL .............................................................. 10-17

10.8.1
General ............................................................................................................... 10-17
10.8.1.1 Who ........................................................................................................... 10-17
10.8.1.2 When ......................................................................................................... 10-17
10.8.2
PFs Flow Pattern ............................................................................................... 10-17
10.8.3
PMs Flow Pattern ............................................................................................. 10-17
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-1
Chapter 10
Climb, Cruise & Descent
10.1
CLIMB SPEED AND ANGLE
10.1.1
CLIMB SPEED DETERMINATION

Maintain flaps-up maneuvering speed until clear of obstacles or above
minimum crossing altitudes. If there are no altitude or airspeed
restrictions, accelerate to the desired climb speed schedule.
10.1.2
MANEUVERING
If considerable maneuvering is required during the departure, the flapsup maneuvering speed is recommended until the maneuvering phase is
complete and the aircraft is en route toward the destination.
10.1.3
SPEED SCHEDULE
The following climb speed schedule presents four (4) climb speeds
above 10,000 ft. The speed selected would be determined by the
operational requirements.
Up to 10,000 feet MSL
10,000 feet and above
10.1.4
250 KIAS
Long Range
250 KIAS/M 0.70
Normal
290 KIAS/M 0.74
Alternate
290 KIAS/M 0.70
High Speed
310 KIAS/M 0.77
CLIMB THRUST
Set climb thrust by selecting FLCH on the Guidance Panel. The FADEC
will maintain the correct thrust setting automatically throughout the flight.
10.1.5
MAXIMUM ANGLE CLIMB

Maximum angle climb speed is normally used for obstacle clearance or
to reach a specified altitude/flight level in a minimum distance. Maximum
angle climb speed varies with gross weight and can be referenced by
using the pitch limiter indicator (PLI) as a reference.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-2
10.2
AFTER TAKEOFF CHECKLIST
10.2.1
GENERAL
This flow and checklist is used to configure the aircraft for climb/cruise.
10.2.1.1
Who
Initiated by the PF; PM reads and accomplishes silently; however

verbalizes After Takeoff Checklist Complete.
10.2.1.2
When
After flap/slat retraction, accelerating to climb speed, and prior to 10,000

feet MSL.
10.2.2
PFS FLOW PATTERN

No flow pattern.
10.2.2.1
PFs Abbreviated Flow
No flow. Maintain aircraft control.

10.2.2.2
PFs Expanded Flow
10.2.3
PMS FLOW PATTERN
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
10.2.3.1
PAGE 10-3
PMs Abbreviated Flow
After slat/flap retraction, accelerating to climb speed, and prior to 10,000

feet MSL.
J
J
J
J
10.2.3.2
Landing Gear Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP

SLAT/FLAP Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP, 0 detent
APU
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As required
Accomplish After Takeoff Checklist silently; verbalize After

Takeoff Checklist Complete
PMs Expanded Flow
J Landing Gear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP
LDG GEAR Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP
J Flaps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP
SLAT/FLAP Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Up, 0 detent
J APU - - - - - - - - - - OFF, unless operationally required

10.2.4

1. Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP
2. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP
3. After Takeoff Checklist . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-4
10.3
PASSING 10,000 FEET MSL
10.3.1
GENERAL
This flow is used to configure the aircrafts external lights for cruise and
notify the flight attendants the flight is leaving the sterile flight deck
environment. There is no checklist.
10.3.1.1
Who
Initiated by the PM.

10.3.1.2
When
Leaving 10,000 feet MSL.
10.3.2
PFS FLOW PATTERN

No flow pattern, only altitude callout made.
10.3.2.1
After climbing through 10,000 feet MSL.
J Call out 10,000 feet

10.3.2.2
PFs Expanded Flow
J Altitude Callout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10,000 feet

Refer to FOM paragraph Altitude Callouts.
10.3.3
PMS FLOW PATTERN
10.3.3.1
PM Passing After climbing through 10,000 feet MSL.

J STERILE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -OFF
J NO ELEC DEVICES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -OFF
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
10.3.3.2
PAGE 10-5
PMs Expanded Flow
NOTE

crew.
NOTE

flight crew.
J STERILE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
Notifies the flight attendants the aircraft is leaving the sterile flight deck
environment.
J NO ELEC DEVICES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF

SEAT BELT SIGN
When appropriate, the
captain will leave the FSTN
BELTS sign ON or turn it OFF
with an applicable
announcement.
NOTE
10.3.4
121.317(b)
When the Captain is the PF, he/she

should direct the PM to turn the sign off
and make the applicable announcement.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-6
10.4
CLIMBING THROUGH TRANSITION ALTITUDE
10.4.1
GENERAL
This flow is used to set the altimeters to 29.92.
10.4.1.1
Who
Initiated by the PF.

10.4.1.2
When
Passing the transition altitude (e.g., 18,000 feet MSL).
10.4.2
PFS FLOW PATTERN
10.4.2.1
Upon climbing through the transition altitude (e.g.,18,000 feet MSL.)
J PFD Baro - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STD

J IESS Baro - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STD
J 18,000 Standard
10.4.2.2
PFs Flow
J PFD Baro - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STD

Selects the standard reference barometric pressure of 29.92 in hg.
J IESS Baro - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STD

Ensure inches of mercury displayed to prevent

altitude deviations and possible conflicts.
J Altitude Callout - - - - - - - - - - - - 18,000 Standard

Crosscheck STD set in both PFDs and IESS.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
10.4.3
PAGE 10-7
PMS FLOW PATTERN
S
F
10.4.3.1
Upon climbing through the transition altitude (e.g.,18,000 feet MSL.)
J Baro- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STD
J PFDs and IESS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Crosscheck
10.4.3.2
PMs Expanded Flow
J PFD Baro - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STD


J PFDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Crosscheck
Crosscheck STD set in both PFDs and IESS.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-8
10.5
CRUISE
10.5.1
MONITORING
Both pilots ensure monitoring responsibilities are adhered to.
10.5.1.1
Flight Progress
A.
Both pilots monitor flight plan vs. actual operation.
B.
Update ETA as soon as it varies from planned arrival time by 3

minutes.
C.
10.5.1.2
Contact dispatcher when actual operation differs from plan and

causes arrival weight or fuel to be of concern.
Fuel
The PM normally performs fuel burn checks (actual vs. planned) as

necessary.
10.5.2
ENROUTE POSITION REPORTS

The PM normally make enroute position reports as necessary (FOM).
10.5.3
ALTITUDE/ROUTING CHANGES
Any significant changes should be coordinated with the dispatcher to
utilize all the information/equipment available.
10.5.4
ARRIVAL INFORMATION AVAILABLE

As soon as adequate arrival information is available...
10.5.5
OPTIMUM DESCENT POINT

PF
Determine descent point
PM
Monitor descent point
Accomplish Descent Flow Patterns
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
10.6
PAGE 10-9
DESCENT
10.6.1
DESCENT SPEED SCHEDULE

The following descent speed schedule presents three (3) descent
speeds above 10,000 feet. The speed selected would be determined by
operational requirements.
Long Range
10,000 feet and above

Below 10,000 feet MSL
10.6.2
250 KIAS/M 0.70
Normal
290 KIAS/M 0.74
High Speed
310 KIAS/M 0.77
250 KIAS
RATE
When a flight reports leaving an altitude, the PF maintains a descent rate
consistent with ATC requirements and fuel conservation procedures.
10.6.2.1
Descent Ratio
The distance required for the descent is approximately three (3) miles
per 1,000 feet (3 to 1).
As a guide, in level flight without speed brakes, it takes approximately
ten (10) seconds and one (1) mile to decelerate each ten (10) knots of
airspeed.
10.6.2.2
Factors
From a typical cruise altitude, the top-of-descent (TOD) point should be

advanced two (2) miles for each ten (10) knots of tailwind during the
descent, and by two (2) miles for each 1,000 feet of anti-ice use.
10.6.3
CONFIGURATION
Normally, descent is initiated with partial cruise thrust, at high altitude, in
a clean configuration (no speed brakes). If necessary, use speed brakes
or airspeed to correct the descent profile. For small adjustments, allow
the airspeed to vary initially, using the speed brakes at a lower altitude if
further speed adjustments are required.
10.6.4
PLANNING
Good descent planning is necessary to arrive at the desired altitude and
correct speed & configuration. Plan all descents to arrive at traffic pattern
altitude at flaps-up maneuvering speed about
- twelve (12) miles out for a straight-in approach or

- eight (8) miles out for an abeam approach.
A good crosscheck is to be at 10,000 feet AFE, thirty (30) miles from the
airport at 250 KIAS.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-10
IN-RANGE REPORT
The PM normally
accomplishes this report
approximately ten (10)
minutes before landing to
inform the station the aircraft
is in the local area.
10.6.6
NOTE
10.6.5
The in-range reports must be completed

prior to commencing Sterile Cockpit below
10,000 feet.
APPROACH BRIEFING
A.
After the arrival information becomes available, the PM should load

the approach in the FMS, enter the landing V-speeds and configure
their Display Control Panel (DCP) and notify the PF when they are
finished.
B.
The PF will transfer control of the aircraft to the PM, review the FMS,
configure their DCP and brief the approach as outlined in the FOM.
C.
Once the approach briefing is complete, the PF will resume control

of the aircraft.
10.6.6.1
PM Duties
Step
PM
Arrival Information available-
10.6.6.2
Load the anticipated runway and instrument approach on the FMS

ARRIVAL page 1/1
In the event an ILS approach has been selected, load the localizer
identifier code in the FMS PROG page 1/1 at LSK 5L and 5R
Determine and load the VREF, VAPP, VAC and VFS on the FMS
LANDING page 3/3
Set the inbound course for the approach and the BARO minimums
using the DCP
Advise the PF, Setup complete.
PF Duties
Step
PF
PM Advises, Setup complete -
Transfer control of the aircraft to the PM
Verify the correct runway and instrument approach has been

loaded in the FMS
Review the landing V-speeds in the FMS
Set the inbound course for the approach and the BARO minimums
using the DCP
Brief the approach in accordance with the FOM procedure
Resume control of the aircraft from the PM
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
10.7
PAGE 10-11
DESCENT CHECKLIST
10.7.1
GENERAL
This flow and checklist is used to set up the aircraft for a descent and
approach.
10.7.1.1
Who
Initiated by the PF; read by the PM.

10.7.1.2
When
After descending through FL 180 and while the workload is at a

minimum.
10.7.2
PFS FLOW PATTERN
F
Shoulder Harness
10.7.2.1
Upon receiving the destination weather and after the PM has completed
his flow
J Approach Briefing
Passing through the transition level
J
J
J
J
121.311(h)
10.7.2.2
18,000
Altimeter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
Call for Descent Checklist
PFs Expanded Flow
Upon receiving the weather and after the PM has completed his flow
J Approach Briefing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Complete
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-12
Upon passing through the transition level
J Altitude Callout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 18,000

J Altimeter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
BARO SET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- Turn to select destination altimeter setting.

J Shoulder Harness - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
121.311(h)
PMS FLOW PATTERN
10.7.3
Shoulder Harness
F
10.7.3.1
Approximately 100 NM out and before Top of Descent (TOD)
J Wx - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Obtain
J MCDU - - - - - - - - - - - - - Determine landing weight
J Landing Data - - - - -VREF, VAP, VAC, VFS, via the MCDU
Passing through the transition level
J FSTN BELTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
J Altimeter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
OPS-07A
121.317(b)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-13
J Arrival Announcement
121.311(h)
After accomplishing flow and after PF calls Descent Checklist
J Accomplish Descent Checklist

10.7.3.2
PMs Expanded Flow
Approximately 100 NM out and before top of descent (TOD)
J Wx - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Obtain
J MCDU- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
PERF DATA Page 1/3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- Determine landing weight.

- Confirm landing weight is acceptable for the landing runway.
- If LAHSO is in effect, determine whether or not LAHSO can be
accepted.
LANDING Speeds - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Set
LANDING page 1/3,

enter destination
surface wind (i.e.,
270/15, etc.) in 2R.
NOTE
- PERF Function Key - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Press

- LANDING Line Select Key (4R) - - - - - - - - - - Press
- (Optional) On
This optional step displays headwind/tailwind and crosswind on

LANDING page 2/3 line 2R if landing
runway is designated.
Select LANDING page 3/3:

Step
PM
Enter the VREF speed:

1
VREF (1L) ...................................................................... Set

a. Target airspeed at 50 ft. AGL over landing threshold. 1.23VS
If ICE PROT SPEED
EICAS message....
IS NOT displayed...
IS displayed...
OPS-07A
Then....
VREF from NO ICE ACCRETION data
card
VREF from ICE data card
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-14
Step
PM
Enter the following speed:
VAP (2L) ........................................................................ Set

a. Approach Speed. VREF (from Step 1 above) + wind additive.
b. Standard callouts are based on VAP
Wind Additive
Add one-half (1/2) of the reported steady headwind component
plus the full gust increment.
Minimum
5 KIAS
Maximum
Flaps 5 - 20 knots
Flaps FULL - 15 knots
Do not apply wind corrections for tailwinds.

Steady Headwind
The steady additive may be bled off as the airplane approaches
touchdown.
One half of the reported steady headwind component can be
estimated by using:
- 50% for a direct headwind,
- 35% for a 45 degree crosswind,
- 0 for a direct crosswind, and interpolation in between.
Headwind components may also be determined from the:
- QRH Ops Data Section WIND COMPONENTS Table, or
- LANDING page 2/3 line 2R.
Gust Increment
Maintain the gust additive until touchdown.
Example 2
Aircraft weighs 71,000 lbs. for a Flaps 5 landing on runway 36.
With the Flip Card VREF = 130, for...
- a normal approach with winds calm, VAP = 135
- an approach with STALL PROT ICE SPEED annunciated with
winds 090 @ 15, set VAP = 145
Step
PM
Enter the following speeds:
VAC (3L) ........................................................................ Set

a. Approach climb speed. Single engine/go around climb speed.
Example 3
Aircraft weighs 71,000 lbs. for a Flaps 5 landing.
From Speed & Performance Flip Cards
- Set VAC = 155
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Step
PAGE 10-15
PM
Enter the following speeds:
VFS (1R)........................................................................ Set

a. Final segment speed. Speed to be attained during final segment climb
with gear and flaps retracted. 1.25 VS with 40 bank.
Example 4
Aircraft weighs 71,000 lbs. for a Flaps 5 landing. From Speed &
Performance Flip Cards
- Set VFS = 187
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-16
10.7.4
SETTING NON-NORMAL LANDING SPEEDS

NOTE
For a non-normal situation,

In case of multiple non-normals dicwhen the procedure dictates a
tating modified VREFs, use the nonmodified VREF (e.g., VREF
normal with the highest VREF.
FULL + 15 KIAS, VREF FULL +
30 KIAS, etc.) for an
approach flown with STALL PROT ICE SPEED annunciated, the VREF
will be determined using the ICE data card.
10.7.5
PASSING THROUGH THE TRANSITION LEVEL
J FSTN BELTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
J Altimeter- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
BARO SET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Select
- Turn to select destination altimeter setting.

- Set destination altimeter.
J Arrival Announcement - - - - - - - - - - - - Accomplish

10.7.6
121.311(h)
DESCENT CHECKLIST
1. Shoulder Harness. . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

2. FSTN BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
3. Altimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . __.__ SET
Verify __.__ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set
The captain is responsible for checking the left PFD and IESS
The first office is responsible for checking the right PFD
4. Landing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET

5. EICAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
EICAS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
6. Approach Briefing . . . . . . . . . . . [PF] . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE

7. Descent Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
OPS-07A
121.311(h)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
10.8
PAGE 10-17
DESCENDING THROUGH 10,000 FEET MSL
10.8.1
GENERAL
This flow is used to configure the aircrafts external lights for a descent
and notify the flight attendants the flight is entering the sterile flight deck
environment.
10.8.1.1
Who
Initiated by the PM.

10.8.1.2
When
NOTE
Leaving 10,000 feet MSL.
10.8.2
The crew should consider performaing this flow earlier than 10,000 MSL
when operating at high elevation airports.
PFS FLOW PATTERN

No flow pattern, only altitude callout made.
10.8.2.1
Just prior to descending through 10,000 feet MSL.
J 10,000 feet
10.8.2.2
PFs Expanded Flow
J Altitude Callout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10,000 feet

10.8.3
PMS FLOW PATTERN

No checklist, only flow accomplished.
S
F
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 10-18
10.8.3.1
Just prior to descending through 10,000 feet MSL.

J STERILE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
J NO ELEC DEVICES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
10.8.3.2
121.306(a)
PMs Expanded Flow
NOTE

crew.
NOTE

flight crew.
J STERILE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
Notifies the flight attendants the aircraft is entering the sterile flight deck
environment.
J NO ELEC DEVICES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON
End of Chapter
OPS-07A
121.306(a)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 11-1
Chapter 11: Approach

11.1 Visual Approach .................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1
Position Orientation & Energy Management ....................................................... 11-1
11.1.2
Three to One Descent Profile ............................................................................... 11-1
11.1.3
Energy Management Factors ............................................................................... 11-1
11.1.4
Flap Settings ........................................................................................................ 11-1
11.1.5
Normal Visual Approach Procedures .................................................................. 11-1
11.1.5.1 Downwind Leg or 5 NM Final ................................................................... 11-2
11.1.5.2 Base Leg or 3 NM Final ............................................................................. 11-2
11.1.5.3 Final Approach ........................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.5.4 Landing Approach Glide Path .................................................................... 11-2
11.1.6
Visual Approach Profile ..................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.7
Normal Visual Approach Actions and Callouts .................................................. 11-4
11.1.8
Engine-Out Visual Approach ............................................................................... 11-5
11.2 Instrument Procedures ......................................................................................... 11-6

11.2.1
General .................................................................................................. 11-6
11.2.1.1 Tune, Identify, and Monitor ........................................................................ 11-6
11.2.1.2 Actions and Callouts ................................................................................... 11-6
11.2.2
Planning ............................................................................................................... 11-6
11.2.3
Aircraft Approach Category ................................................................................ 11-6
11.2.4
Contact Approaches ............................................................................................. 11-7
11.2.5
Determining Decision Altitude/Height ................................................................ 11-7
11.2.6
Side-Step Maneuver ............................................................................................. 11-7
11.2.6.1 Definition .................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.6.2 Landing Minimums ..................................................................................... 11-7
11.2.7
Engine Failure On Final Approach ...................................................................... 11-7
11.3 Precision Approach Procedures ........................................................................... 11-8

11.3.1
general ................................................................................................... 11-8
11.3.1.1 ILS (CAT I) ................................................................................................ 11-8
11.3.1.2 LDA (Precision) .......................................................................................... 11-8
11.3.2
Automation .......................................................................................................... 11-8
11.3.3
Alternate ILS Configuration ................................................................................ 11-9
11.3.4
ILS CAT I Actions and Callouts ..................................................................... 11-10
11.3.5
ILS PRM Approach ........................................................................................... 11-11
11.3.5.1 Procedures ................................................................................................. 11-11
11.4 Non-Precision Approach Procedures ................................................................. 11-13

11.4.1
General ................................................................................................ 11-13
11.4.2
Automation ........................................................................................................ 11-13
11.4.3
VOR Approaches ............................................................................................... 11-13
11.4.4
Lateral Guidance Modes ................................................................................... 11-14
11.4.5
Setting Minimums .............................................................................................. 11-14
11.4.6
Descent Profile ................................................................................................... 11-14
11.4.6.1 Calculated VDP ........................................................................................ 11-14
11.4.6.2 Target Vertical Speed ............................................................................... 11-15
11.4.6.3 MDA to Landing ....................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.7
Nonprecision Actions and Callouts ................................................................... 11-16
11.5 GPS Approach Procedures ................................................................................. 11-18

11.5.1
General ................................................................................................ 11-18
11.5.1.1 Jeppesen Approach Plate Terminology .................................................... 11-18
11.5.2
Required Navigational Performance (RNP) ...................................................... 11-18
OPS-07A
PAGE TOC 11-2

11.5.3
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Discontinuing the Approach .............................................................................. 11-19
11.6 CIRCLING APPROACHES .............................................................................. 11-19

11.6.1
General ................................................................................................ 11-19
11.6.2
11.6.3
Weather Minimums ........................................................................................... 11-19

Minimum Descent Altitude ............................................................................... 11-19
11.7 Engine Out Approaches ..................................................................................... 11-19

11.7.1
Procedure ............................................................................................ 11-19
11.8 No Slat / Flap Landing ....................................................................................... 11-20
11.8.1
No Slat / Flap Landing Procedure ....................................................... 11-20
11.8.2
No Slat / Flap Landing Profile ........................................................................... 11-21
11.9 Landing Notification .......................................................................................... 11-22

11.10 Landing Callout ............................................................................................... 11-22
11.10.1 For Instrument and Visual Approaches .............................................. 11-22
11.10.2
11.10.3
Prior to the Landing Callout ........................................................................... 11-22

After the Landing Callout .............................................................................. 11-23
11.11 Landing Checklist ............................................................................................ 11-23

11.11.1 General ................................................................................................ 11-23
11.11.1.1 Who ........................................................................................................... 11-23
11.11.1.2 When ......................................................................................................... 11-23
11.11.2
PFs Flow Pattern ............................................................................................... 11-23
11.11.3
PMs Flow Pattern ............................................................................................. 11-23
11.11.4
Landing Checklist .............................................................................................. 11-24
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-1
Chapter 11
Approach
11.1
VISUAL APPROACH
11.1.1
POSITION ORIENTATION & ENERGY MANAGEMENT

A.
Position orientation and energy management are critical to a

stabilized visual approach. Plan to arrive on the downwind leg, or for
straight-in approaches align with runway approximately 5 miles on
final, at 1,500 feet AFE. Use speedbrakes for minor speed and
vertical speed adjustments, and landing gear for larger adjustments.
B.
Maintain stabilized approach rate of descent and flight parameters.

If unable to maintain a stabilized approach, go around.
11.1.2
THREE TO ONE DESCENT PROFILE

This profile is based on an approximate 300 ft. (AFE) per NM reference,
(3:1 Ratio). For example, 5NM, from touchdown would equate to 1500 ft.
AFE. The objective is to constantly monitor the profile and take actions to
maintain a stabilized approach.
11.1.3
ENERGY MANAGEMENT FACTORS

There are numerous factors such as aircraft weight, weather conditions,
and a pilots comfort zone that will dictate energy management
techniques for each approach. Regardless of the techniques employed,
the decision to go around is not an indication of poor performance, but
rather good judgement.
11.1.4
11.1.5
FLAP SETTINGS
A.
The preferred landing flap setting is Flaps 5 as it requires less power

than Flaps FULL and therefore reduces fuel consumption and
makes the noise footprint smaller.
B.
Flaps FULL should be considered when the runway braking

conditions are less than FAIR.
NORMAL VISUAL APPROACH PROCEDURES

Use the most precise navigation and visual aids available (i.e., select
and monitor an ILS to the landing runway). To assist in situational
awareness, enter the best available approach to the landing runway into
the FMS. If an approach is not available, enter the landing runway, then
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-2
create an intercept leg to the runway with the final approach course
heading. Autopilot and flight director use is at pilot discretion.
11.1.5.1
Downwind Leg or 5 NM Final
A.
When entering the downwind fly at an altitude of 1,500 feet AFE and
call for Flaps 1 at approximately 200 knots.
B.
Reaching midfield on the downwind, call for Flaps 2 at

approximately 180 knots.
C.
Abeam the threshold, call for Flaps 3 at approximately 160 knots.
A.
Base Leg or 3 NM Final

When turning the base
leg, extend the landing
gear, and call for the
Landing Checklist.
NOTE
11.1.5.2
If the approach pattern must be

extended, delay extending gear and
selecting Flaps 3 until approaching
the normal visual approach glide
path.
B.
Prior to turning final,

select landing flaps. The
PF will call for Flaps 5, and if desired, Flaps FULL, slow to VAPP and
complete the Landing Checklist.
C.
Landing Flaps should be selected prior to descending below 1,000

AFE.
11.1.5.3
Final Approach
Roll-out on runway centerline and maintain the appropriate approach

speed. Make thrust changes as required to hold approach speed and
desired rate of descent. Re-trim the stabilizer to maintain zero elevator
forces on final. Stabilize the airplane on the selected approach airspeed
with a constant rate of descent between 600 FPM and 800 FPM on the
desired glide-path, in-trim.
11.1.5.4
Landing Approach Glide Path
The recommended landing approach glide path is approximately 2 to

3. Once the final approach is established, the aircraft configuration
remains fixed and only small adjustments need to be made to the glidepath, approach speed, and trim. This results in the same approach
profile under all conditions regardless of weather.
OPS-07A
OPS-07A
GEAR DOWN
FLAPS 3
TURNING BASE
2 nm
2 nm
NOTES:
* PF MAY SELECT SPEED ON A/P, SHOULD
CALL
FOR
SPEED
WHEN
HAND
FLYING
CALL
FOR
SPEED
WHEN
HAND
FLYING
. .
REMAINATBELOW
200 200
KIASKIAS
IN WHEN
****REMAIN
OR BELOW
FLYING IN CLASS C AND D AIRSPACE.
GO
AROUND
MISSED
APPROACH
- GO AROUND
PUSH TO/GA SWITCH
- TOGA
GO AROUND THRUST
PUSH
TO/GA ATTITUDE
BUTTON
- GO
AROUND
FLAPS
OR FLAPS
4
- SET
GO2
AROUND
FLAPS
- POSITIVE
/ GEAR
UP POSITIVE RATE)
(AFTER
PM CALLS
GEAR UPRATE
- COMPLETE
GO
AROUND
PROCEDURE
ADVISE ATC
VISUAL APPROACH PROFILE
700 500 FT
BEFORE LANDING CHECKLIST
1500 FT
- SET SPEED 160*
- F2LAPS 3
FLAPS
BASE LEG
- CHECK AIRSPEED (<180 OR 165 KIAS)
- FLAPS 5 OR FLAPS FULL
- SET VAPP
BASE
- BELOW THE LINE
LANDING FLAPS
TURNING BASE
- GEAR DOWN
- LANDING CHECKLIST
ABEAM THRESHOLD
- CTHRESHOLD
HECK AIRSPEED (<200 KIAS)
ABEAM
11.1.6
M170AOM980009A.DGN
DOWNWIND LEG
ENTERING DOWNWIND
- CHECK AENTERING
IRSPEED** (DOWNWIND
<215 KIAS)
- CHECK AIRSPEED** (<230 KIAS)
- FLAPS 2
- FLAPS 1
FLAPS 1
- SET SPEED 180*
- SET SPEED 200*
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-3
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-4
11.1.7
NORMAL VISUAL APPROACH ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
Normal Visual Approach

Trigger
Downwind or
5 NM Final
PF
PM
Check Airspeed
Flaps 1
Set/request speed bug (not
less than green dot)
Check Airspeed
Flaps 1
Select Flaps 1
Set speed if requested
Midfield
Downwind
Check Airspeed
Flaps 2
Check Airspeed
Flaps 2
Select Flaps 2
Abeam
Threshold
Check Airspeed
Flaps 3
Check Airspeed
Flaps 3
Select Flaps 3
Turning
Base
Check Airspeed
Gear down, Landing
Checklist
Check Airspeed
Gear Down
Position Gear Lever DN
Start Landing Checklist
On Base or
3 NM Final
Check airspeed
Flaps 5 or
Flaps FULL
less than green dot).
Below the line
1000 feet AFE
Check Airspeed
Flaps 5 or
Flaps FULL
Select Flaps 5 or Flaps FULL
Complete Landing Checklist
1000 Feet
Verify altitude
500 feet AFE
500 Feet,
Verify altitude, speed and sink
rate
BUG ___,
Sink ___
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
11.1.8
PAGE 11-5
ENGINE-OUT VISUAL APPROACH

An ILS approach is recommended for any engine-out approach and
landing. It provides a stable framework and familiar cues for
configuration, deceleration, and descent.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-6
11.2
INSTRUMENT PROCEDURES
11.2.1
GENERAL
The instrument approach begins when the airplane is over the initial
approach fix for the procedure being used and ends when the airplane
either contacts the runway or completes the transition to a missed
approach.
11.2.1.1
Tune, Identify, and Monitor
Navaids must be tuned and identified prior to beginning an instrument

approach. Crosscheck of navigation guidance must occur by both pilots
continually during approaches. If instrument and/or navigation
discrepancies become evident, abandon the approach, climb to the
missed approach altitude but delay required turns until arriving at the
published missed approach point (MAP).
11.2.1.2
Actions and Callouts
Actions and callouts have been created to specify trigger events and
define the callouts and actions required by each pilot during approaches.
They are constructed for training purposes to depict the ideal situation.
However, ATC vectoring, the pilots own navigation, or a particular set of
circumstances may preclude doing things exactly as specified.
Alterations to the ideal must be accomplished when it makes sense.
11.2.2
PLANNING
A.
Each type of approach and each approach to a particular runway,

requires study and coordination
B.
11.2.3
to determine how it fits against the profile,

where should gear and flaps be extended,
when should airspeed be established,
when should timing begin,
how to establish a VDP where required, and
how to identify the MAP (missed approach point)
These are all questions that must be answered before commencing
an approach.
AIRCRAFT APPROACH CATEGORY

A.
Straight-In Approaches Use Category C minimums.

See Operations Specifications C053.
B.
Circling Maneuvers Use Category C unless the approach airspeed

is above 140 KIAS, then apply Category D minima.
See Operations Specifications C075
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
11.2.4
PAGE 11-7
CONTACT APPROACHES
Not authorized.
11.2.5
DETERMINING DECISION ALTITUDE/HEIGHT

CAT I decision altitude is based on the barometric altimeter.
11.2.6
SIDE-STEP MANEUVER
Side-step maneuver is authorized using published side-step minima.
11.2.6.1
Definition
A side-step maneuver is a visual maneuver accomplished by the pilot at

the completion of an instrument approach to permit a straight-in landing
on a parallel runway not more than 1,200 feet to either side of the runway
to which the instrument approach was conducted.
11.2.6.2
Landing Minimums
Landing minimums to the adjacent runway will be higher than the

minimums to the primary runway, but will normally be lower than the
published circling minimums.
If a full procedure turn is required, select flaps 2 prior to the IAF
outbound. Fly the appropriate maneuver speed. Approximately 30
seconds after station/ fix passage, commence procedure turn. A normal
procedure turn outbound leg is 45 seconds to 1 minute. Some procedure
turns are specified by a Procedural Track, as identified by a bold track in
the Jeppesen Manual. These turns must be flown as depicted.
11.2.7
ENGINE FAILURE ON FINAL APPROACH

If an engine fails on final approach with the flaps in the landing
configuration proceed as follows:
The PF should establish, as quickly as possible, the single-engine
approach configuration.
Engine-out approach procedures are identical to those for a twoengine approach, except Flaps 5 is always used for approach and
landing.
If able to complete a stabilized approach from this position,
continue.
If not, carry out a go around.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-8
11.3
PRECISION APPROACH PROCEDURES

11.3.1
GENERAL
The ERJ-170 is authorized to conduct Category I Precision approaches

that provide lateral and vertical guidance to the runway threshold as
described in Operations Specification C053.
11.3.1.1
ILS (CAT I)
ILS precision approach procedures are flown using the APP mode of the
AFCS system.
11.3.1.2
LDA (Precision)
LDA approaches with minimums depicted as a DA(H) are precision

approaches. Set up and fly these LDA approaches with the APP mode
selected.
11.3.2
AUTOMATION
For all precision
If the autopilot is required by this
approaches, if the visibility
section but has been placed in the
is less than 3/4 miles or
MEL list, the flight director MUST
be operative.
4000 RVR, the Autopilot
shall be engaged from at
least the FAF until the Landing callout by the PF.
B.
The PF selects the

respective autopilot, in
preparation of the
approach.
C.
The autopilot must be

disengaged or turned no
lower than 50 feet above the TDZE.
D.
Before initiating an
approach to landing with
the Autopilot engaged,
make sure the correct ILS
identifier has been inserted
on the FMS PROGRESS
PAGE 1/3, Lines 5L and
5R.
NOTE
NOTE
A.
When engaging the APP

mode, be aware of the possibility of false course capture.
Use all means available to
verify correct ILS bearing to
the runway

flight plan.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 Standard Operating Procedures

Bulletin: SOP170-08-03 Date: 01 JUN 2008
Subject: Flight Director requirements for ILS approaches at less than 4000
Bulletin:
Effective Date:
To:
From:
Subject:
Recording-
SOP170-08-03
01 JUN 2008
All SOP Holders
Flight Director requirements for ILS approaches at less than
4000 RVR
Placement-
This bulletin remains in effect until instructed to remove it in a future

revision or bulletin. Be SURE to record the insertion or removal of all
bulletins on the Record of Bulletins page. The following bulletins are
superseded by this bulletin: None.
Amended guidance requiring that any failure of the flight director on ILS
approaches to less than 4000 RVR will require a missed approach.
Insert this bulletin in Chapter 11, after Page 11-8.
Instructions-
This bulletin updates Chapter 11, Page 11-8, Section 11.3.2.
Highlights-
11.3.2
AUTOMATION
A.
For all precision

approaches, if the
visibility is less than 3/4
miles or 4000 RVR, the
Autopilot shall be
engaged from at least the
FAF until the Landing
callout by the PF.
B.
The PF selects the

respective autopilot, in
preparation of the
approach.
C.

disengaged or turned no
lower than 50 feet above the TDZE.
D.
Before initiating an
approach to landing with
the Autopilot engaged,
make sure the correct ILS
identifier has been inserted
on the FMS PROGRESS
PAGE 1/3, Lines 5L and
5R.
SOP
NOTE
If the autopilot is required

by this section but has been
deferred or is inoperative,
the flight director MUST be
operative and utilized
during the approach. Any
failure of the flight director
in this situation must result
in a missed approach, unless
the landing call has been
made by the PF.
When engaging the APP
verify correct ILS bearing to
the runway

flight plan.
Page 1 of 2

Bulletin: SOP170-08-03 Date: 01 JUN 2008
Subject: Flight Director requirements for ILS approaches at less than 4000
Page 2 of 2
SOP
ERJ-170 STANDARD
11.3.3
PAGE 11-9
ALTERNATE ILS CONFIGURATION

It is not uncommon to intercept the localizer and glideslope and be
cleared for the ILS approach while still a considerable distance from the
runway. When it is prudent to delay configuring the aircraft for landing,
the following general guidelines should be used:
Aircraft distance (nm) with reference to the landing runway
Accomplish the procedures associated with
8 NM
1 1/2 dots
6 NM
1/2 dot
5 NM
G/S Intercept
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-10
11.3.4
ILS CAT I ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
ILS CAT I
Trigger
Initial
approach; Airspeed and
glideslope triggers
PF
PM
Check Airspeed
Flaps 1
Check Airspeed
Flaps 1
Select Flaps 1
Check Airspeed
Flaps 2
Check Airspeed
Flaps 2
Select Flaps 2
Check Airspeed
Flaps 3
Check Airspeed
Flaps 3
Select Flaps 3
Cleared for the

approach
Engage APP mode on GP
Localizer Alive
Glideslope Alive
Verify that the FMA annunciations change from white (armed) to green
(captured).
Verify ILS bearing for correct runway orientation.
GS Alive;
1 1/2 dots
Check Airspeed
Gear down, Landing
Checklist
Check Airspeed
Gear Down
Position Gear Lever DN
1/2 dot
Check airspeed
Flaps 5
less than green dot).
If Flaps 5 is the landing flap
setting:
Check Airspeed
Flaps 5
Select Flaps 5
Below the line
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
On GS
PAGE 11-11
Check airspeed
Check airspeed
Flaps FULL
(if desired)
Set/request speed bug to VAPP
Set Missed Approach Altitude
Flaps FULL
Select Flaps Full if requested
Set missed approach altitude
Below the line

1000 Feet
1000 feet AFE

Verify altitude
500 feet AFE
500 Feet,
Verify altitude, speed and sink
rate
100 feet above

DA (H)
BUG ___,
Sink ___
Approaching Minimums
(Auto call out)
Verify Altitude
Divide time between

monitoring instruments and
scanning outside for runway
environment.
DA (H) Runway NOT in

sight
Minimums (Auto call out)

No Contact
Go Around, TOGA, Flaps 2
or 4
Execute go around procedure
OR
DA (H) Runway in sight

<Visual Cues> In Sight
Landing
Disconnect autopilot and land
the aircraft
11.3.5
ILS PRM APPROACH
11.3.5.1
Procedures
If ATIS broadcasts or ATC advises ILS/PRM approaches are in progress

and approach will be accepted, accomplish the following:
Inform ATC on initial contact if unable to meet approach requirements.
Review the Attention All Users Route Manual page. Include the
Minimum Vectoring Altitude (MVA) in the approach briefing.
Captain assumes PF duties prior to commencing approach.
Use autopilot, flight directors and, if available, A/THR.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-12
Leave TCAS in TA/RA. If a Resolution Advisory (RA) is received

without an ATC Traffic Alert, accomplish TCAS Warning RA
procedure.
Review ILS/PRM Breakout Actions and Callouts. If breakout
initiated by:
ATC Traffic Alert - follow controllers vertical and lateral instructions.
ATC Traffic Alert and TCAS RA - follow RA vertical guidance and
controllers lateral instructions.
- If the controllers instructions include vertical guidance that
conflicts with RA vertical guidance, follow RA vertical guidance

while complying with controllers lateral instructions.
- If the controllers instructions include vertical guidance that
conflicts with RA vertical guidance, follow RA vertical guidance

while complying with controllers lateral instructions.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
11.4
PAGE 11-13
NON-PRECISION APPROACH PROCEDURES

11.4.1
GENERAL
The ERJ-170 is authorized to conduct Non-Precision approaches that
provide lateral guidance to the runway threshold as described in
Operations Specification C053.
11.4.2
AUTOMATION
Use of the autopilot reduces crew workload, particularly in respect to
flight path control, and allows more time for management and
monitoring the approach. Also, correct use of the AFCS altitude
select feature can help prevent descents below authorized altitudes.
B.
For all non-precision

If the autopilot is required by this
approaches, if the ceiling is
section but has been placed in the
less than 1000 feet and/or
MEL list, the flight director MUST
be operative.
the visibility is less than 3
miles, the autopilot shall be
engaged from at least the FAF until the Landing callout by the PF.
C.
When the weather is

above 1000 feet and the
visibility is above 3 miles,
the use of the autopilot is
at the pilots discretion.
When the autopilot is not engaged, the

maximum use of the flight director is
strongly encouraged.
D.
The PF selects the

respective autopilot
mode, in preparation of
the approach.
E.

disengaged or turned off
no lower than 50 feet below the MDA.
11.4.3
OPS-07A
NOTE
NOTE
A.
When engaging the NAV

verify correct inbound bearing to the runway
VOR APPROACHES
A.
Since the AFCS (Automatic Flight Control System) is unable to

directly capture and track a VOR signal, the PF will use the LNAV
function through the FMS to fly VOR approaches. This will allow the
AFCS to track the course for the procedure being flown.
B.
Whenever utilizing the LNAV function to fly a VOR based procedure,

the PM must have the raw data (VOR course deviation) displayed
on their PFD as a backup to ensure correct tracking for the
procedure.
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-14
If the LNAV signal differs

from the VOR course
If the aircraft is near or has passed the
FAF the PF should execute a missed
deviation signal, the PF
approach.
may elect to transition to a
HDG mode and continue
the approach by reference to the VOR raw data signal or execute a
missed approach.
NOTE
C.
11.4.4
LATERAL GUIDANCE MODES
Approach
Lateral Guidance
PF Mode
PM Mode
VOR
VORb
LNAV
LOC
LDA (non-precision)
LOCb
LOC (BC)
LNAVa
GPS
a
b
Pink Needles
Green Needles
11.4.5
SETTING MINIMUMS
A.
11.4.6
When the published MDA is not a multiple of 100, round it up to the

next 100(e.g. 620 is rounded up to 700). When setting MDA, set
the adjusted MDA in the altitude window using the GP. This
number now becomes the new MDA for the approach. When an
intermediate step-down altitude(s) is designated, set the GP altitude
to the step-down altitude(s), then to the adjusted MDA. Exception:
LDA with glideslope do not set intermediate altitudes.
DESCENT PROFILE
Once ALT is annunciated on the FMA, set the next lower intermediate
stopped altitude until the MDA is set. The V/S for the descent should be
managed to avoid level flight at intermediate altitudes and/or the MDA
and places the aircraft at the MDA concurrent with the VDP or
calculated VDP. The objective is to arrive at the MDA at a distance from
the runway that permits a normal 3 degree profile without leveling off and
maintain this profile to the TDZ.
11.4.6.1
Calculated VDP
A.
If a non-precision approach does not contain a published VDP, a

calculated VDP can be created for better situational awareness
during the approach. The purpose of determining a calculated VDP
is to validate the aircraft is at the proper position on the approach
corresponding to the point of intercept with a 3 degree profile to the
touchdown zone. There are number of ways to calculate a VDP.
B.
If using DME or FMS mileage the calculated VDP can be derived by

determining the distance to the runway and using the 3 to 1 rule. For
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-15
each one mile from touchdown, the normal glide path is a multiple of
300 feet above the TDZ elevation.
C.
For example, the MDA places you 480 feet above the TDZ
elevation. That means the normal glide path intercepts the MDA
approximately 1.5 miles from the arrival end of the runway. At this
point during the approach you should be at the proper location to
begin normal pitch and thrust adjustment to establish a 3 degree
profile, (700-800 FPM) descent rate.
D.
Alternative Method - Another method is based on timing and the

normal descent rate for a 3 degree glide path. On a normal glide
path the aircraft descends approximately 100 feet every nine (9)
seconds of flight. For example, the MDA places you at 480 feet
above the TDZ elevation. This means that it will take approximately
45 seconds (9 times 5), to descend from the MDA to the landing
runway. In this example, the timing from the FAF and the MAP is two
minutes and twenty seconds, (2:20). By subtracting the 45 seconds
from the 2:20 you have determined the point of intercept for a 3
degree profile to the landing runway. At 1:35 seconds past the FAF
you should be in a position to adjust the pitch and thrust for normal
descent to the landing runway.
11.4.6.2
Target Vertical Speed
A.
Non-precision approaches with a steep descent gradient may

require approximately 1000 fpm to ensure reaching the MDA by the
charted VDP position, or calculated VDP. By 1000 ft. AFE, the
descent rate will be no greater than 1000 fpm. The descent rate
should be stabilized at 700-800 fpm when transitioning to the visual
flight phase.
B.
The FPA vertical guidance mode is the suggested guidance mode

for the descent to MDA. The FPA angle can be selected on the GP
to match the CDP path as depicted on the Jeppesen Airways
Approach Chart. This will provide a stabilized descent down the to
VDP (charted or calculated) and ensure the airplane is positioned
for a stabilized descent from MDA to landing.
11.4.6.3
MDA to Landing
After leveling off at the MDA (the MDA set on the GP is the minimum
altitude for the approach), request the altitude window on the GP to the
missed approach altitude after ALT (green) is displayed on the FMA, or
after the landing callout is made. Maintain the MDA until a 3 degree glide
path can be established to the TDZ. When leaving MDA, the autopilot
must be disengaged. Complete the landing manually.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-16
11.4.7
NONPRECISION ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
Non-Precision Approach
Trigger
PF
PM
Check airspeed
Flaps 1
Check airspeed
Flaps 1
Select Flaps 1
Check airspeed
Initial
approach; Airspeed and
glideslope triggers
Flaps 2
Check airspeed
Flaps 2
Select Flaps 2
Check airspeed
Flaps 3
Check airspeed
Flaps 3
Select Flaps 3
Course Alive
Cleared for the

approach
Verify that the FMA annunciations change from white (armed) to green
(captured).
Check airspeed
Approx. 3 miles
prior to FAF
Gear Down,
Landing Checklist
Check airspeed
Gear Down
Position gear lever DN

Check Airspeed
Flaps 5
Approx. 2 miles
prior to FAF

If Flaps 5 is the landing flap
setting:
Check airspeed
Flaps 5
Select Flaps 5
Below the line

Check airspeed
Approx. 1 mile
prior to FAF
Flaps FULL
(if desired)
Set/request speed bug to VAP
Below the line
Check airspeed
Flaps FULL
Select Flaps Full if requested
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-17
Non-Precision Approach (Continued)

Trigger
1000 feet
above AFE
PF
PM
1000 Feet
Verify altitude
Approaching Minimums
100 feet above
MDA
(Auto callout)
Verify altitude
MDA
Level off, if appropriate

After ALT annunciated on FMA
Set Missed Approach Altitude
At MAP
(Required
visual references not in
sight)

Missed Approach Point,
No Contact
Go Around
See go around procedure
OR
<Visual Cues> In Sight
Before MAP
(Runway environment is in
sight)
Landing
Set Missed Approach Altitude (if not previously
accomplished)
Disconnect autopilot and land

the aircraft
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-18
11.5
GPS APPROACH PROCEDURES
11.5.1
GENERAL
The ERJ-170 is authorized to conduct GPS approaches that provide
lateral guidance to the runway threshold as described in Operations
Specification C063.
NOTE
FMS generated guidance can use a variety of sensor inputs of which

GPS is primary. The GPS approach is a non-precision approach using
an MDA based on LNAV minimums.
A.
B.
11.5.2
Jeppesen Approach Plate Terminology

Jeppesen approach
plates may be labeled
RNAV (GPS), RNAV,
GPS, VOR or GPS, etc.
In other words, if the title
of the approach contains
RNAV or GPS and the
approach is stored in the
nav database, then the
approach may be flown.
NOTE
11.5.1.1
LNAV/VNAV minimums are not

authorized.
Pilot modifications to the stored procedures (to include fixes, altitudes

or angles) are not permitted.
The approach plate in the PRE-APPROACH BRIEFING

INFORMATION section, will list approach requirements. For
instance, GPS or RNP - 0.3 required means that if you have GPS
or no GPS, but your RNP is 0.3 NM or less, you are legal to execute
the approach. DME/DME RNP - 0.3 not authorized means that if
you do not have GPS, you are not authorized to execute the
approach.
REQUIRED NAVIGATIONAL PERFORMANCE (RNP)

Currently, all published GPS approaches have an RNP of 0.3 NM which
is depicted on the approach plate. Selection of the RNP is automatic in
the ERJ-170 Honeywell FMS and will change from the terminal setting of
1.0 to the approach setting of 0.3 two miles from the final approach
fix. RNP is displayed on the PFD HSI and on the PROG page (1).
Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU) is displayed on the PROG page
(1). If the EPU exceeds the RNP, a DGRAD message is displayed on the
PFD HSI. By switching the SRC (the FMS source), the EPU may be
within limits and the approach continued.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
11.5.3
PAGE 11-19
DISCONTINUING THE APPROACH

The approach must be discontinued if any of the following messages
annunciate:
the PFD
NOTE
- the DGRAD message on
The SRC (the FMS source) may be

switched to maintain the EPU within
limits. After accomplishing this
switch and the ensuring DGRAD
message is not annunciated, the
approach may be continued.
- GPS RAIM ABOVE LIMIT, GPS RAIM UNAVAILABLE, or GPS

FAILED messages on the MCDU
11.6
CIRCLING APPROACHES
11.6.1
GENERAL
Republic Airlines is authorized to conduct circling approaches as
described in Operations Specification C075 (d).
11.6.2
11.6.3
WEATHER MINIMUMS
A.
The ceiling must be at least 1,000 feet or the charted minimum

descent altitude for the procedure to be flown, whichever is greater.
B.
The visibility must be at least 3 miles or the charted visibility

minimums for the procedure to be flown, whichever is greater.
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE

The minimum descent altitude shall be no lower than 1,000 AFE or the
charted minimum descent altitude for the procedure to be flown,
whichever is greater.
11.7
11.7.1
ENGINE OUT APPROACHES

PROCEDURE
Engine-out approach procedures are identical to those for a two-engine
approach, except Flaps 5 is always used for approach and landing.
If compliance with the published missed approach procedure is in doubt,
notify ATC prior to commencing the approach.
OPS-07A
PAGE 11-20
11.8
ERJ-170 STANDARD
NO SLAT / FLAP LANDING
11.8.1
NO SLAT / FLAP LANDING PROCEDURE

A.
The (FLAP or SLAT) FAIL checklist should be accomplished as soon

as possible and the aircraft configured as early as possible prior to
commencing the approach.
B.
Always request the longest available runway as landing

performance may be significantly degraded.
C.
The flightcrew should always use the highest level of automation

and all available resources including ILS and VASI/PAPI lighting to
ensure a stabilized approach.
D.
As soon as the aircraft has intercepted the glide path (either

electronic or visual), slow the aircraft to VAPP.
E.
Entering the landing runway into the FMS will provide distance/
altitude guidance for visual approaches using the 300 foot per
nautical mile rule.
OPS-07A
OPS-07A
TURNING BASE
GEAR DOWN
BASE
6.5 nm
4 nm
THRUST LEVELS IDLE
OVER THE THRESHOLD
PUSH TO/GA SWITCH

GO AROUND THRUST
GO AROUND ATTITUDE
POSITIVE RATE / GEAR UP
COMPLETE GO AROUND PROCEDURE
MISSED APPROACH
NO SLAT / FLAP LANDING PROFILE
1500 FT
CHECKLIST
LANDING
BEFORE LANDING
CHECKLIST
1500 FT
ABEAM THRESHOLD
11.8.2
70AOM980024B.DGN
ENTERING DOWNWIND
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-21
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-22
LANDING NOTIFICATION
After selecting gear down, the
PM will give the two (2) high/
lo chime signal to signal to the
flight attendants that landing
is imminent.
NOTE
11.9
The flight attendants will assume

their landing brace position upon
hearing the chime. The brace can be
uncomfortable to hold for long periods of time.
11.10 LANDING CALLOUT

11.10.1
FOR INSTRUMENT AND VISUAL APPROACHES
The PF may call Landing when:
- the aircraft is cleared to land

- the aircraft is in position to land safely, and
- the runway environment will remain in sight until touchdown.
11.10.2
PRIOR TO THE LANDING CALLOUT
All approach callouts will be made in accordance with the procedures

outlined in this manual. The PM will callout any visual cues associated
with the runway (e.g., strobe/approach lights, threshold location -left/
right/ahead) until the PF calls out Landing.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
11.10.3
PAGE 11-23
AFTER THE LANDING CALLOUT
The PM will continue to monitor instruments and call out any deviations
that would prevent a safe landing, and revert to visual approach callouts.
11.11 LANDING CHECKLIST

11.11.1
GENERAL
This flow and checklist is used to configure the aircraft for landing.
11.11.1.1
Who
Initiated by the PF.

11.11.1.2
When
After extending the landing gear.
11.11.2
PFS FLOW PATTERN
No flow pattern.
11.11.2.1

11.11.2.2
PFs Expanded Flow
11.11.3
PMS FLOW PATTERN
11.11.3.1
J Landing Gear Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Down

J Flight Attendant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notify
J EICAS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Check
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 11-24
11.11.3.2
PMs Expanded Flow
J Landing Gear Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Down

J Flight Attendant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Notify
Notify flight attendant for brace position (approximately 5 miles from
touchdown) by selecting the ATTND CALL (FA Call button) twice.
J EICAS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Checked
11.11.4
LANDING CHECKLIST
1. Flight Attendants . . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NOTIFIED

2. EICAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKED
EICAS Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checked
3. Landing Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . DOWN, 3 GREEN

LANDING GEAR Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Down
LANDING GEAR Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Green
At this point, the Landing Checklist is referred to as Down to the line.
The remainder of the checklist will be called for when landing flaps have
been called for and selected.
4. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___

EICAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify
SLAT/Flap Position Display- - - - - - - - - - <LDG Setting>, Green
5. Landing Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . [PM] . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE.

End of Chapter
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 12-1
Chapter 12: Go Around, Missed Approach & Landing

12.1 Go Around ............................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
Preparation ............................................................................................ 12-1

Manual vs. Automatic Go Around Procedures ..................................... 12-1
TOGA Switch ....................................................................................... 12-1
Thrust And Configuration Requirements ............................................. 12-1
12.1.4.1
12.1.4.2
12.1.4.3
12.1.4.4
12.1.4.5
12.1.5
12.1.6
12.1.7
1000 feet AFE and Below ........................................................................... 12-1

Above 1000 feet AFE ................................................................................. 12-1
Thrust Levers .............................................................................................. 12-2
Flight Director Go Around. ........................................................................ 12-2
Raw Data Go Around. ................................................................................ 12-2
Executing the Go Around ..................................................................... 12-2

Go Around Maneuver ........................................................................... 12-2
Go Around Actions And Callouts ......................................................... 12-3
12.2 Engine Out Go Around ......................................................................... 12-5

12.2.1
12.2.2
12.2.3
12.2.4
Engine Out Go Around Maneuver ........................................................ 12-5

Acceleration and Clean-Up ................................................................... 12-5
Max Continuous Thrust ........................................................................ 12-5
Engine Out Go Around Actions And Callouts ..................................... 12-6
12.3 ILS/PRM Breakouts .............................................................................. 12-8

12.3.1
12.3.2
12.3.3
Conflicting Controller/RA Guidance .................................................... 12-8

ILS/PRM Climbing Breakouts Actions and Callouts ........................... 12-8
ILS/PRM Descending Breakouts Actions and Callouts ....................... 12-8
12.4 Missed Approach Point ......................................................................... 12-9

12.4.1
12.4.2
OPS-07A
ILS CAT I ............................................................................................. 12-9

Decision Altitude (DA) ......................................................................... 12-9
PAGE TOC 12-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 12-1
Chapter 12
Go Around, Missed Approach & Landing
12.1
GO AROUND
12.1.1
PREPARATION
Maintain Mode Awareness by monitoring the FMA to determine the
engaged pitch and roll modes.
12.1.2
MANUAL VS. AUTOMATIC GO AROUND PROCEDURES

Go around procedures maximize the use of the automation. Pilots must
remain mentally prepared to execute a F/D or raw data go around in the
event of equipment failure or malfunction.
12.1.3
TOGA SWITCH
The flight director symbology

are automatically activated
when GA mode is activated.
12.1.4
NOTE
All go around procedures begin by pressing either TOGA switch. The

TOGA switch engages the go-around mode which automatically
provides go-around guidance and thrust management.
Pressing the TOGA switch will not
cause the autopilot or autothrottle
to engage if is was previously disengaged.
THRUST AND CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS
12.1.4.1
1000 feet AFE and Below
All go arounds initiated below 1000 feet AFE must follow the go around
thrust and configuration requirements of this section. The TOGA
functions of the AFCS system and the autothrottle will operate.
12.1.4.2
Above 1000 feet AFE
Thrust usage and configuration requirements are at the pilots discretion.

For example, while descending through 2000 feet with gear down and
flaps 3, ATC asks for a right turn to downwind for additional spacing,
expect a turn to final in 2 miles. The pilot may elect to level off, keep the
gear and flaps extended and complete the configuration after reestablished inbound.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 12-2
Thrust Levers
Normal thrust lever operation is

with the autothrottle function
engaged. Thrust levers may be
set manually with the
autothrottle function disengaged
to either the TOGA or maximum
thrust positions.
12.1.4.4
NOTE
12.1.4.3
If the autothrottles are engaged

during go-around, the thrust setting will remain in TO/GA setting
until a vertical mode such as
FLCH or VS has been selected.
Flight Director Go Around.
Flap retraction is accomplished by reference to the indicated airspeed

display. Retract flaps at green dot plus 10 kts.
12.1.4.5
Raw Data Go Around.
Flap retraction is accomplished identically to Flight Director Go Around.
12.1.5
EXECUTING THE GO AROUND

A.
Sufficient visual cues must exist to continue the approach below DH

or MDA. If visual cues are lost after DH or MDA due to shallow fog,
snow flurries, or heavy precipitation, the pilot shall immediately
initiate a go-around and fly the published missed approach
procedure as required by the FARs. Go arounds, when properly
executed, involve little loss of altitude below the altitude at which the
go around is started.
B.
Missed approach procedures for straight-in approaches rarely

present a problem. Conducting a missed approach when not
established on a final approach course should be as follows:
- If a go around is required at any time while maneuvering in the

traffic pattern and visual conditions cannot be maintained, perform
a climbing turn toward the runway of intended landing (this
maneuver will position the aircraft over the airport and climbing).
- When over the airport and climbing, turn (in the shortest direction)
to the missed approach fix and proceed with published procedure.
12.1.6
GO AROUND MANEUVER
A.
To initiate the go around press either TOGA switch. If an automatic

approach has been flown, the autopilot and autothrottle can remain
engaged. If the approach has been flown manually, rotate smoothly
to a 12 pitch attitude and then follow flight director commands.
Verify thrust levers move to TOGA thrust.
B.
Verify the GA modes are annunciated on the FMA. The GA pitch

mode initially commands a go around attitude and then transitions to
speed as the rate of climb increases. This speed is normally
between VAC and VAC + 15 knots. The GA roll mode maintains
existing ground track.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 12-3
C.
Accomplish the missed approach procedure. If a turning missed

approach procedure is required, accomplish the missed approach
procedure through gear up before initiating the turn. Delay further
flap retraction until initial maneuvering is complete and a safe
altitude and appropriate speed are attained.
D.
At 1,000 feet RA or obstacle clearance altitude (OCA) (whichever is

higher), accelerate to flap retraction speed by selecting FLCH and
210 knots.
E.
As the airspeed increases, retract flaps at green dot plus 10 knots,

and complete the After Takeoff checklist.
If landing flap setting is...
F.
12.1.7
Then the go around flap setting is...
FULL
After flaps are retracted verify desired altitude is displayed in PFD.
GO AROUND ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
Go-Around
Trigger
Go around
PF
PM
Go Around
Press either TOGA switch
TOGA
Verify thrust levers move to
TOGA thrust.
Rotate toward 12 pitch
attitude, then follow
F/D commands
Verify GA annunciates

TOGA thrust
TOGA Set
Check Airspeed
Flaps (2 or 4)
as appropriate
Check airspeed
Flaps (2 or 4)
Select Flaps (2 or 4)
Positive rate of
climb

VSI
Gear Up
Advise ATC
Execute published missed
approach or proceed as
instructed by ATC
OPS-07A
Positive Rate
Gear Up
Position gear lever UP
Advise ATC
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 12-4
Go-Around (Continued)
Trigger
At or above
400 RA
PF
Autopilot On
Select/Request
HDG or FMS NAV
At or above
1,000 RA
At flap retraction speeds
PM
Flight Level Change, 210

(or speed as required)
Accelerate to 210 kts
Select autopilot on
Select HDG or FMS NAV
Monitor missed approach
procedure
Verify Climb Thrust
Select FLCH
Set Speed Bug to 210 kts or
requested speed
Check airspeed
Flaps __
(Retract flaps at green dot
plus 10 kts)
Check airspeed
Flaps __
Select proper flap setting, when
requested
Check airspeed
Checklist
Check airspeed
Flaps UP
Retract Flaps
Checklist
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
12.2
PAGE 12-5
ENGINE OUT GO AROUND
12.2.1
ENGINE OUT GO AROUND MANEUVER

A.
If a go around is required, press a TOGA switch to apply go around

thrust to the GA N1 limit.
B.
Select Flaps 2 and rotate toward 8 pitch attitude and then follow
flight director commands. Control yaw with rudder and trim. Some
rudder pedal pressure may be required even with full rudder trim.
C.
Verify the GA pitch and roll modes are annunciated on the FMA and
ADI.
D.
At a positive rate of climb, call for gear up. The flight director
commands a pitch attitude that will maintain the selected speed
(VAC to VAC +15). With an engine inoperative, the resulting vertical
speed will depend on temperature, available thrust and airplane
gross weight. The GA roll mode maintains a ground track.
E.
Call for autopilot engagement and HDG SEL at or above 400 RA,
unless a specific Engine Failure - Missed Approach procedure
requires a turn prior to 400 RA.
F.
Advise ATC of your intentions. Either fly a straight-out missed

approach or, when published, fly the specific Engine Failure Missed Approach procedure.
G.
If a turning missed approach procedure is required, accomplish the

missed approach procedure through gear up before initiating the
turn. Delay further flap retraction until initial maneuvering is
complete and a safe altitude and appropriate speed are attained.
12.2.2
ACCELERATION AND CLEAN-UP

A.
At 1,000 ft. or at specific Engine Failure - Missed Approach

procedure altitude (if higher), the PF will
- call for Flight Level Change, VFS,

- accelerate, and
- retract the flaps at green dot plus 10 kts.
12.2.3
B.
The PM will select the proper flap setting when requested.
C.
At the last flap retraction, the PF will respond Flaps UP and the PM
will retract the flaps. As the flaps are retracted and the aircraft
accelerates, adjust the rudder pedal position to maintain the control
wheel level and apply trim to relieve rudder pedal pressure.
MAX CONTINUOUS THRUST

At VFS the PF will call CON and the PM will then select CON on MCDU
and verify CON is displayed on the EICAS.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 12-6
12.2.4
ENGINE OUT GO AROUND ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
Engine Out Go Around

Trigger
Go around
PF
PM
Go Around
Press either TOGA switch
TOGA
TOGA thrust
Verify GA annunciates
TOGA thrust
TOGA Set
Rotate toward 8 pitch attitude,

then follow F/D commands
Check Airspeed
Flaps 2
(verify VAC)
limit bank angle to 15
Positive rate of
climb
Check airspeed
Flaps 2
Select Flaps 2
VSI
Positive Rate

Gear Up
Gear Up
Position gear lever UP
Advise ATC
At or above
400 RA (or
altitude as
specified on
published
Engine Failure
- Missed
Approach)
Advise ATC
Comply with airport specific Engine Failure - Missed Approach

procedure (if published), otherwise fly runway heading.
Autopilot On
(if desired)
Monitor missed approach

procedure
Select autopilot on
Select/Request
HDG or FMS NAV
At or above
1000 RA (or
altitude as
specified on
published
Engine Failure
- Missed
Approach)
Original 29AUG2005
Flight Level Change, VFS

Reduce pitch and accelerate
VFS
Select HDG or FMS NAV if

requested
Verify HDG or NAV
annunciates
Verify Climb Thrust
Select FLCH
Set speed bug to VFS
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 12-7
Engine Out Go Around (Continued)

Trigger
At flap retraction speeds
PF
PM
Check airspeed
Flaps 1
(Retract flaps at green dot
plus 10 kts)
Check airspeed
Flaps 1
Select Flaps 1
Check airspeed
Checklist
Check airspeed
Flaps UP
Select Flaps UP
Checklist flow
At VFS
CON
Climb at VFS speed to
assigned/safe altitude
Select CON on MCDU

Verify CON displayed on
EICAS
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 12-8
12.3
ILS/PRM BREAKOUTS
12.3.1
CONFLICTING CONTROLLER/RA GUIDANCE

If the controllers instructions include vertical guidance that conflicts with
RA vertical guidance, follow RA vertical guidance while complying with
controllers lateral instructions.
12.3.2
ILS/PRM CLIMBING BREAKOUTS ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
ILS/PRM Climbing Breakout

Trigger
Alert
Capt (PF)
FO (PM)
Simultaneously:
Breakout, TOGA
Established on
heading
12.3.3
Select either TOGA button

TCS - Press and hold
Turn to heading
Establish climb (follow RA, if
received)
Ensure thrust levers advance

to TOGA position
Reconfigure aircraft, as desired
Select HDG and set heading on

GP
Set altitude on GP
Monitor flight path; call out
deviations
ILS/PRM DESCENDING BREAKOUTS ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
ILS/PRM Descending Breakout

Trigger
Alert
Capt (PF)
FO (PM)
Simultaneously:
Breakout
TCS - Press and hold
Turn to heading,
Establish descent (follow RA, if
received)
Do not exceed
1,000 FPM unless directed by
RA
Leveled off and

established on
heading
Original 29AUG2005
Select HDG and set heading on

GP
Set altitude on GP
Monitor flight path; call out
deviations
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
12.4
12.4.1
PAGE 12-9
MISSED APPROACH POINT

ILS CAT I
The Missed Approach Point (MAP) is the point during an approach
where the aircraft on glideslope arrives at the published decision altitude,
based on a barometric altimeter.
12.4.2
DECISION ALTITUDE (DA)

The DA is the point at which the pilot commences the vertical portion of
the missed approach. In some instances, the lateral portion of the
missed approach may require the aircraft to proceed to the missed
approach fix before commencing a turn.
End of Chapter
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 12-10
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 13-1
Chapter 13: Landing

13.1 Normal Landing .................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
Vertical Guidance ................................................................................. 13-1

Thrust .................................................................................................... 13-1
Flare ...................................................................................................... 13-1
Touchdown ........................................................................................... 13-2
Ground Spoilers .................................................................................... 13-2
13.1.5.1
13.1.5.2
13.1.6
Nosewheel & Rudder Inputs after Touchdown .................................... 13-2
13.1.6.1
13.1.6.2
13.1.6.3
13.1.7
Application .................................................................................................. 13-3

Callouts ....................................................................................................... 13-3
Reduction .................................................................................................... 13-3
Engine Inoperative ...................................................................................... 13-3
Braking .................................................................................................. 13-4
13.1.8.1
13.1.8.2
13.1.9
13.1.10
Nosewheel ................................................................................................... 13-2

Rudder ......................................................................................................... 13-2
Nosewheel Steering .................................................................................... 13-2
Reverse Thrust ...................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.7.1
13.1.7.2
13.1.7.3
13.1.7.4
13.1.8
Effectiveness ............................................................................................... 13-2

Auto-Deploy ............................................................................................... 13-2
Anti-Skid Inoperative ................................................................................. 13-4

Brake Cooling. ............................................................................................ 13-4
Landing Actions and Callouts .............................................................. 13-5

Crosswind Landing ............................................................................... 13-5
13.1.10.1
13.1.10.2
13.1.10.3
13.1.10.4
13.1.10.5
Methods ...................................................................................................... 13-5

Sideslip ........................................................................................................ 13-5
De-Crab During Flare ................................................................................. 13-6
Touchdown in Crab on Slippery Runways ................................................. 13-6
Combining Crab and Sideslip ..................................................................... 13-6
13.2 Landing Irregularities ............................................................................ 13-7

13.2.1
13.2.2
13.2.3
13.2.4
Wing/Engine Strikes During Landing .................................................. 13-7

Tail Strike During Landing ................................................................... 13-7
Flaring Too High .................................................................................. 13-7
Bouncing at Touchdown ....................................................................... 13-7
13.3 Rejected Landing ................................................................................... 13-8

13.3.1
Rejected Landing Maneuver ................................................................. 13-8
13.4 Engine Failure on Final ......................................................................... 13-8

13.4.1
OPS-07A
General .................................................................................................. 13-8
PAGE TOC 13-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 13-1
Chapter 13
Landing
13.1
13.1.1
NORMAL LANDING
VERTICAL GUIDANCE
As with any aircraft, the key to a successful landing is to make a
stabilized approach by using:
- glideslope (ILS),
- glidepath (vertical guidance), and/or
- visual cues (VASI, PAPI, etc.).
By doing this, the aircraft should cross the landing threshold at a height
of approximately 50 feet, which corresponds to a touchdown point of
1,000 feet. The acceptable touchdown range is 750 to 1,250 feet from
the runway threshold.
13.1.2
THRUST
NOTE
The PF should decide when to retard the thrust levers considering all
external circumstances (e.g., landing configuration, aircraft speed versus
target, speed trend arrow, aircraft acceleration/deceleration rate, aircraft
height versus descent path, aircraft rate of closure with the ground,
gusts, shears, outside perception of the runway, etc.). Unless unusual
conditions dictate otherwise, the thrust levers should be at IDLE prior to
starting the flare at approximately 20 feet.
13.1.3
Do not attempt to touchdown with

the thrust above idle.
FLARE
A concerted flare is neither required nor desirable. A slight increase in
pitch (1-2), at approximately 20 feet, is all that is needed to check the
rate of descent. This will produce a consistent touchdown point, while
protecting against a tailstrike and excessive float. The landing should
occur without a long flare.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 13-2
13.1.4
TOUCHDOWN
After main gear touchdown,
begin to smoothly fly the nose
wheel onto the runway by
relaxing aft control column
pressure. Control column
movement forward of neutral
should not be required.
Pitch rates sufficient to

cause airplane structural
damage can occur if large
nose down control column
movement is made prior to
nose wheel touchdown.
See also Section 13.2, "Landing Irregularities".
13.1.5
GROUND SPOILERS
The ground spoilers spoil the lift from the wings, which places the
airplane weight on the main landing gear, providing excellent brake
effectiveness.
13.1.5.1
Effectiveness
Unless ground spoilers are extended after touchdown, braking

effectiveness may be reduced initially as much as 60 percent, since very
little weight will be on the wheels and brake application may cause rapid
anti-skid modulation.
13.1.5.2
Auto-Deploy
Normally, ground spoilers will extend automatically.
13.1.6
NOSEWHEEL & RUDDER INPUTS AFTER TOUCHDOWN
13.1.6.1
Nosewheel
If the nosewheel is not promptly lowered to the runway, braking and

steering capability are significantly degraded and no drag benefit will be
gained.
13.1.6.2
Rudder
Rudder control is effective to approximately 60 knots. Rudder pedal

steering is sufficient for maintaining directional control during the roll-out.
13.1.6.3
Nosewheel Steering
Do not use the nosewheel

steering tiller until reaching
taxi speed. In a crosswind,
displace the control wheel into
the wind to maintain wingslevel which aids directional control.
Original 29AUG2005
Nose wheel steering tiller

should not be used above
normal taxi speeds (20
knots).
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
13.1.7
PAGE 13-3
REVERSE THRUST
The importance of establishing the desired reverse thrust as soon as
possible after touchdown can not be overemphasized. Immediate
initiation of reverse thrust at main gear touchdown and full reverse thrust
will minimizes brake temperatures, tire and brake wear, and reduces
stopping distance on very slippery runways. Use of minimum reverse
thrust will almost double the brake energy requirements and can result in
brake temperatures much higher than normal.
Reverse thrust is most effective at high speeds.
13.1.7.1
Application
After touchdown and when the thrust levers are retarded to idle, lift the
reverse thrust triggers on the thrust reverser levers. Select maximum
reverse thrust consistent with runway conditions and modulate reverse
thrust as required.
If an engine surges during reverse thrust operation, quickly select
reverse idle on both engines.
13.1.7.2
Callouts
The PM will call out:
13.1.7.3
the number of green REV annunciations, e.g. TWO REVERSE

any limits being approached and/or exceeded
any other abnormalities
80 KNOTS and 60 KNOTS to assist the PF in programming the
reverse thrust
Reduction
Maintain up to maximum reverse thrust until the airspeed approaches 80

knots. Then start reducing the reverse thrust so the reverse levers are
moving down at a rate commensurate with the deceleration rate of the
airplane. Reverse idle should be reached by 60 knots, then to full down
after the engines have decelerated to idle.
13.1.7.4
Engine Inoperative
Reverse thrust may be used with one engine inoperative. Use normal
reversing procedures and techniques. If directional control becomes a
concern during deceleration, return the operating engine lever to reverse
idle detent.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 13-4
13.1.8
BRAKING
The following procedure will give optimum braking for all runway
conditions:
- The pilots seat and rudder pedals should be adjusted so it is

-
13.1.8.1
possible to apply maximum braking with full rudder deflection.

After main gear touchdown, smoothly apply a constant brake pedal
pressure for the desired braking. For short or slippery runways, use
full brake pedal.
Pumping the brakes will degrade braking effectiveness. Keep a
steadily increasing brake pressure applied, allowing the anti-skid
system to function at its optimum.
The anti-skid system will stop the airplane for all runway conditions
in a shorter distance than is possible with either anti-skid off or
brake pedal modulation.
The anti-skid system adapts pilot-applied brake pressure to runway
conditions by sensing an impending skid condition and adjusting
the brake pressure to each individual wheel for maximum braking
effort. When brakes are applied on a slippery runway, several skid
cycles will occur before the anti-skid system establishes the right
amount of brake pressure for the most effective braking.
Do not attempt to modulate, pump, or improve the braking by any
other special techniques.
If the pilot modulates the brake pedals, the anti-skid system is
forced to readjust the brake pressure to establish optimum braking.
During this re-adjustment time, braking efficiency is lost.
Do not release the brake pedal pressure until the airplane speed
has been reduced to a safe taxi speed.
Anti-Skid Inoperative
When the anti-skid system is inoperative, the following procedures apply:
- Ensure the nosewheel is on the ground and the speed brakes are
extended (assume automatic deployment unless appropriate
EICAS messages are displayed) before applying the brakes.
- Initiate wheel braking using very light pedal pressure and increase
pressure as ground speed decreases.
- Apply steady pressure. Do not pump the pedals.
Anti-skid-off braking requires even greater care during light-weight
landings.
13.1.8.2
Brake Cooling.
A series of taxi-back or stop-and-go landings, without additional in-flight

cooling, can cause excessive brake temperature. The energy absorbed
by the brakes from each landing is cumulative.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
13.1.9
PAGE 13-5
LANDING ACTIONS AND CALLOUTS
Landing
Trigger
Touchdown
PF
Select reverse thrust
PM
Verify green REV icon(s)
Two (One, No) Reverse
Nose wheel
touchdown
Apply brakes, as required
80 kts
Monitor deceleration
Monitor engine instruments
80 Knots
60 Knots
60 kts
Ensure idle reverse thrust or
less
13.1.10
13.1.10.1
CROSSWIND LANDING
Methods
Four methods of performing crosswind landings are presented. They are

the sideslip, de-crab technique (with removal of crab in flare), crab
technique for slippery runways, and combination crab/sideslip technique.
Whenever a crab is maintained during a crosswind approach, offset the
cockpit on the upwind side of centerline so the main gear touches down
on the runway centerline.
13.1.10.2
Sideslip
The sideslip crosswind technique aligns the aircraft with the extended
runway course so main gear touchdown occurs on the runway
centerline.
The initial phase of the approach to landing is flown using the crab
method to correct for drift. Prior to the flare, the airplane centerline is
aligned on or parallel to the runway centerline. Downwind rudder is used
to align the longitudinal axis to the desired track as aileron is applied into
the wind to prevent drift. A steady sideslip is established, with opposite
rudder and low wing into the wind to hold the desired course.
Touchdown is accomplished with the upwind wheels touching just before
the downwind wheels. Overcontrolling the roll axis must be avoided
because over-banking could cause the engine nacelle or outboard wing
flap to contact the runway.
Properly coordinated, this maneuver will result in nearly fixed rudder and
aileron control positions during the final phase of the approach,
touchdown, and beginning of the landing roll.
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 13-6
13.1.10.3
De-Crab During Flare
The objective of this technique is to maintain wings-level throughout the

approach, flare, and touchdown. On final approach, a crab angle is
established with the wings-level to maintain the desired course. Just prior
to touchdown while flaring the airplane, downwind rudder is applied to
eliminate the crab and align the airplane with the runway centerline.
As rudder is applied, the upwind wing will sweep forward, developing roll
due to lifting forces. Hold the wings level with simultaneous application of
aileron control into the wind. The touchdown is made with cross-controls
and both gear touching down simultaneously. Throughout the touchdown
phase, upwind aileron application is utilized to keep the wings level.
13.1.10.4
Touchdown in Crab on Slippery Runways
On very slippery runways, the crosswind crab angle may be maintained

to touchdown. This will reduce drift toward the downwind side when
touching down. Since the aircraft does not have to be de-crabbed, pilot
workload is reduced. Proper rudder and upwind aileron must be
maintained to ensure directional control is maintained.
On slippery runways, crosswind capability is a function of runway surface
conditions, airplane loading, and pilot technique.
13.1.10.5
Combining Crab and Sideslip
It may be necessary to combine crab and sideslip during strong

crosswinds. Main gear touchdown is made with the wing low and crab
angle applied. As the upwind gear touches first, a slight increase in
downwind rudder is applied to straighten the nose. A simultaneous
application of aileron is applied to maintain wings-level.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
13.2
PAGE 13-7
LANDING IRREGULARITIES
13.2.1
WING/ENGINE STRIKES DURING LANDING

Wing tip or engine nacelle strike occurs if bank exceeds 18 at
touchdown (16 with gear struts compressed).
13.2.2
TAIL STRIKE DURING LANDING

Tail strikes are more frequent during landings than takeoffs. In fact, tail
strikes occur more frequently during landings by a factor of two to one.
Based upon information gathered from tail strike occurrences, deviation
from the normal landing maneuver above, is the main cause of tail
strikes. The mistakes most commonly made are:
1) allowing the airspeed to decrease well below VAP,
2) prolonged hold-off for a smooth touchdown, and
3) starting to flare the aircraft too high above the runway.
13.2.3
FLARING TOO HIGH

Of these three commonly made mistakes, flaring the aircraft too high
above the runway has the greatest potential for a tail strike and resulting
damage. When the flare is started too high above the runway, airspeed
will decrease below VAP causing the PF to compensate. When placed in
this situation, the tendency is to continue to increase pitch in an effort to
arrest the excessive sink rate. The correct action to take is to
immediately lower the pitch attitude and fly the aircraft to the runway
before the airspeed dissipates any further. While the touchdown will be
firm, taking this corrective action will prevent a tail strike.
13.2.4
BOUNCING AT TOUCHDOWN
Do not allow the pitch attitude to increase, particularly following a firm
touchdown with a high pitch rate.
A.
In case of a light bounce
- Maintain the pitch attitude and complete the landing while keeping
the thrust at idle.
In case of a high bounce
- Maintain the pitch

attitude and initiate a go
around.
- When safely established

in the go around,
accomplish normal go
around procedures.
OPS-07A
NOTE
B.
Do not try to avoid a second touchdown during the go around. Should

the aircraft touchdown, the impact
will be soft enough to prevent damage to the aircraft provided pitch
attitude is maintained.
A landing should not be
attempted immediately after
a high bounce.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 13-8
13.3
13.3.1
REJECTED LANDING
REJECTED LANDING MANEUVER
The rejected landing maneuver is identical to the go around maneuver.
Apply go around thrust and select go around flaps while rotating to go
around attitude. Retract the landing gear after a positive rate of climb is
established and retract the flaps on schedule at a safe altitude.
After reverse thrust is initiated, a full stop landing must be made. Factors dictating this are five
seconds are required for a reverser to stow in
the forward thrust position and possibility exists
a reverser may not stow in the forward thrust
position.
13.4
13.4.1
ENGINE FAILURE ON FINAL

GENERAL
If an engine failure occurs on final approach, there are certain
considerations and procedures that apply regardless of whether the
approach is a visual, nonprecision, precision, or autoland approach.
If an engine failure should occur on final approach with the flaps in the
landing position, adequate thrust is available to maintain the approach
profile using landing flaps, if desired.
If an engine failure should occur on final approach, it is usually preferable
to continue the approach using Flaps 5.
If a go around from a Flaps 5 configuration is required, maintain the
additional 20 knots and retract flaps to Flaps 2. Continue with procedures
as discussed in section Engine Out Go-Around.
End of Chapter
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 14-1
Chapter 14: Parking & Post Flight

14.1 After Landing ......................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1
After Landing Checklist Flow ............................................................ 14-1
14.2 Taxi Procedures ...................................................................................... 14-1

14.2.1
14.2.2
Engine Shutdown After Landing .......................................................... 14-1

After Landing Checklist ........................................................................ 14-2
14.2.2.1
14.2.2.2
14.2.2.3
14.2.3
Captains Flow Pattern
14.2.3.1
14.2.3.2
14.2.4
..................................................................... 14-2

First Officers Flow Pattern .................................................................. 14-3
14.2.4.1
14.2.4.2
14.2.5
General ........................................................................................................ 14-2

Who ............................................................................................................. 14-2
When ........................................................................................................... 14-2

After Landing Checklist ........................................................................ 14-4
14.3 Parking Checklist ................................................................................... 14-5

14.3.1
General .................................................................................................. 14-5
14.3.1.1
14.3.1.2
14.3.2
Captains Flow Pattern ......................................................................... 14-5
14.3.2.1
14.3.2.2
14.3.3
Who ............................................................................................................. 14-5

When ........................................................................................................... 14-5
Parking Checklist .................................................................................. 14-6
14.4 Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) Deactivation after a Reportable Event 14-7
14.4.1
14.4.2
General .................................................................................................. 14-7

NTSB Reportable Event ....................................................................... 14-7
14.5 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 14-7

14.5.1
Post Flight Exterior Walkaround .......................................................... 14-7
14.6 Securing Checklist .................................................................................. 14-8

14.6.1
General .................................................................................................. 14-8
14.6.1.1
14.6.1.2
14.6.2
14.6.3
OPS-07A
Who ............................................................................................................. 14-8

When ........................................................................................................... 14-8
Flow ...................................................................................................... 14-8

Securing Checklist ................................................................................ 14-8
PAGE TOC 14-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 14-1
Chapter 14
Parking & Post Flight
14.1
14.1.1
AFTER LANDING
AFTER LANDING CHECKLIST FLOW
Captain
First Officer
After the aircraft has cleared the active runway and if the first officer performed the landing, after the captain has assumed full control of the aircraft
External Lights - As required
Trim - PITCH to UP 4; Rudder & Aileron to

neutral
SLAT/FLAP Lever - 0 Detent
Transponder - STBY
Wx Radar - confirm FSBY or OFF
HYDRAULIC - Set
APU - ON or OFF
Accomplish After Landing Checklist silently;
verbalize...
After Landing Checklist Complete
14.2
14.2.1
TAXI PROCEDURES
ENGINE SHUTDOWN AFTER LANDING
In addition to applicable guidance in paragraph, do the following prior to
shutting down an engine (#2 preferred):
J HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
J Thrust Lever (as appropriate) - - - - - - - - - - - IDLE

Following high power operations (e.g., maximum reverse thrust, etc.),
run the engines at IDLE for two (2) minutes to allow for engine thermal
stabilization before shutting down an engine.
J START/STOP Selector (as appropriate) - - - - - - STOP

If starting the APU during taxi-in, the APU must be stabilized at 95% (or greater) for a minimum of 3 seconds prior
to shutting down an engine or wait until the electrical system has stabilized on the remaining IDG before starting
the APU.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 14-2
14.2.2
AFTER LANDING CHECKLIST
14.2.2.1
General
This flow and checklist is used to ensure the aircraft is ready for taxiing to
parking.
14.2.2.2
Who
Initiated by the captain; the first officer reads and accomplishes silently;
however, verbalizes After Landing Checklist Complete.
14.2.2.3
When
After the aircraft has cleared the active runway and if the first officer
performed the landing, after the captain has assumed full control of the
aircraft.
14.2.3
S
F
14.2.3.1
After the aircraft has cleared the active runway

J Call for After Landing Checklist
14.2.3.2

LOGO lights should be ON for all operations at night.
OPS-07A
SOP-08-02, PAGE 15 OF 16
Placement: This is Part Four. Insert Part Four before page 14-3
SOP-08-02, PAGE 16 OF 16
14.2.4.1
aircraft.
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
14.2.4.2
Trim - - - - - PITCH to UP 4; Rudder & Aileron to neutral

SLAT/FLAP Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -0 Detent
Transponder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As Req
Wx radar - - - - - - - - - - - - - confirm FSBY or OFF
HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
APU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON or OFF
Accomplish the After Landing Checklist silently; verbalize
J Trim - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
z PITCH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP 4
z Rudder & Aileron- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Neutral
J Flaps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP
- SLAT/Flap Lever - - - - - - - - - - UP & in the 0 detent
- Verify on the EICAS the Flaps/Slats are in the up position
J Transponder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - As Req
J Wx Radar Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FSBY or OFF
z Verify RADAR FSBY or OFF appears on the MFD
J HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
z HYD SYS 1 ELEC PUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON
z HYD SYS 2 ELEC PUMP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON
z HYD SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -ON
z HYD SYS 3 ELEC PUMP B - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
J APU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON or OFF
z Select ON or OFF as required for current operational conditions.
14.2.5

1. Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . As Req
2. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP
3. APU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF or ON
4. After Landing Checklist . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
ERJ-170 STANDARD
14.2.4
PAGE 14-3
Trim
S
14.2.4.1
aircraft.
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
14.2.4.2
Trim - - - - - PITCH to UP 4; Rudder & Aileron to neutral

SLAT/FLAP Lever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -0 Detent
Transponder- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STBY
Wx radar - - - - - - - - - - - - - confirm FSBY or OFF
HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
APU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON or OFF
Accomplish the After Landing Checklist silently; verbalize
J Trim - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
PITCH - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP 4
Rudder & Aileron- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Neutral
J Flaps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UP
- SLAT/Flap Lever - - - - - - - - - - UP & in the 0 detent
- Verify on the EICAS the Flaps/Slats are in the up position
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 14-4
J Transponder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STBY
J Wx Radar Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FSBY or OFF
Verify RADAR FSBY or OFF appears on the MFD
J HYDRAULIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
J APU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON or OFF
Select ON or OFF as required for current operational conditions.
14.2.5

1. Transponder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STBY
2. Flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UP
3. APU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF or ON
4. After Landing Checklist . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
14.3
PAGE 14-5
PARKING CHECKLIST
14.3.1
GENERAL
This flow and checklist is used to configure the aircraft for parking and if
applicable, a subsequent flight.
14.3.1.1
Who

14.3.1.2
When
After the aircraft is stopped at the gate and the parking brake is set.
14.3.2
S
14.3.2.1
After the aircraft is stopped at the gate and the parking brake is set
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
121.310(d)(2)
121.317(b)
OPS-07A
PARKING BRAKE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON or OFF

Thrust Levers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IDLE
Passenger Signs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
Electrics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Establish
START/STOP 1 & 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STOP
HYDRAULICS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
RED BCN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
Call for Parking Checklist
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 14-6
14.3.2.2
J Parking Brake - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ON or OFF

Verify EMERG/PRKG BRAKE light illuminated when set. Refer to the
FOM for parking brake procedures.
J Thrust Levers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IDLE

J PASSENGER SIGNS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -OFF
J Electrics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Establish
If ground power is available (e.g., white AVAIL light illuminated)
When the In-Range Message indicates external power is available, it will
be hooked up. Only start the APU if necessary for passenger comfort.
- GPU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IN
J START/STOP 1 & 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STOP

Following high power operations (e.g., maximum reverse thrust, etc.),
run the engine(s) at IDLE for two (2) minutes to allow for engine thermal
stabilization before shutting down the engine(s).
Thrust levers must be at IDLE for engines to shutdown.
ENG (1 or 2) REV TLA FAIL messages, as appropriate, will annunciate
for 30 seconds after applicable engine is shutdown.
J HYDRAULICS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set
SYS 3 ELEC PUMP A - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
- Do not move any rudder pedals for at least fifteen (15) seconds after
hydraulic power is shut down.
SYS 3 ELEC PUMP B - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - AUTO
J RED BCN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -OFF

14.3.3
PARKING CHECKLIST
1. PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON or OFF

2. THRUST LEVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDLE
3. START/STOP 1& 2 . . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOP
4. PASSENGER SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
5. RED BCN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
6. HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [C]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET
7. Parking Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . [FO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
OPS-07A
121.310(d)(2)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
14.4
14.4.1
PAGE 14-7
COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER (CVR) DEACTIVATION

AFTER A REPORTABLE EVENT
GENERAL
The Captain is responsible to deactivate both CVRs immediately upon
completion of a flight during which a reportable event according to NTSB
830 occurred.
Thereafter, the CA will inform Dispatch and Maintenance Control of the
reportable event and preserve the CVR data. The CA will make one
logbook entry for the event and a separate one for the pulled CVR circuit
breaker.
14.4.2

1. Both CVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

Deactivate both CVRs via the MCDU.
2. Logbook Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [C] . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
Make two logbook entries:
1) one for the event,
2) one for the deactivated CVRs.
3. NTSB 830 Reportable Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPLETE
14.5
14.5.1
MAINTENANCE
POST FLIGHT EXTERIOR WALKAROUND
This walkaround is accomplished at each intermediate stop when a flight
deck crew change does not occur and after the last flight of the day.
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 14-8
14.6
SECURING CHECKLIST
14.6.1
GENERAL
This checklist safely configures the aircraft for power down.
14.6.1.1
Who
Normally accomplished by the last pilot leaving the aircraft.

14.6.1.2
When
After all passengers have deplaned and when leaving the aircraft with no
electrical power (e.g., extended delays, remaining over night, etc.)
14.6.2
FLOW
This is a read and do checklist with no established flows. Each item is
read and accomplished silently.
14.6.3
SECURING CHECKLIST
1. Chocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN
Chock the aircraft in accordance with FOM
2. EXTERNAL LIGHTS Switches (All) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

3. EMER LT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
4. GPU/APU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
If the APU is running
APU START/STOP Selector - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OFF
- EICAS Display APU SHUTTING DOWN - - - - Appears

- Completes the APU shutdown logic sequence
5. BATT 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
6. DOME Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
7. Entrance Light Switchlight (Forward FA Panel) . . . . . . . . . . OFF
End of Chapter
OPS-07A
121.310(d)(2)
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 15-1
Chapter 15: ACARS

15.1 System Description ................................................................................ 15-1
15.2 ACARS Applications ............................................................................. 15-1
15.2.1
15.2.2
Air Traffic Service Applications ........................................................... 15-1

Airline Operational Communications Applications (AOC) ................. 15-2
15.3 ACARS Window Pages ......................................................................... 15-2

15.3.1
15.3.2
15.3.3
15.3.4
ACARS Main Menu ............................................................................. 15-2

Pre-flight Initialization .......................................................................... 15-3
Free Text Functionality ......................................................................... 15-5
Uplink Messages ................................................................................... 15-6
15.4 ACARS Navigation Windows ............................................................... 15-7

15.5 Communication ...................................................................................... 15-8
15.5.1
OPS-07A
Changing COM 3 from DATA to VOICE ............................................ 15-8
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE TOC 15-2
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A

Bulletin: SOP170-08-04 Date: 09 JUL 2008
Subject: AeroData ACARS
Bulletin:
Effective Date:
To:
From:
Subject:
Recording-
HighlightsPlacement-
Instructions-
SOP170-08-04
09 JUL 2008
All SOP Holders
AeroData ACARS
This bulletin remains in effect until instructed to remove it in a future

revision or bulletin. Be SURE to record the insertion or removal of all
bulletins on the Record of Bulletins page. The following bulletin are
superseded by this bulletin: SOP-08-01.
Addition of screenshots and procedures for using the AeroData ACARS
Performance/W&B Module
Insert this bulletin in Chapter 15, before Page 15-1. Please remove
bulletin SOP-08-01.
This bulletin replaces the current Chapter 15.
Chapter 15
ACARS
15.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ACARS is a data link system that allows character-oriented messages to
be exchanged between ground stations and the aircraft. Messages are
divided into two groups:
NOTE
- Addressed to or by crewmembers: data link requests or free text

reports;
- Automatically sent: reports of flight data, performance data and
routine events.
Communication to ground
VDR 3 is normally in Data Mode for
stations are made through
proper ACARS operation. In the
VDR 3 channel (COM 3). The
event of an emergency when COM 1
and COM 2 have failed, VDR 3 may
MCDU provides the interface
be switched to Voice Mode for comwith ACARS applications to
munications.
crewmembers.
SOP
Page 1 of 24

15.2
ACARS APPLICATIONS
15.2.1
15.2.2
AIR TRAFFIC SERVICE APPLICATIONS

A.
ATIS (Air Traffic Information Service) Reports application enables

the flight crew to send a downlink message requesting an uplink
report that may be a specific airport information or an en route
information.
B.
Departure Clearance Application is used to request a departure

clearance through character-oriented messages instead of voice
communication.
C.
Expected Taxi Clearance is used to request a taxi clearance through

character-oriented messages instead of voice communication.
D.
Pushback Clearance is used to request a pushback clearance

through character-oriented messages instead of voice
communication.
E.
TWIP (Terminal Weather Information for Pilots) provides

meteorological information to the flight crew.
AIRLINE OPERATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATIONS

(AOC)
Republic Airlines has customized AOC applications supported by the
CMF (Communications Management Function).
Examples of the AOC applications that Republic Airlines will use are:
1) Flight Initialization
2) Free Text
3) Out, Off, On and In Events (OOOI events) are automatic reports
sent to the airline operations control. Both reports and trigger
events are configured as follows:
(a) Out Events - Doors closed, brakes released.
(b) Off Events - Takeoff
(c) On Events - Landing
(d) In Events - Brakes set, doors open
Page 2 of 24
SOP

15.2.3
AERODATA WEIGHT & BALANCE/PERFORMANCE

The AeroData Weight & Balance/Performance application provides flight
crews with the following information:
1) Weight & Balance Calculation
2) Takeoff Performance Calculation
3) Landing Data Calculation
The menu for accessing these functions is available by pressing PERF/
W&B on the ACARS Main Menu.
Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank
SOP
Page 3 of 24

15.3
ACARS WINDOW PAGES

Pushing the DLK button on the MCDU brings up the following CMF MAIN
MENU page. Further access to other pages is provided through the line
select keys on each side of the MCDU.
15.3.1
ACARS M AIN M ENU
15.3.2
PRE-FLIGHT INITIALIZATION
Prior to each flight, the crew will initialize the ACARS.
From the Main Menu, press line select key (LSK) 1L to access
the Pre-flight screen. The following screen will appear:
Page 4 of 24
SOP

Screen Outline:
1L - Enters ACARS Initialization Page
2L - Enters Departure Delay Page
3L - Enters Free Text Page
4L - Enters Weather Request Page
5L - Enters Takeoff Conditions Page
6L - Return to Main Menu:
1R - Enters New Messages Page
2R-4R - Not Active
5R - Enters AeroData ACARS Module
6R - Enters Air Traffic Services (ATS) Menu
From the Pre-Flight Screen, press line select key (LSK) 1L to access the
Initialization Screen. This will access the ACARS Initialization Display as
follows:
On the Initialization page, the following data must be entered.

1L - Flight Number
2L - Departure Station (i.e. KIND)
3L - Fuel Quantity
4L - Captain ID (employee number)
5L - First Officer ID (employee number)
6L - Return to Pre-Flight Menu
1R - Scheduled Departure Day
2R - Destination Station (i.e. KMCO)
3R - Boarded Fuel (No entry needed)
4R - A Flight Attendant ID (employee number)
5R - B Flight Attendant ID (employee number)
6R -Auto Initialization (not functional)
SOP
Page 5 of 24

15.3.3
FREE TEXT FUNCTIONALITY

Free text functionality allows the crew to send operational messages to
dispatch. From the main menu, press line select key (LSK) 4L to access
the Free Text screen. The following screen will appear:
On the free text page, data may be entered as follows:
NOTE
1L - A maximum of 24 characters may be entered.

5L - TEST: A "TEST" toggle prompt appears when "MULTI" is entered
as the first line of text at LSK 1L. If the TEST prompt is selected,
when thee message is sent, several test blocks of test will be
appended to the downlink message.
6L - Return: will go back to previous screen.
5R - Print: will print the entire free text message if a printer is installed.
6R - Report: Sends the entire free text message.
Page 6 of 24
If more than four lines of information are needed, select "NEXT" on

the MCDU to obtain another free
text screen with additional space
lines for data entry.
SOP

15.3.4
UPLINK MESSAGES
Dispatch has the capability of sending operational information to the
cockpit crew via uplinked messages to the cockpit. The crew will be
made aware that a message has been received by a flashing amber
MSG on the lower right section of the PFD and "DISPLAY MSG RCVD"
on the MCDU Scratched.
The crew may then read the message by:
1) Selecting DLK on the MCDU
2) Selecting NEW MSGS (1R) on the main menu.
The message will be displayed as the following:
i l
li k h
No response to dispatch is required unless requested in the message.

Once the message is read it can be viewed at a later time by selecting
MSGS RCVD (LSK 3R) on the main menu. If the crew is requested to
respond, simply select free text from the main menu and respond as
necessary. If the crew wants to review a message that they have sent to
dispatch, select MSGS SENT (LSK 2R) on the main menu.
SOP
Page 7 of 24

15.3.5
AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES (ATS) MENU
15.3.5.1
A.
ATS Main Menu

Air Traffic Services allows the flight crew to request several different
reports, including:
Digital ATIS (D-ATIS) (2L)
Departure Clearance, also known as PDC (Pre-Departure Clearance)
(3L) is not active.
TWIP request, Pushback request and Taxi request are not active.
B.
Screen Outline:
1L - Text Weather Request (Not Active)
2L - ATIS Request: Access Digital ATIS request screen
3L - Departure Clearance: Access departure clearance (DCL) request
screen (Not Active)
4L - Blank
5L - Pushback Request (Not Active)
6L - Main Menu: Returns to the Main Menu
1R - New Messages: Go to Messages Page
2R - ATS Log: Access Air Traffic Services log
3R - Blank
4R - Blank
5R - Taxi Request (Not Active)
6R - SYS Menu: Go to system menu
Page 8 of 24
SOP

15.3.5.2
A.
D-ATIS (Digital ATIS) Request

The flight crew has the capability of requesting digital ATIS for a
specific airport that has D-ATIS transmissions.
NOTE
Select ATIS REQ from the ATS Menu

Type in the 4 letter code for the airport (1L)
Select Arrival or Departure Information
Digital ATIS will be displayed on the MSG RCVD screen
The Auto Update feature will display the new ATIS when it is issued by
ATC.
A new ATIS will be accompanied by an aural ATC MESSAGE
B.
Airports with digital ATIS are

denoted with D-ATIS in the frequency box of the briefing strip of a
Jeppesen chart.
Screen Outline:
1L - Airport: Enter 4 letter identifier for the airport
2L - Arrival: Selects the Arrival ATIS for the airport
3L - Auto Update
4L - Auto Enroute (Not Active)
5L - Terminate Auto
6L - Return - Returns to previous screen
1R - Depart: Selects the Departure ATIS for the airport
2R - ATS Log: Access Air Traffic Services Log
3R - Blank
4R - Blank
5R - Taxi Request (Not Active)
6R - Data Link Request: Sends the ATIS request via SITA.
SOP
Page 9 of 24

Only one MCDU at a time

should be used to request
ATIS. If both MCDUs are
used to request ATIS simultaneously, the ACARS system will lock up and can only
be reset on the ground with
an aircraft reboot.
15.3.6
AERODATA WEIGHT & BALANCE/PERFORMANCE

A.
The ACARS must be properly initialized for the current flight prior to
accessing this menu.
B.
The menu consists of 3 input screens and 2 output screens.
C.
W&B Loadsheet is fully integrated with the Takeoff Conditions input

page.
15.3.6.1
A.
15.3.6.2
ACARS TLR
Reference the ERJ-170 APM Chapter 3 for information on reading
the ACARS TLR.
Takeoff Conditions Page 1/2
A.
The pilot may select up to 3 runways.
B.
Runway codes can be found on the ACARS TLR.
C.
Pilot may select any runway surface and or contamination. (Default

is a dry runway).
D.
Enter current ATIS wind, OAT, and QNH. If no entry is made,

AeroData will calculate data based on the current METAR.
E.
Amber color indicates a mandatory entry field.
F.
Cyan color indicates an optional entry field.
Page 10 of 24
SOP

G.
Screen Outline:
1L - 1st runway selection (Mandatory) (TLR Runway Code)
2L - 2nd runway selection (Optional) (TLR Runway Code)
3L - 3rd runway selection (Optional) (TLR Runway Code)
4L - Type of contamination
5L - Level (depth) of contamination
6L - Return to main menu
1R - Wind entry (XXX/XX)
2R - Temperature and QNH entry (XX/XX.XX)
3R - Planned Takeoff Weight (XX.X)
4R - Go to W&B Loadsheet screen
5R - Takeoff Data screen
6R - Send data request
15.3.6.3
Takeoff Conditions Page 2/2

The pilot can select takeoff flap settings of 1, 2, 4, and OPT
(Optimum)
B.
The system will default

to OPT which will give
the pilot a Flaps 2
takeoff whenever a full
FLEX takeoff is
available.
NOTE
A.
OPT should always be used for takeoff data calculations unless a specific
flap setting is required. i.e. For training purposes.
C.
The AeroData server

will automatically generate Anti-Ice ALL takeoff numbers anytime
the temperature is at or below 10 degrees C and the runway is other
than dry.
D.
The pilot may select either a Normal (FLEX) or Max thrust takeoff.
SOP
Page 11 of 24

E.
Screen Outline:
1L - Toggle between OPT (Optimum, 1, 2, and 4
2L - Select Anti-Ice OFF or ALL
3L - Select Normal (FLEX) thrust or MAX thrust
4L-6R - Not active
15.3.6.4
Loadsheet Page 1/2

The fields can be filled with data from the Load Report and the
Passenger Count sheet.
B.
Default value for the FA/ACM is 2/0 (2 FAs, 0 ACM) Enter 2/1 for 2
FAs plus 1 ACM.
C.
Default value for the closet will always be 0 pounds. The closet is
not approved for use on any Republic Airlines flights, and the value
should always remain 0.
D.
Heavy bags should be entered as 2 standard bags.
E.
Ballast fuel is usually under 500 pounds, and will be calculated by

AeroData anytime the ZFW CG is inside the caution zones.
NOTE
A.
Page 12 of 24
If ballast fuel is required, there will

be a mention of it in the remarks
section of the Takeoff Runway Data
output page. Enter that number into
LSK 4R and re-request the takeoff
data.
SOP

F.
Screen Outline:
NOTE
1L - Number of Adults/Children in Section A

2L - Number of Adults/Children in Section B
3L - Number of Adults/Children in Section C
4L - Amount of Bags/Cargo in the FWD cargo hold
5L - Amount of Bags/Cargo in the AFT cargo hold
6L - Return to Main Menu
1R - Number of Flight Attendants/ACMs
2R - Closet Weight
3R - Total Fuel on Board (XX.X)
4R - Amount of Ballast Fuel (Blank unless needed)
5R - Go to Takeoff Data screen
SOP
In the event of an MELed F/A

jumpseat, enter 3 for the number of
F/As if only the FWD jumpseat will
be occupied, or enter 4 if only the
AFT jumpseat will be occupied.
Page 13 of 24

15.3.6.5
Loadsheet Page 2/2

This page is normally used for supplemental (charter) operations
when actual weights of the passengers and baggage is required.
B.
Extra is any weight in addition to the entries made on Loadsheet

Page 1/2.
C.
Total is the total passenger weight in this section of the aircraft.
NOTE
A.
D.
The pilot can use either the Extra

entry or the Total entry, but cannot
use both at the same time.
Screen Outline:
1L - Extra weight in Section A
2L - Not active
3L - Extra weight in Section B
4L - Not active
5L - Extra weight in Section C
6L - Return to previous screen
1R - Total weight in Section A
2R - Not active
3R - Total weight in Section B
4R - Not active
5R - Total weight in Section C
6R - Clear all entries
Page 14 of 24
SOP

15.3.6.6
Takeoff Runway Data Page 1/5
A.
Green data is information provided by the AeroData server.
B.
The top section repeats the data input by the pilot.
C.
The bottom section shows weight and balance information.
D.
Screen Outline:
FLT NO - Flight number from request
RLS NO - Release number
TIME - Time data was calculated
WIND - Wind from request
OAT - OAT from request
QNH - Altimeter setting from request
SEC A - Number of passengers in Section A
SEC B - Number of passengers in Section B
SEC C - Number of passengers in Section C
F BAG/WT - Number of bags/weight in the forward cargo compartment
A BAG/WT - Number of bags/weight in the aft cargo compartment
TTL PAX - Total number of passengers
GTOW/CG - Gross Takeoff Weight and CG in % of MAC.
FUEL - Takeoff fuel from the request
ZFW/CG - Zero Fuel Weight and CG in % of MAC.
6L - Return to previous menu
SOP
Page 15 of 24

15.3.6.7
A.
Green data is information provided by the AeroData server.
B.
This page is the remarks section where you will be shown:

Error Messages
Ballast Fuel Calculation
No Takeoff Data Avail (Re-Check ACARS Initialization)
Page 16 of 24
SOP

15.3.6.8
A.
Green indicates information provided by the AeroData server.
B.
Top section shows runway data including length, slope, etc.
C.
Bottom section shows the performance calculation including:

FLEX temperature
Flap setting
Stab trim setting
MRTW and the limiting factor
MTOW
GTOW and CG setting
V-Speeds
Acceleration Altitude
D.
Acceleration altitude (shown as feet MSL) is always 1,000 feet AFE

unless a simple special departure procedure is shown in the
remarks section on Takeoff Data Page 2/5.
E.
The pilot must ensure that the actual takeoff configuration of the
aircraft matched the listed configuration shown at the top of the
page. e.g. FLEX - T/O-1 - ECS ON.
SOP
Page 17 of 24

15.3.6.9
Landing Conditions Page 1/2
A.
Pilot may select up to 3 runways.
B.
Mandatory Items to be filled in are:

Airport of intended landing
Estimated landing weight
Anticipated landing runway
You may select any runway surface and/or contamination type. The
system will default to a dry runway.
D.
For wind, input steady state wind from the ATIS or tower reports.
NOTE
C.
E.
The system does not take into

account wind gusts, any wind gust
factor must be calculated manually.
Screen Outline:
1L - First Runway Selection (Mandatory) (TLR Runway Code)
2L - Second Runway Selection (Optional) (TLR Runway Code)
3L - Third Runway Selection (Optional) (TLR Runway Code)
4L - Surface condition (Dry, Wet, Compacted Snow, Wet Ice, Standing
water, slush, dry snow, wet snow)
5L - Braking Action Report (None - No report, Good, Fair, Poor)
1R - Landing Airport
2R - Wind entry (XXX/XX)
3R - Temperature and QNH entry (XX/XX.XX)
4R - Landing Weight (Mandatory) (XX.X)
5R - Access landing data page
Page 18 of 24
SOP

15.3.6.10
Landing Conditions Page 2/2
A.
On this screen you can select landing flaps of 5 or 6 (FULL)
B.
You may also select low visibility for operations less than 4000 RVR
C.
Anti-Ice can be selected OFF or ALL
D.
You can select if you have the STALL PROT ICE SPEED EICAS
message, so the proper speed adjustments can be made.
E.
Screen Outline:
1L - FLAP - Select Flaps 5 or Flaps 6 (FULL)
2L - VISIBILITY - Select NORMAL or LOW VIS (Less than 4000 RVR)
3L - ANTI ICE - Select OFF or ALL
4L - STALL PROT ICE SPEED - Select NO or YES
5L - Not active
1R-5R - Not active
SOP
Page 19 of 24

15.3.6.11
Landing Runway Data Page 1/5
A.
This page will display the information that was submitted for
calculation
B.
Screen Outline:
FLT NO - Flight number from request
LDW - Landing weight from request
Time - Time data was calculated
Wind - Wind from request
OAT - Temperature from request
QNH - Altimeter setting from request
15.3.6.12
A.

This page will display remarks from the data calculation process:
None
Listing of non-standard airplane configuration and runway condition
listing
No Landing Data Available, recheck inputs in the Landing Conditions
Screen
Page 20 of 24
SOP

B.
Screen Outline:
REMARKS - Remarks will be displayed
2L-5L - Not active
1R-6R - Not active
15.3.6.13
A.
The top section will show information provided by the system to the
pilot concerning their first runway request
B.
Pages 3/5, 4/5. and 5/5 are identical and contain data from the 2nd
and 3rd runway request.
SOP
Page 21 of 24

C.
Screen outline:
FLAP - Flap setting from request
MLDW/LIM - Max landing weight and the code for the limiting factor.
ALDW - Actual landing weight from request
VRF, VAP, VAC , VFS - V Speeds calculated by the system based on
entered conditions
FACTORED DIST - Factored landing distance for the requested
conditions
UNFACTORED DIST - Unfactored landing distance for the requested
conditions
Page 22 of 24
SOP

15.4
COMMUNICATION
15.4.1
CHANGING COM 3 FROM DATA TO VOICE

Changing from DATA to
VOICE should only be done
as a last option.
Once VOICE is selected, COM
3 cannot be reset to DATA
until on the ground.
To change COM 3 from DATA to VOICE, do the following:

Step
Flight Crew
On the MCDU
SOP
Radio Function Key ........................................................ Press

a. Displays the RADIO 1/2 page.
NEXT Function Key ....................................................... Press

Line Select Key 6L ................................................ Press Twice

- There is no text (i.e., blank) displayed at this 6L position.
a. Displays the COM 3 1/1 page.
Line Select Key 2R.................................................Press Twice

a. Transfers MODE from DATA to VOICE (i.e., VOICE changes color from
white to green).
b. Ensure compliance with FOM ACARS inoperative procedures.
Logbook Write-Up ................................................. Accomplish

a. Make a logbook write-up. COM 3 can only be returned to VOICE after:
- COM 3 is returned to DATA and
- a subsequent power down/up is accomplished.
Page 23 of 24

Page 24 of 24
SOP
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 15-1
Chapter 15
ACARS
15.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ACARS is a data link system that allows character-oriented messages to
be exchanged between ground stations and the aircraft. Messages are
divided into two groups:
- Addressed to or by crewmembers: data link requests or free text

reports;
routine events.
Communication to ground
stations are made through
VDR 3 channel (COM 3). The
MCDU provides the interface
with ACARS applications to
crewmembers.
15.2
VDR 3 is normally in Data Mode for

proper ACARS operation. In the
event of an emergency when COM 1
and COM 2 have failed, VDR 3 may
be switched to Voice Mode for communications.
ACARS APPLICATIONS
15.2.1
OPS-07A
NOTE
- Automatically sent: reports of flight data, performance data and
AIR TRAFFIC SERVICE APPLICATIONS

A.
ATIS (Air Traffic Information Service) Reports application enables

the flight crew to send a downlink message requesting an uplink
report that may be a specific airport information or an en route
information.
B.
Departure Clearance Application is used to request a departure

clearance through character-oriented messages instead of voice
communication.
C.
Expected Taxi Clearance is used to request a taxi clearance through

character-oriented messages instead of voice communication.
D.
Pushback Clearance is used to request a pushback clearance

through character-oriented messages instead of voice
communication.
E.
TWIP (Terminal Weather Information for Pilots) provides

meteorological information to the flight crew.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 15-2
15.2.2
AIRLINE OPERATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS APPLICATIONS

(AOC)
Republic Airlines has customized AOC applications supported by the
CMF (Communications Management Function).
Examples of the AOC applications that Republic Airlines will use are:
1) Flight Initialization
2) Free Text
3) Out, Off, On and In Events (OOOI events) are automatic reports
sent to the airline operations control. Both reports and trigger
events are configured as follows:
(a) Out Events - Doors closed, brakes released.
(b) Off Events - Takeoff
(c) On Events - Landing
(d) In Events - Brakes set, doors open
15.3
ACARS WINDOW PAGES

Pushing the DLK button on the MCDU brings up the following CMF MAIN
MENU page. Further access to other pages is provided through the line
select keys on each side of the MCDU.
15.3.1
ACARS MAIN MENU
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
15.3.2
PAGE 15-3
PRE-FLIGHT INITIALIZATION
Prior to each flight, the crew will initialize the ACARS.
From the Main Menu, press line select key (LSK) 1L to access
the Pre-flight screen. The following screen will appear:
Each selection is outlined as follows:
1L - Initialize: enters pre-flight initialization page

1R - New Messages: enters messages page
2L - Departure Delay: enter Departure delay page
3L - Free Text: enters free text page
4L - Weather Request: enters weather request page
6L - Main Menu: returns to main menu
6R - Air Traffic Services: enters air traffic services page
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 15-4
ERJ-170 STANDARD
From the Pre-Flight Screen, press line select key (LSK) 1L to access the
Initialization Screen. This will access the ACARS Initialization Display as
follows
On the Initialization page, the following data must be entered.
- 1L - Flight Number: enter flight number

- 1R - Date: enter the day of the month.
- 2L - Departure Station: enter/confirm departure airport (ICAO
standard: i.e. KIND or KMCO)
- 2R - Destination Station: enter/confirm arrival airport (ICAO
standard: i.e. KIND or KMCO)
- 3L - Fuel Quantity: enter/confirm fuel quantity on aircraft
- 3R - Boarded Fuel: Not Applicable (No entry made)
- 4L - Captain ID: enter Captain's employee number
- 4R - Crew 3 ID: enter Flight Attendant's employee number
- 5L - First Officer ID: enter First Officer's employee number
- 5R - Crew 4 ID: enter Flight Attendant's employee number
- 6L - Return: will go back to previous screen.
- 6R -Auto Initialization: Sends a downlink request to the host server
to provide information for initialization. This function will not be
used.
After entering all required data, simply push the RETURN key (6L) to
return to the main menu.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
15.3.3
PAGE 15-5
FREE TEXT FUNCTIONALITY

Free text functionality allows the crew to send operational messages to
dispatch. From the main menu, press line select key (LSK) 4L to access
the Free Text screen. The following screen will appear:
On the free text page, data may be entered as follows:
NOTE

5L - TEST: A "TEST" toggle prompt appears when "MULTI" is
entered as the first line of text at LSK 1L. If the TEST prompt is
selected, when the message is sent, several test blocks of test
will be appended to the downlink message.
6L - Return: will go back to previous screen.
5R - Print: will print the entire free text message if a printer is
installed.
6R - Report: Sends the entire free text message.
OPS-07A
If more than four lines of information are needed, select "NEXT" on

the MCDU to obtain another free
text screen with additional space
lines for data entry.
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 15-6
15.3.4
UPLINK MESSAGES
Dispatch has the capability of sending operational information to the
cockpit crew via uplinked messages to the cockpit. The crew will be
made aware that a message has been received by a flashing amber
MSG on the lower right section of the PFD and "DISPLAY MSG RCVD"
on the MCDU Scratched.
The crew may then read the message by:
1) Selecting DLK on the MCDU
2) Selecting NEW MSGS (1R) on the main menu.
The message will be displayed as the following:
No response to dispatch is required unless requested in the message.

Once the message is read it can be viewed at a later time by selecting
MSGS RCVD (LSK 3R) on the main menu. If the crew is requested to
respond, simply select free text from the main menu and respond as
necessary. If the crew wants to review a message that they have sent to
dispatch, select MSGS SENT (LSK 2R) on the main menu.
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
15.4
PAGE 15-7
ACARS NAVIGATION WINDOWS
ATS MENU
LSK 6R
SYS MENU
LSK 6L
INITIALIZE
LSK 1L
SEP DELAY
LSK 2L
FREE TEXT
LSK 3L
WX REQUEST
LSK 4L
NEW MSGS
LSK 1R
FREE TEXT
LSK 3L
ENTR DELAY
LSK 1L
WX REQUEST
LSK 4L
DIVERSION
LSK 3R
ARR DELAY
LSK 2L
ETA
LSK 2R
NEW MSGS
LSK 1R
POST FLT
LSK 3L
FLT TIMES
LSK 1L
ARR DELAY
LSK 2L
FREE TEXT
LSK 3L
FREE TEXT
LSK 4L
POST FLT
RPT
LSK 4L
NEW MSGS
LSK 1R
MAIN MENU
PRE FLT
LSK 1L
IN FLT
LSK 2L
FLT TIMES
LSK 5L
NEW MSGS
LSK 1R
MSGS SENT
LSK 2R
VOX
CONTACT
LSK 4R
STATUS
LSK 5R
SENSORS
LSK 1L
ASCB DATA
LSK 2L
NEW MSGS
LSK 1R
ACARS NAVIGATION WINDOWS
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
EM170AOM140480A.DGN
MSGS RCVD
LSK 3R
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 15-8
15.5
15.5.1
COMMUNICATION
CHANGING COM 3 FROM DATA TO VOICE
Changing from DATA to
VOICE should only be done
as a last option.
Once VOICE is selected, COM
3 cannot be reset to DATA
until on the ground.
To change COM 3 from DATA to VOICE, do the following:

Step
Flight Crew
On the MCDU
Radio Function Key ........................................................ Press

NEXT Function Key ....................................................... Press

Line Select Key 6L ............................................... Press Twice

- There is no text (i.e., blank) displayed at this 6L position.
a. Displays the COM 3 1/1 page.
Line Select Key 2R................................................ Press Twice

a. Transfers MODE from DATA to VOICE (i.e., VOICE changes color from
white to green).
b. Ensure compliance with FOM ACARS inoperative procedures.
Logbook Write-Up..................................................Accomplish
a. Make a logbook write-up. COM 3 can only be returned to VOICE after:
- COM 3 is returned to DATA and
- a subsequent power down/up is accomplished.
End of Chapter
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE TOC 16-1
Chapter 16: Flight Management System

16.1 Reserved ................................................................................................. 16-1
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE TOC 16-2
Original 29AUG2005
ERJ-170 STANDARD
OPS-07A
ERJ-170 STANDARD
PAGE 16-1
Chapter 16
Flight Management System
16.1
RESERVED
Use Honeywell Primus EPIC FMS Information.
End of Chapter
OPS-07A
Original 29AUG2005
PAGE 16-2
ERJ-170 STANDARD
Original 29AUG2005
OPS-07A

Sopm E170

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sopm E170

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ERJ-170

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

OPS-07A STANDARD OPERATING

Changed manual status from accepted to approved.

Added statement authorizing the SOP, QRH and APM to

Relocated. No text change.

Updated Graphic Correct Cabin Layout

Changed paragraph title. Reworded to clarify meaning.

New paragraph. Combined old 3.1.1A and 3.1.1 B to form

Changed Status to Basis. Grammatical correction.

Reworded to better match the AFM guidance.

Updated with ERJ-175 information.

Relocated CG envelope to the Loading Section.

New CG Envelope for ERJ-175

Entire section rewritten to more closely match AFM speed

Added text concerning delayed use of anti-ice.

Changed ERJ-170 LR to ERJ-170.

Removed (R) from this. Actual AFM limit.

Relocated to match AFM and clarify meaning.

OPS-07A STANDARD OPERATING

Removed item C. [DELETED] and renumbered.

Changed items to bold.

Relocated and renumbered

Added Noise Limits Section from CF34-8E5 AFM Supplement.

Updated FOM reference.

Changed Parking Brake response from Set to ON

Removed APG reference

Removed reference to the Embraer Airplane Flight Manual.

Removed reference to the Runway Analysis Manual.

Changed normal checklists on board to 1.

Removed CG calculator reference.

PBE- Added blue dot check from Release Notes.

Added comment requiring headset to be installed if

Minimum battery voltage. Revised guidance in accordance

Removed paragraph D and Note Box.

Changed APU Start to remove FADEC wakeup step (ON,

OPS-07A STANDARD OPERATING

New paragraph to reflect countdown timer incorporated

Removed A22 CB reference.

Changed Flight Control to FLT CTRL.

Added Electrical PBIT procedure table.

Relocated PBIT procedures from 6.4.6 to here.

Removed IAW to per to eliminate confusion.

Revised the WHEN conditions.

Added requirement to exercise trim as required by the

Renumbered and shortened title of section: no content

Renumbered and shortened title of section: no content

Renumbered and shortened title of section: no content

Renumbered and shortened title of section: no content

Renumbered and shortened title of section: no content

Changed FO duties from entering fuel to resetting fuel

Removed reference to checking ACARs time. This is now

Removed reference to station agent verifying fuel load.

Removed (D) from Parking Brake

Removed (D) from Parking Brake

Removed delayed engine start procedure table and

Added Emphasis Box concerning moving the rudders

Changed arrow flow to match expanded flow

OPS-07A STANDARD OPERATING

Changed arrow flow to match expanded flow

Changed arrow flow to match expanded flow

Adjusted captains flow arrow to include the IESS.